OF THE
By
Author of ‘Place-names of the Isle of Man’
Published under the auspices of Tynwald by the Manx Museum andnbsp;Ancient Monuments Trustees
OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS LONDON: HUMPHREY MILFORD
1931
Keltische taal —en letterkunde
OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS AMEN HOUSE, E.C. 4nbsp;LONDON EDINBURGH GLASGOWnbsp;LEIPZIG NEW YORK TORONTOnbsp;MELBOURNE CAPETOWN BOMBAYnbsp;CALCUTTA MADRAS SHANGHAI
HUMPHREY MILFORD
PUBLISHER TO THE UNIVERSITY
PRINTED IN GREAT BRITAIN
I
-ocr page 9-The greater part of this grammar was written during the winters of 1909-10, and as there seemed little hope of its ever being published the MS. was deposited in the Manx Museum in 1927. In 1930nbsp;T5mwald graciously granted £250 towards its publication and alsonbsp;that of a projected work on Manx personal names. The grammar hasnbsp;now been thoroughly revised and appendixes and index added.
Students of Manx have been seriously handicapped for many years by the need of a grammar, and it is hoped that the present work willnbsp;be not only of assistance to Manx people desirious of having anbsp;knowledge of their ancient mother-tongue, but also a source of interestnbsp;to our Celtic brethren across the seas.
Manx differs greatly from Irish and Scottish Gaelic, chiefly owing to Enghsh influence, and it was difficult to find a model on which tonbsp;base the grammar, especially as no complete grammar of the languagenbsp;had hitherto been written. Several Irish grammars lent by Mr.nbsp;Goodwin proved extremely helpful. Manx has gone its own waynbsp;during the centuries, but its grammar still resembles that of itsnbsp;parent language, Irish, although there are many deviations.
Pronunciation can, of course, only be learnt from the hps of Manx speakers, and these are, alas! becoming rarer every year. For thosenbsp;who have no access to a Manx speaker, the tables of vowel andnbsp;consonant sounds, which are based on phonetic principles, shouldnbsp;be a valuable guide to the student.
Although Manx spelling is clumsy and in many cases does not indicate the true pronunciation, it has been thought advisable tonbsp;follow the orthography of the Manx Bible as closely as possible, thenbsp;latter being the chief piece of literature written in the Manx language.nbsp;A few clumsy and awkward spellings have been simplified, and thesenbsp;alterations, it is hoped, wiU prove more of a help than a hindrancenbsp;to students.
Qh has been adopted throughout the work to indicate that sound which is represented by a slender t in Irish and Scottish Gaelic. Thisnbsp;will prevent the student from confusing this dental with the gutturalnbsp;spirant ch.
In the matter of verbal conjugation the Irish usage has been departed from, as the Manx verbs seem naturally to fall into twonbsp;divisions, viz. (i) those beginning with consonants, and (2) thosenbsp;beginning with vowels.
I have now to acknowledge obligations to many friends who have assisted and advised me in various ways. Some of these havenbsp;passed away since the grammar was committed to writing, notably
-ocr page 10-Vi nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;PREFACE
Mr. Edward Goodwin of Peel, author of Lessoonyn ayns Qhengey ny mayrey Elian Vannin] Professor Kuno Meyer of Liverpool University ; and Professor E. C. Quiggin of Cambridge University. Thenbsp;latter kindly revised the historical introduction.
Among those who have contributed valuable hints and suggestions the following must be mentioned:—The Ven. the Archdeacon of Man,nbsp;who kindly read the proofs; Professor Carl J. S. Marstrander of Oslonbsp;University, who revised the historical introduction; Mr. Williamnbsp;Cubbon, who, besides giving valuable technical advice, took overnbsp;the whole of the business arrangements; and Tynwald, who made thenbsp;publication of the grammar possible. To all these friends I am deeplynbsp;indebted for their unwearied energy and kindness.
I should also like to express appreciation to the printers of the grammar for the great care and assiduity which they have exercisednbsp;in its production.
J. J. KNEEN.
DOUGLAS, zst August 1931.
-ocr page 11-HISTORICAL introduction ORTHOGRAPHYnbsp;The Lettersnbsp;The Spoken Languagenbsp;Table of Vowel Soundsnbsp;Table of Diphthongs .
Table of Consonant Sounds Vowels and Digraphs .
Diphthongs, amp;c.
Nasal Vowels Consonants
Consonants, General Remarks on the Accent
Table of Mutations Aspiration, Rules fornbsp;Echpsis, Rules fornbsp;The Insertion of n, g, d, t, and hnbsp;Attenuation and Broadeningnbsp;Syncope
ACCIDENCE The Nounnbsp;Kindnbsp;Gender .
Number.
Plurals, Examples of Case
Rules for the formation of The Genitive Pluralnbsp;The Declensionsnbsp;1st Declensionnbsp;2nd Declensionnbsp;3rd Declensionnbsp;4th Declensionnbsp;5th Declension
The Adjective Kind
Declension Gender .
Number.
Degrees of Comparison Irregular Comparisonsnbsp;The Numerals.
The Emphatic Particles
1-30
31-47
31
31
32
33
33
34
35
36 36nbsp;38
40
41
42
43
45
46 46
49-118
49 49nbsp;49
51
52
52
53 53
53
54
57
58
59
60
62 62
62
63 63nbsp;63nbsp;65nbsp;65
67
dü nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;CONTENTS
The Pronoun .
Personal Pronouns Reflexive Pronounsnbsp;Prepositionalnbsp;Relativenbsp;Demonstrativenbsp;Partitivenbsp;Interrogativenbsp;Reciprocal
The Verb.
Conjugations .
Moods and Tenses ist Conjugationnbsp;2nd Conjugationnbsp;Verbal Nouns, Rules for the Formation ofnbsp;Verb ve, ‘to be’. Conjugation ofnbsp;Verb coayl, ‘to lose’. Conjugation ofnbsp;Verb she, ‘it is’
Irregular Verbs cur, coyrt .nbsp;gra .
feddyn, geddyn jannoonbsp;fakin .nbsp;clashtynnbsp;§heet .nbsp;goll .nbsp;goaiU .
Defective Verbs fod
jarg . asnbsp;er
strooys, stroo-hene hioll, hiolleenbsp;dobbyrnbsp;Ihis
Impersonal Verbs
The Adverb
Adverb Classification Emphatic Adverbsnbsp;Up and down .
Over, in and out North, south, east, westnbsp;Days of the weeknbsp;Compound Adverbsnbsp;Prepositions, List ofnbsp;Conjunctions,
Interjections, ,,
68
68
68
69
71
71
72 72
72
73 73nbsp;73nbsp;75
77
78 80nbsp;82
85
85
85
86
87
88 88
89
90
91
91
92 92
92
93 93nbsp;93nbsp;93nbsp;93nbsp;93nbsp;93
95
96
97 97
97
98
98
99
100
101
102
CONTENTS
Word Building .
Prefixes, Prepositional Prefixes, Substantivenbsp;Prefixes, Adjectival.
Suffixes .
Diminutives .
Adjectives, Formation of Verbs derived from Nouns
The Noun
Genitive Case, Examples of Genitive Case, Pluralnbsp;Genitive Case after Prepositionsnbsp;Dative, after Prepositionsnbsp;Time
The Adjective
Used Attributively .
Agreement of . nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;.
Used Predicatively .
Examples of Comparisons Numeral Adjectivesnbsp;Possessive Adjectives
The Pronoun .
Personal Relativenbsp;Genitive Casenbsp;Examples with
The Verb.
Place of .
Subjunctive Mood, Use of Relative Eorm
Verbal Noun and its Functions The Verb she .
Enghsh Secondary Tenses, How to translate Prepositions after Verbsnbsp;Moods and Tenses, Examples of
The Adverb Place of .
Degrees of Comparison Adverbs of Placenbsp;The Negative Adverb—Notnbsp;Up and down .
Over ....
Head foremost However
The ....
Examples with Adverbs .
IX
103 103
105
106 no
113
116
117
119-93
119 121
121
122 122
122
123 123
125
125
126
129
130
132 132
132
133
134
136 136
136
137
138 143
148
149 149
157 157
157
158
158
159
160 160nbsp;160nbsp;160nbsp;160
CONTENTS
The Preposition Examples with Nounsnbsp;Pronouns ....
Translation of the Preposition FOR Translation of the Preposition OFnbsp;Classification of the Uses of the Prepositionnbsp;ecnbsp;ernbsp;ass
hug, chum jehnbsp;da
fo, fy . gyn, dyn
gy, gys, dy, dys ayn, aynsnbsp;eddyr.nbsp;lesh .nbsp;rish, rynbsp;myr .nbsp;veih, voishnbsp;ro, roishnbsp;harrishnbsp;trooidnbsp;my, myshnbsp;my, myr, mdrishnbsp;liorishnbsp;derrey
Prepositional Phrases The Conjunctionnbsp;Co-Ordinativenbsp;Subordinativenbsp;Sentencesnbsp;Parsingnbsp;Idiomsnbsp;ta . . . aymnbsp;ta . . . Ihiamnbsp;I know .
I hke, I prefer, I wish I must .
I die I owenbsp;I meet .
Physical Sensations I cannot helpnbsp;I am alonenbsp;I ask
I do not care I ought to, I should
163
164
165
165
167
169
169
169
171
172
172
173
174 174nbsp;174
174
175
175
176
176
177 177nbsp;177
177
178 178nbsp;178nbsp;178
178
179
180 180nbsp;180nbsp;180nbsp;182nbsp;184nbsp;184
184
185
186
186
187
187
188
188
189
189
190 190nbsp;190
CONTENTS
I love .....
I remember ....
English Dependent Phrases translated by the Idiomatic Expressions
Verbal Noun
cur
jean
tar
immee ..... Miscellaneous ....
Nouns of the ist Declension, List of
2nd .....
3rd.....
5th.....
Irregular Verbal Nouns, List of .
XI
190
191 191nbsp;191
191
192
192
193 193
194-202 194nbsp;197
199
200
201
203
I. Prehistoric Man.
The earliest inhabitants of Britain, as far as is at present known, were the people of the river-gravels, and the flint-fashioners andnbsp;cave-dwellers of the Old Stone Age. Palaeohthic man has leftnbsp;behind many traces in the south of England, but there is as yetnbsp;no evidence that he ever extended as far north as the Isle of Man.nbsp;His successors belonged to that great invading race which, comingnbsp;from the south of Europe, occupied even the remotest comers of thenbsp;British Isles in the later Stone Age, leaving traces of their settlementsnbsp;from Kent to Connemara, from Orkney to the Isles of Scilly. Hutnbsp;circles scattered here and there, flint-flakes and arrow-heads foundnbsp;abundantly in certain localities as well as occasional barrows, testifynbsp;to the presence of these Neolithic folk in Man. They were huntersnbsp;and fishermen, having no knowledge of metal but fashioning theirnbsp;tools and weapons of wood and stone. There is no evidence that theynbsp;knew how to spin or weave or to grow grain for food. They doubtlessnbsp;possessed some form of speech but we have no means of ascertainingnbsp;what it was.
2. The Coming of the Celt.
It is supposed by many authorities that the use of bronze was introduced into the British Islands about 1800 b.c. Whether thisnbsp;advance was due to a fresh invasion from the Continent or to peaceful trading is not known. Certain it is, however, from an investigation of the burial-mounds that a series of invasions did take placenbsp;before the arrival of the Celts. From about 700 b.c. onwards we findnbsp;the Celts advancing from the south of Germany and overrunning thenbsp;whole of the west of Europe. In course of time they reached ournbsp;islands, crossing in all probability from the mouth of the Rhine andnbsp;the north of Gaul. There is reason to believe that this Celtic invasionnbsp;took place in successive waves extending over several centuries.nbsp;The latest comers introduced the knowledge of how to work iron.
At the beginning of the Christian era the whole of the British Islands were doubtless occupied by Celtic-speaking peoples, thoughnbsp;the earlier inhabitants had by no means been exterminated. Evennbsp;at this early period Irish differed very greatly from the languagesnbsp;of Gaul and Britain. This old Celtic tongue belonged to the greatnbsp;Indo-European family of languages and showed affinity to thenbsp;cognate dialects of Italy, chief amongst which was Latin. But Celticnbsp;in early times had gone its own way in one or two particulars, ofnbsp;which we may mention two, (i) all the Celtic dialects show the loss
B
-ocr page 18-2 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION
of an original p, e.g. Latin pater, Old Irish athir, Manx ayr; Latin piscis, Irish iasc, Manx eeast; (ii) in primitive Celtic ë became ï,nbsp;e.g. Latin rex, Irish rï, Manx ree.
3. Goidelic and Brythonic. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;I
Now the original Indo-European tongue possessed a pecuUar q sound which was treated differently by the various groups. In thenbsp;Italic group, for instance, Latin retained the q, whilst Oscan andnbsp;Umbrian changed it to p. A similar dualism is found in Celtic. Mostnbsp;of the Celts appear to have substituted the labial for the guttural,nbsp;and it seems likely that at the beginning of our era p was pronounced nearly everywhere in Gaul and Great Britain. The gutturalnbsp;was retained in Ireland, where later on, possibly in the fifth century,nbsp;it became a simple k writteii. c. We may therefore speak of p-Celtsnbsp;and q-Celts, the former being also known, as far as our islands arenbsp;concerned, as Brythons, the latter as Goidels. Owing to greatnbsp;national movements in the first few centuries of our era the areanbsp;over which a Brythonic language was spoken became considerablynbsp;restricted. Goidelic speech was introduced by invaders from Irelandnbsp;into the Isle of Man and the Highlands of Scotland, where the Celticnbsp;that is still spoken is Goidelic and not Brythonic. At the same timenbsp;the ‘Welsh’ in England were driven by the Teutonic invaders intonbsp;Wales and Devon and Cornwall, whilst many thousands fled tonbsp;Brittany in the fifth and sixth centuries a.d. Thus the Celticnbsp;languages which survived in modem times may be classified asnbsp;follows:
A. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Goidelic: (i)
(ii)
(iii)
B. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Brythonic: (i)
(ii)
(iii)
Irish.
Manx.
Scottish Gaehc.
Welsh.
Cornish.
Breton.
As examples to illustrate the difference between the two divisions in the treatment of Indo-European q the following forms may benbsp;cited:
Latin quattuor, Oscan petora, Gaulish/irfor-, Old Irish cethir. Modem Irish ceithre, Manx kiare, Scottish Gaelic ceithear, Welsh pedwar,nbsp;Cornish peswar, Breton pewar, Manx coirrey cauldron, Irish coire,nbsp;Welsh pair.
We learn from Tacitus that the harbours of Ireland were well known to merchants from Gaul, and at a very early date a number ofnbsp;words must have been borrowed by Goidelic from Latin. The mostnbsp;important of such terms learnt from early traders were probably
-ocr page 19-HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;3
¦words like Old Irish fin, wine, Manx feeyn from Latin vinum, and airh, gold, Irish dr from Latin aurum.
4. Christianity introduced into Man.
The Isle of Man was probably converted to Christianity by monks from Irelaa^ in the fifth and sixth centuries, and as a large nuinBernbsp;of terms connected with the new faith had no equivalent in thenbsp;native Goidelic speech, we find the Latin words used in Man, Ireland,nbsp;and Scotland. As the study of these borrowings is of great importance,nbsp;some of the commoner loan-words may be here enumerated:
Manx |
Irish |
Latin |
agglish, church |
eaglais, 0, Ir. eclis |
ecclesia |
ainle, angel |
aingeal |
angelus |
aspick, bishop |
easpoc, 0. Ir. epscop |
episcopus |
baghyl, crozier |
bachall |
baculum |
bannaght, blessing |
beannacht, 0. Ir. bendacht |
benedictio |
bashtey, baptize |
baiste, 0. Ir. bathis |
baptizare |
caisht, Easter |
caisc |
pascha |
casherick, holy |
cosecartha |
consecro |
fhiamble, temple |
teampull |
templum |
corp, body |
corp |
corpus |
crosh, cross |
cros |
crux |
disert, hermitage |
disert |
desert um |
feailley, festival |
féile |
vigilia |
iurin, hell |
iffem |
infemum |
jouyl, devil |
diabhall |
diabolus |
kargys. Lent |
corgas |
quadragesima |
kingeesh, Whitsuntide |
cincigais |
quinquagesima |
maddin, morning |
maidin, 0. Ir. maten |
matutina |
maynagh, monk |
manach |
monachus |
niollaght, curse |
mallacht, 0. Ir. mal-dacht |
maledictio |
noUick, Christmas |
nodlaig, 0. Ir. not-laic |
natalicia |
oalan, wafer |
abhlann, 0. Ir. ob-lann (gen. sing.) |
oblatio |
ostyl, apostle |
apstal |
apostolus |
paag, kiss |
póg, 0. Ir. póc |
pac-em (kiss of peace) |
padjer, prayer |
paidir, 0. Ir. pater |
pater (noster) |
peccah, sin |
peacadh,O.Ir.peccad |
peccatum |
pobble, people |
pobal, 0. Ir. popul |
populus |
poos, marry |
pós |
sponso |
HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION
Manx saggyrt, priestnbsp;spyrryd, spiritnbsp;trinaid, Trinity
Irish nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Latin
__ sagart, O. Ir. sacart sacerdos spiorad, 0. Ir. spirut spiritusnbsp;trionóid, O. Ir. trin- trinitat-emnbsp;dóit
At the same time or a little later a number of other words were introduced:
Manx Irish Latin | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Very important are the names of the days of the week:
Jelune representing Irish Dia Luain, Latin dies Lunae.
Jemayrt, Irish Dia Mairt, Latin dies Martis.
Jecrean, Irish Dia Céadaoin, the day of the first aoine or fast Latin jejunium).
-ocr page 21-HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;5
Jerdein, Irish Di’ ardaoin, the day between two fasts.
Jeheiney, Irish Dia h-aoine, the day of fast.
Jesarn, Irish Dia Sathairn, Latin dies Satwrni.
Jedoonee, Irish Dia domhnaigh, Lat. dies dominica, the Lord’s day.
S- Early Celtic monuments.
The pagan Irish introduced into Man a curious method of writing called Ogham which they employed on the edges of the stones theynbsp;set up to commemorate their dead. The alphabet was probablynbsp;developed in the south and south-west of Ireland, and is also foundnbsp;in Wales, Devon, and Man. The alphabet is as follows;
-/ // ¦¦///
Q
inn '
N
AGUE
M G NG ST R
In the Isle of Man five burial pillars bearing such inscriptions * have been found, the last to be discovered being bilingual, i.e. Latin andnbsp;Goidelic. Only one such bilingual is known from Ireland, but severalnbsp;have been discovered in Wales. The one in question runs:
-m-
III! / I
H iiir
AMMECAT Finvs ROCAT HIC lACIT.
A. the son of R. lies here.
Observe that on the earliest Ogham inscriptions q had not yet become c.
6. Scandinavian rule.
During the ninth, tenth, and eleventh centuries the Isle of Man fell under _^e_rule of the Vikings, and a considerable number ofnbsp;Norwegians settled in the isTand. Numerous traces of these Scandinavians are to be found in our proper names—both surnames andnbsp;names of places—as weU as on the stone monuments bearing Old Norsenbsp;inscriptions in Runic characters. As these inscriptions are not in anbsp;Celtic tongue, they do not come within our province. When oncenbsp;the sea-rovers had firmly established themselves, they turned theirnbsp;attention to commerce, and two of our towns were probably foundednbsp;by them. Such prolonged occupation could not fail to leave its marknbsp;on the language, and we find that a number of terms connected withnbsp;seafaring and commerce were borrowed from Norse. In some casesnbsp;it is not easy to determine whether a word was taken over fromnbsp;Scandinavian^ or from Early English. As instances the following maynbsp;be mentioned;
' See Kermode, Manx Crosses, pp. 96 fi.
* The following words from this source may also be noted;
Bowe, a sunken rock; O. Norse bo¥i, a breaker, denoting hidden rocks. Burroo, a small round (fortified) hill; O. Norse borg, a hill.
-ocr page 22-6 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION
baatey, boat, 0. Norse batr.
burling, hark, vessel. Mid. Ir. beirling, Norse byrSingr. garey, garden, Ir. gardha, O. Norse garSr.nbsp;giau, creek, cove. Sc. G. geodh, geodha, Norse gja.nbsp;margey, market, Ir. margadh, Norse markaSr, ultimately fromnbsp;Latin mercatum.
ping, penny, O. Norse penningr, O. Eng. penninc. sker, rock. Sc. G. sgeir, Norse sker.nbsp;stiur, helm, Ir. stiuir, O. Norse styri.
7. English influence.
But the language which has affected the vocabulary of Manx most profoundly is naturally English. And the words which Manx borrowed from English would repay a detailed study, as they enterednbsp;the language at different periods and from various sources. Thusnbsp;in words like ashoon, nation; livrey, to deliver; pardoon, pardon;nbsp;resoon, reason; persoon, person; sharmane, sermon, the Middlenbsp;English stress on the final syllable has been faithfully preserved. Innbsp;many cases an English word has been borrowed in its northern form,nbsp;which differs from the one in use in the literary language, e.g. coau,nbsp;chaff. North. Eng. caff, Scottish cauved The following list mightnbsp;be greatly extended,nbsp;drow, grains, Eng. draff,nbsp;foayr, favour.
goshtiu, sponsor. Mid. Ir. goistibe, Eng. godsib, gossip.
mainstyr, master, Ir. maighistir.
paitchey, child, Ir. paiste, Eng. page.
pooar, power. Mid. Eng. poër, pouer.
roddan, rat. North. Eng. ratton, rottan.
sambyl, sample.
saue, save.
scadoo, shadow.
Clegg, a horse-fly; O. Norse kleggi.
Clett, a rock; O. Norse klettr.
Gill, a ravine; O. Norse gil.
Naboo, a neighbour; O. Norse ndbu^, dwelling near to; ndbiii, a neighbour. Skimmee, a crew; O. Norse skip ma¥r, a shipmate, one of the crew.
Skort, a chasm; O. Norse skorta.
Stack, a detached rock; O. Norse stakkr.
* The following may also be noted; apricoc, apricot-. Dial. Eng. abrecock.
Avril, April.
bardoon, burden (of song); Mid. Eng. burdoon. berreman, a horse’s collar; Lancs, barriham.nbsp;coggyl, cockle; Mid. Eng. coccel.nbsp;crooin, crown; Mid. Eng. crune.nbsp;daunsin, dance; Mid. Eng. dansen.
-ocr page 23-HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;7
shickyr, sure, Mid. Eng. and North. Eng. siker, sikker.
treishteil, trust, Mid. Eng. trist (?).
8. History of the Language.
The only records that we have of even the existence of the Manx Ian guage before the seventeenth century consist of names of persons andnbsp;placfö on Runic ston^^, and in the Chronicon Manniae and the Rent-roll of 1511. The inscribed stones, of which there are a good numbernbsp;Hi the Isle, are always in Norse, while the other records are in Latin.
In the year 1604 John Phillips,' rector of Hawarden, in Flintshire, I'vas consecrated bisEcip of Mann. He translated the Prayer Booknbsp;into Manx, which was not printed until 1895 by the now defunctnbsp;Manx Society. From the fact that it contains a prayer for Charles Inbsp;and his Queen but not for their son, the date must be placed betweennbsp;1^625 and 1630. This translation is mentioned by Challoner, Sache-verell. Bishop Wilson, and others, some of whom speak of a tran^-tion of the Bible made at the same time, but the existence of this isnbsp;doubtful. This seems to be the Erst recorded instance of the language being written, and it is supposed that the orthography wasnbsp;partially settled at this time.
In Speed’s Theatre of the Empire of Great Britaine, rst ed., published in 1611, the language is mentioned as follows: ‘The wealthier sort,nbsp;und such as hold the fairest possessions do imitate the people ofnbsp;Lancashire,... howbeit the commoner sort of people, both in languagenbsp;and manners, come nighest unto the Irish.’
James Challoner, in a work entitled A Short Treatise of the Isle of Mann, forming part of his Vale Royal of England or the Countynbsp;Ealatine of Chester, published in 1656, after mention being made ofnbsp;Bishop Phillips and his translation, has the following short statement : ‘ Few speak the English tongue.’
The edition of Camden’s Britannia published in 1695, has among those additions that relate to the Isle of Mann, the following:
'Their gentry are very courteous and aEable, and are more willing to discourse with one in English than in their own language. Notnbsp;only the gentry, but likewise such of the peasants as live in the towns,nbsp;or frequent the town markets, do both understand and speak thenbsp;English language.’
William Sacheverell, sometime governor of the Isle, writing in 1690 says: 'In the Northern part of the Island they speak a deepernbsp;Manx, as they call it, than in the South.’
The next statement of importance is that of the great bishop of
' The Rev. John Kewley, M.A., archdeacon of Man, says that John Phillips, rector of Hawarden, was at the same time rector of Kirk Andreas and archdeacon of Man from 1587.
-ocr page 24-8 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION
the Isle, Thomas Wilson. In his history, written early in the eighteenth century, he mentions Phillips’s Prayer Book, and saysnbsp;that it would have been of no use in his (Bishop Wilson’s) time. Henbsp;then says (in a chapter on the clergy);
‘The clergy are generally natives, and, indeed, it cannot weU be otherwise, none else being qualified to preach and administer thenbsp;sacraments in the Manx Language; for English is not understood bynbsp;two-thirds at least of the Island, though there is an English school innbsp;every parish, so hard is it to change the language of a whole country.’
At this time, though a translation of the Prayer Book had been made, there were no books printed in Manx, and the natives did notnbsp;f^ïadrhëiFbwn language. ¦ Bishop Wilson attempted to reform aÜ this,nbsp;and un^er his Erection certain réÏTgious books were published. Innbsp;the churches Manx services were the rule, an English service beingnbsp;in some parishes never heard, büE since there was no Manx Biblenbsp;and Prayer Book, the clergy were in the habit of translating extempore from an English copy. This gave rise to numberless varietiesnbsp;of renderings, and many stories are told of absurd mistakes madenbsp;by clergy who were insufficiently learned in one or other of the languages. For instance, it is said that one man, in the Gospel for Palmnbsp;Sunday, carefully translated the mocking speech of the Romannbsp;soldiers, Sniaghtey claghagh, Ree ny Hewnyn (Hail, King of the Jews),nbsp;inadvertently making use of the substantive ‘hail’ in place of thenbsp;inter] ection. And again in the Advent Sunday Gospel: Lheiy sharraghnbsp;assyl, for Lhiy sharragh assyl (i.e. ‘a calf the foal of an ass’, insteadnbsp;of a colt).
A young English clergyman, anxious to give his flock a sermon in their own language, chose the parable of the Prodigal Son as hisnbsp;theme, and much amused his hearers by referring to yn lheiy haihtnbsp;(the drowned calf), instead oiyn lheiy beiyht (the fatted calf).
9. Translation of the Bible into Manx.
(_
In 1755, after nearly sixty years of work in the diocese. Bishop Wilson died, and Mark Hildesley succeeded him. In the course ofnbsp;negotiations of this Bishop with the S.P.C.K. for a pubhcation ofnbsp;a Manx translation of the Bible, a paper was issued in 1764 by thenbsp;Society, containing the following statement: ‘ The population of thenbsp;Isle is 20,000, of whom the far greater number are ignorant ofnbsp;English.’
In Bishop Wilson’s time it had been a constant source of complaint among the Manx clergy that they were the only Church in Christendom that had no version of the Bible in the vulgar tongue. Wilsonnbsp;set to work to remedy this defect, and, with the assistance of some ofnbsp;his clergy, he managed to get some of the Bible translated, and the
-ocr page 25-HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;9
Gospel of St. Matthew printed. Bishop Hildesley, his successor, with the help of the whole body of the Manx clergy, completed the work, ,nbsp;and in; 1775 the whole Bible was printed. On many poThfs'irdiffefs V,nbsp;trom the English, ffiei following being the most remarkable: J oshua ii,nbsp;Rahab is called hen-oast (a hostess or inn-keeper); Judges xv, Samson’s foxes with ribbons tied to their tails are explained (accordingnbsp;to a theory that foxes’ tails was a bit of Hebrew slang) to be sheavesnbsp;of com; I Kings xvii, in the account of Elijah and the ravens, thenbsp;Word Duty (ravens) is very rationalistically translated cummalteenbsp;Oreb (the inhabitants of Oreb). Job ii. 9. In the English versionnbsp;Job’s wife is made to say, ‘ Curse God and die. ’ In the Manx versionnbsp;it is Guee gys Jee dy ghoaill ersooyl dty vioys (Pray to God to takenbsp;away thy life).
^0- Literature.
There is no early literature in existence in Manx, though tradition speaks of the Isle as having been the great seat of learning of thenbsp;Goidels. Whatever may have been written here in early days hasnbsp;oither perished, or has been so mixed up with the literature of thenbsp;Irish language as to be indistinguishable from it. The only composition now known that may possibly belong to that shadowy period isnbsp;9- single fragment written down in the year 1789, hy Peter Johnnbsp;Reywood, from the recitation of an old woman in the parish ofnbsp;Kk. Michael, and now forming part of a collection relating to Celticnbsp;^natters by Professor Thorkelin of Copenhagen, preserved in thenbsp;Rritish Museum (Add. MS. 11215). This fragment is a real Ossianicnbsp;poem. It relates how Orry (Gorree), the enemy of Finn Mac Cooilnbsp;(Fionn mac Cumhail), was a prisoner in Finn’s house, and how thenbsp;Women of the household, on a daj^ when Finn had gone a-hunting,nbsp;tormented Orry by tying his hair to the ground as he lay asleep, andnbsp;how he in revenge set fire to the house and burnt them all, and wasnbsp;promptly punished by Finn by being tom in pieces by wild horses.
In a letter that accompanies the poem the transcriber says that many more Ossianic poems were known among the Manx people, but nonbsp;nther seems to have been preserved.
Another old ballad caUed^MannananJBeg^Mac^^Leirr gives the history of the Island in a curious mixture oflact aiTd! fiction up tonbsp;the year 1507, and it would seem from its abruptly breaking off atnbsp;that date that it was composed then, but it is impossible to say whennbsp;it was first written down. The two ballads mentioned above, withnbsp;nil others worthy of any note, may be found in Manx Ballads andnbsp;Music, by A. W. Moore, M.A.
The e^liest book known to have been written in Manx is a trmsla-tion of the Book of Common Prayer.
....... nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;g-
-ocr page 26-10 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION
It was written by or for John Phillips, bishop of Sodor and Man, between 1625 and 1630, but the manuscript remained unprintednbsp;until 1895, when it was published by the Manx Society.
II. List of Publications in the Manx Language.
1699. ‘ The Principles and Duties of Christianity ’, by Thomas Wilson, ‘Lord Bishop of Sodor and Man’. In English and Manx, 8vo.nbsp;Manx title, Coyrle Sodjeh.
1707. Second edition, 8vo, and the Church Catechism.
1740. A corrected and improved edition re-named, ‘The Knowledge and Practice of Christianity’, i2mo.
1748. ‘ Yn Sushtal scruit liorish yn Noo Mian, prentyt ayns Lunnyng liorish Ean Oliver.’ The Gospel of St. Matthew translated bynbsp;Bishop Wilson aided by the Vicars-general Curghey and Walkernbsp;during their confinement in Castle Rushen in 1722,8vo, pp. 106.nbsp;1761. Another edition of ‘The Principles and Duties’. 8vo. J.nbsp;Sadler, Liverpool.
1763. ‘The Four Gospels and Acts.’ 8vo. ist edition. Only a few copies of these were done and supplied to the clergy with blanknbsp;pages for remarks and suggestions.
‘Yn Fer-crauee Creestee’ (The Christian Monitor), translated into Manx by the Rev. Paul Crebbin, Vicar of Santon.
1765. ‘The Book of Common Prayer, translated into Manks for the use of the Diocese of Mann.’ (S.P.C.K.) 8vo. J. and W. Oliver,nbsp;London.
1768. Second edition, i2mo, printed by W. Shepherd, Ramsey. Further editions followed in 1777,1808,1840, and 1842. Somenbsp;of the copies printed in 1842 were in quarto for the use ofnbsp;the clergy.
1767. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;‘The Epistles and Revelation’ (Manx), printed by W. Shepherd,nbsp;Whitehaven.
1768. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;‘The Christian Monitor’ (Manx), 2nd edition.
‘ Lewis’s Catechism, and Prayers for the Fishery.’ Ramsey. 1772. ‘Yn Vible Casherick’, printed by Ware amp; Son, Whitehaven.nbsp;In 3 vols. Further editions in 1775, 1777, and 1819. The lastnbsp;edition (1819) was revised by James Kewley, of Ballanard,nbsp;Onchan.
1775. ‘Yn Conaant Noa’ published separately, prentit liorish Juan Ware as e Vac, Whitehaven. Further edition 1810. i2mo.nbsp;1777. ‘Shibhery Chiarn’ (a short and plain instruction for the betternbsp;understanding of the Lord’s Supper), translated into Manxnbsp;from Bishop Wilson’s English edition of 1734, by the Rev.nbsp;Philip Moore and the Rev. John Kelly (English and Manx).nbsp;8vo. Whitehaven.
-ocr page 27-HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ii
1778. ‘ Aght giare dy heet gys tushtey jeh’n Chredjue Chreestee, ny toiggal jeh Catechism ny Killagh’, by Daniel Cowley. ‘Lioarnbsp;dy Hymnyn ’, by Daniel Cowley.
^783- ‘ Sharmaneyn liorish Thomase Wilson, D.D., Qhiarn Aspick Sodor as Mannin ’, translated by J. Corlett and printed at thenbsp;expense of the Rev. Dr. Wilson, son of the Bishop, 22 sermons.nbsp;3 vols. 8vo. R. CrutweU, Bath.
^794- ‘ Pargys Caillit.’ Paraphrase of portions of Milton’s ‘ Paradise Lost’, done by the Rev. Thomas Christian, Vicar of Marown.nbsp;C. Briscoe, Douglas. Reprint by the Manx Society, 1872.
1795. 'Lioar dy Hymnyn.’ Translation of Wesley’s Hymns, printed by C. Briscoe, Douglas.
1799. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;‘New and Enlarged Edition of Wesley’s Hymns’, Lioar dynbsp;Hymnyn as Arraneyn Spyrrydoil’.
1800. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;‘ Ruleyn yn Robbie enmyssit ny Methodistyn er ny hoiaghey seosenbsp;liorish John Wesley, M.A.’ J. Nuttall, Liverpool.
1804. ‘A Practical Grammar of the Antient Gaelic, or language of the Isle of Mann, usually called Manks ’, by the Rev. John Kelly.nbsp;4to. Pp. 75. Nichols amp; Son, London. Reprint by the Manxnbsp;Society, 1869, and again by Bernard Quaritch, London, 1870.nbsp;1815. ‘Crossman’s Catechism’, done into Manx by the Rev. J.nbsp;Clague, Vicar of Rushen. Beatson amp; Copeland, Douglas.
1818. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;‘ Yn Chied Lioar Gailckagh’ by Rev. Hugh Stowell, Rector ofnbsp;Ballaugh. London.
A portion of this reprinted in 1898. Broadbent amp; Co., Douglas.
1819. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;‘ Cooney dy gheddyn aarloo son baase’,prentit liorish G. Jeffersonnbsp;Doolish.
1820. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;‘Mona Melodies’, collected by J. Borrow. Folio. Pp. 26.nbsp;Price 8s. Mitchells, New Bond St., London.
1822. ‘Banglaneyny Chredjue Creestee’ (the thirty-nine articles of the Christian Belief), printed for the Prayer Book and Homilynbsp;Society, EUerton amp; Henderson, London.
1826. 'Hymnyn ny Arraneyn Moyllee son Paitghyn, liorish I. Watts’, translated by George Killey, Clerk of Kk. Conchan. 32mo.nbsp;White, London. Reprint by Palmer, Peel, about 1895.nbsp;Between 1819 and 1845, numerous religious tracts werenbsp;published, chiefly at Bristol:
N.D. ‘ Coyrle Saggyrt da Cummalieeyn sheerey echey, mychione padjer foshlit.’ Chillcott, Bristol.
N.D. ‘ Coontey jeh dunnallys as baase maynrey Jamys Covey! Tilling, Liverpool.
N.D. ‘Joseph Boght! Tilling, Liverpool.
N.D. ‘ Ayrnyn goit voish y Scriptyr ta soilshaghey ynsagh as curmyn yn Chredjue Chreestee. Tilling, Chelsea, London.
-ocr page 28-12 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION
N.D. ‘Taggloo crauee eddyr bochil anmey as fer jeh e hioltane, liorish Thos. Vivien, Saggyrt jeh Camwood, Devon.’ R.T.S.
N.D. ‘Carrey yn Pheccagh’, translated into Manx by the Rev. T. Howard, Rector of Ballaugh, at the author’s expense. i6mo.nbsp;Hall amp; Son, Maidstone.
N.D. Padjer y Loader.’ Douglas.
1830. ‘Lioar dyHymnyn’, collection of Wesley’s, Watts’s and other hymns. Quiggin, Douglas. 2nd edition, 1846.
1835. (Really 1838.) ‘Dictionary of the Manx Language by Archibald Cregeen.’ 8vo, pp. 188. 418 Subscription copies. J. Quiggin, Douglas. ‘The sheets left on hand were afterwardsnbsp;made up; some little difference is observable, arising from thenbsp;few sheets reprinted being in a larger type, when some wordsnbsp;were unavoidably omitted.’
Reprint 1911 (for Yn Qheshaght Ghailckagh). Brown amp; Son, Douglas.
1846. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;‘ Padjer ynLught-thie liorish A spick Wilson.’ S.P.C.K. Reprintnbsp;from Coyrle Sodjeh.
1847. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;‘Grammatik des Manxiscken’, von Heinrich Leo. Eduardnbsp;Anton, Halle, Germany.
Leo compiled this grammar without having been in the Isle of Man or having heard any Manx spoken. The onlynbsp;Manx book he had seen was ‘Yn Conaant Noa’, and it isnbsp;entirely from this book that he drew up his Grammar, withoutnbsp;the aid of any other grammar or dictionary. It is a work ofnbsp;great industry and insight, though not without errors andnbsp;misstatements unavoidable under the circumstances of itsnbsp;production.
1866. ‘The Manx Dictionary in Two Parts.’ Part I. ‘Fockleyr Manninagh as Baarlagh, liorish Juan y Kelly.’ Part II. Thenbsp;English and Manx Dictionary, prepared from Dr. Kelly’snbsp;Triglot Dictionary with alterations and additions from thenbsp;Dictionaries of A. Cregeen and J. I. Mosley, by the Rev. W.nbsp;Gill, Vicar of Malew, translator to the Tynwald Court, and thenbsp;Rev. J. T. Clarke, Chaplain of St. Mark’s. Both parts in i vol.nbsp;Printed for the Manx Society, Douglas, I.O.M.
1865-72. ‘Mona Miscellany.’ Vols. i and 2. Some Manx verse, amp;c., amongst much English matter. Manx Society, Douglas.
1872. ‘Manx Miscellanies’, Pargys Caillit, revised by W. Sayle. ‘Coontey ghiarejeh Elian Vannin ayns Gailck’, by J. Bridson.nbsp;Manx Society, Douglas.
1885-87. ‘Manx Note Book’, issued periodically under the direction of A. W. Moore, contains much interesting Manx matter.
1891. ‘Carvalyn Gailckagh’, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;and edited by A. W. Moore.
-ocr page 29-HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;13
Eighty-six Manx carols, with English translation. Clucas amp; Fargher, Douglas.
1893-4. ‘ The Book of Common Prayer in Manx Gaelic, being translations made by Bishop Phillips in 1610, and by the Manx Clergy in 1765’, edited by A. W. Moore, M.A., assisted bynbsp;Sir John Rhys, M.A., LL.D. In two volumes. A treatise bynbsp;John Rhys on the ‘ Outlines of the Phonology of Manx Gaelic ’nbsp;forms part of vol. 2. Manx Society. The University Press,nbsp;Oxford, and H. Frowde, London.
1896. ‘Manx Ballads and Music’, edited byA.W. Moore. Johnson, Douglas.
1890. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;‘Surnames and Place-names of the Isle of Man’, by A. W.nbsp;Moore. 2nd edition. Published in 1903 under the title ofnbsp;‘ Manx Names ’. This work is valuable in tracing grammaticalnbsp;forms and words now obsolete. Also ‘ Place-names of the Islenbsp;of Man’, by J. J. Kneen, 1929.
1899. 'Coontey j eh Saggyrt William Tyndall.’ Chillcott, Bristol.
1901. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Aeso^’, by E. Faragher. Broadbent, Douglas.
1904. ‘ Manx Notes and Queries ’, by C. Roeder. Broadbent, Douglas. 'Psalmyn Ghavid’, a metrical version of the Psalms ofnbsp;David by the Rev. J. Clague, Vicar of Rushen. Also thenbsp;metrical psalms by the Vicars-general Robert Radcliff andnbsp;Matthew Curghey, first published in the Prayer Book ofnbsp;1768. Published by the Skeshaght Ghailckagh. Broadbent,nbsp;Douglas.
N.D. ‘ Ard-firrinyssyn, liorish yn Saggyrt Ean Wesley, mychione jannoo, creek, as giu stooghyn neu-heeltail.' Prentit da Sheshaghtnbsp;Slane-Obbaltys Skeerey Andreays liorish Shirrefs as Russell,nbsp;Straid Chiarn, Doolish.
N.D. 'Illiam as Ysbal, ny cooish eddyr Manninagh as e ven heshey liorish Illiam Sayle, Skeerey Andreays.’ Printed by M. Glover,nbsp;North Quay, Douglas. Republished towards the end of the nineteenth century with an English translation by W. Kneen.nbsp;Clucas amp; Fargher, Douglas.
About 1870. ' Coloayrtys eddyr Mannanan-beg-mac-y-Leirr,Ree Hroor~ Chassagh Elian Vannin, as shenn ven Vanninagh er mullaghnbsp;SniauV, by Thomas Kelly, Bridge St., Peel. Translated intonbsp;Manx by the Rev. J. T. Clarke. J. C. Fargher, Douglas.
1897- ‘ Ta Jee Graih’, a sermon in Manx and English, by W. Kneen. Manx Sun Office, Douglas.
1905- ‘Manx Proverbs and Sayings’, by S. Morrison. Broadbent, Douglas.
1891. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;‘Manx Folk-Lore’, by A. W. Moore. Manx Poetry, Proverbs,nbsp;amp;c.
-ocr page 30-14 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION
1908. ‘Manx Cookery Book’ (contains recipes for cooking, making wines, amp;c., in Manx), by S. and L. Morrison, Peel. Printed bynbsp;Sherratt amp; Hughes, 60 Chandos Street, London, W.C.
1901. ‘Lessoonyn ayns Chengey ny Mayrey Elian Vannin’, by E.
Goodwin, Peel. Broadbent amp; Co., Douglas.
1901. 'Lessoonyn ayns Gailck’, by J. J. Kneen. Broadbent, Douglas. The Isle of Man Examiner devoted a colunrn to the Manxnbsp;language for several years, and much valuable matter appearednbsp;therein.
1911. ‘Yn Saase Jeeragh’ (The Direct Method), by J. J. Kneen.
Broadbent amp; Co., Douglas.
1931. ‘Kneen’s Manx Grammar’, by J. J. Kneen.
12. Decay of the Language.
During the last century the Manx Language has fallen into decadence. At the beginning of the nineteenth century, in manynbsp;parishes on three Sundays a month, services were held in it, thennbsp;two, and later only one, and at last, about sixty years ago, it ceasednbsp;to be taught in schools, and gradually the number of churches wherenbsp;it was found necessary dropped off, until at last only three or fournbsp;still kept it up, and now none do so.
Writing in 1872 the Rev. J. T. Clarke says: ‘Ta ard-reiltee Vannin noi’n Ghailck. Ta shirveishee yn Ghoo jeh dy-chooilley chredjue noi eck.nbsp;Ta aegid iroggit seose nish ny s’meehushtee jeh ghengey ny mayrey na vanbsp;mouse y vagheragh cliaghtey ve.
Ayns traa A spickyn Wilson as Hildesley, cha voddagh dooinney aeg erbee geddyn stiagh ayns oik y taggyrtys fegooish Gailck vie ve echey.
Ayns yn Chiare-as-feed she Gailck ooilley v’oc—as ayns traa ny briwnyn Kaye as Crellin cha b’loys da turneyr erbee gheet kiongoyrt roonbsp;nagh voddagh arganey ayns Gailck.
Ta cooinaghtyn aympene, ayns laghyn m’aegid, dy re ayns Gailck va shin ooilley loayrt risk nyn gabbil as nyn ollagh. Eer ny moddee henenbsp;mannagh loayragh shin roo ayns Gailck, cha jinnagh ad cloh dooin~aghnbsp;jeeaghyn mygeayrt y moo, goaill yn yindys s’moo ’sy theihll c’red va shinnbsp;laccal ad ’yannoo dooin.
Cha row ny moddee voghtey hene toiggal Baarl, son she Gailck ooilley v’oc, as cha row ad goaill nearey jee noadyr.’
Writing in 1859 the Rev. William Gill, vicar of Malew, says; ‘The decline of the spoken Manx, within the memory of the present generation has been marked. The language is no longer heard in our courtsnbsp;of law, either from the bench or the bar, and seldom from the witness-box. The courts are indeed still fenced * in Manx, according to ancient
* Now discontinued.
-ocr page 31-HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;15
traditionary form; and the Island laws are still promulgated in that language on the Tynwald Mount, where the last lingering accents ofnbsp;the Gaelic in Manx—once the language of Europe, the universalnbsp;language of the British Isles—will probably be heard. ... It is rarelynbsp;now heard in conversation, except among the peasantry. It is anbsp;doomed language,—an iceberg floating into southern latitudes.
‘ Let it not, however, be thought that its end is immediate. Among the peasantry it still retains a strong hold. It is the language of theirnbsp;affections and their choice,—the language to which they habituallynbsp;resort in their communications with each other. And no wonder;nbsp;for it is the language they find most congenial to their habits ofnbsp;thought and feeling. In English, even when they have a fair knowledge of the tongue, they speak with hesitation and under restraint.nbsp;In Manx they are fluent, and at ease. There is little probability,nbsp;therefore, of their soon forgetting their ghengey ny mayrey.’nbsp;13. The Manx Society.
This society was formed in^quot;l85^ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;publication of National
Documents of the Isle of HaïT’.
Having practically finished the work for which it was originally formed, it was wound up in IQ07-
Much interesting matter appertaining to the Manx language was published by this society, the most interesting of which, from anbsp;philologist’s point of view, is Kelly’s Manx Grammar and Thenbsp;Manx Dictionary.
The former work is based upon the old plan of reducing the grammar of a language to a rigid conformity to Latin and Greek. In Manx the same thing was thought imperative. The modem rule is,nbsp;to have just as many cases, and as many moods and tenses, asnbsp;there are actual variations of the words, without the admission ofnbsp;prepositions or of auxiliary verbs. To this mle the laws of grammarnbsp;seem to require Manx, as well as English, to be conformed. As,nbsp;however, the adoption of such a principle would have involved thenbsp;re-arrangement, to a considerable extent, of the grammar, it wasnbsp;thought advisable not to attempt the change, but to give the work innbsp;its original integrity. Dr. Kelly’s Grammar, viewed as an originalnbsp;production unaided by any pre-existent grammar, reflects the highestnbsp;credit on the author’s industry and ingenuity.
Besides the grammar. Dr. Kelly had prepared two works of great labour, and, from a philological point of view, great value, a Manxnbsp;and English dictionary, and a triglot dictionary of Manx, Scottishnbsp;Gaelic, and Irish, based upon English. The dictionary has beennbsp;published, but the triglot still lies in manuscript.
-ocr page 32-r6 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION
14. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;State of the Language in 1875.
The following extracts are taken from a paper read before the Philological Society, 18 June, 1875, entitled ‘The Manx Language:nbsp;its grammar, literature, and present state, by Henry Jenner, Esq.,nbsp;of the MS. Department, British Museum’.
‘The language of the Isle of Man belongs to the Gaelic branch of the Celtic family, in which it occupies almost exactly the samenbsp;place as that which was once held by Cornish in the Cymric branch,
i.e. it holds a middle place between Irish and Scottish, inclining considerably to the latter. The analogy between the two cases is very striking. Irish, like Welsh, is a literary and cultivated tongue, andnbsp;one that has been from an early period reduced to rule, and notnbsp;allowed to form itself how it pleased in the mouths of illiteratenbsp;peasants. Scottish, like Breton, has not had quite the same advantages, though it also has not been entirely neglected; while Manx,nbsp;like Cornish, has simply been allowed to go to pieces, and, until quitenbsp;recent times, has never been worked upon in any way, and, likenbsp;Cornish, in its decay it has preserved the characteristics of the lessnbsp;cultivated of its fellows. In support of this statement I have thenbsp;evidence of five Manxmen of the lower class—three fishermen, anbsp;farm-labourer, and a carpenter (i.e. a boatbuilder), all of them mennbsp;of fair intelligence, though unlearned, who, without any leadingnbsp;questions, told me, as the result of their own experience, that Scottishnbsp;was easily intelligible to them, while Irish was quite a foreign tongue,nbsp;in which words were frequently understood, but sentences never.nbsp;Moreover, as far as I have seen, it appears in the written language butnbsp;in only one case (that of ‘ eclipsis ’ initial mutation) has a form beennbsp;retained in both Manx and Irish that has been dropped in Scottish,nbsp;with the exception of certain ecclesiastical terms, such as names ofnbsp;festivals, amp;c.’
The introduction of Englishmen as clergy, and their ignorance of the language, may also have tended to displace the vernacular, for,nbsp;though several have learned it sufficiently for conversation, few werenbsp;able to conduct a service in it.
15. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;A Private Language Census.
In 1874 Mr. Jenner addressed a letter to each of the clergy of the Isle of Man, containing the following questions relating to the existing amount of spoken Manx:
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Is English or Manx the prevailing language in your parish?
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;If English, about how many persons speak Manx as theirnbsp;mother-tongue ?
3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;How many speak no English, and of what ages and class are they ?
4. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Do you ever preach or perform divine service or any part of it
-ocr page 33-HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;17
in Manx ? if so, how often and what part ? and is a knowledge of Manx necessary in your parish work ?
5. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Which language do children of the present generation learn?nbsp;do they grow up with a knowledge of both ?
6. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Is the Manx of the present day substantially the same as thatnbsp;of Kelly’s Grammar, amp;c., and of the Manx Bible and Prayer Book,nbsp;and are these easily intelligible to the present Manx speakers ?
The answer to these questions Mr. Jenner tabulated as will be seen by the table on pp. 18-19.
In addition to the answers, the following interesting notes were supplied by some of the Clergy.
Rector of Kirk Andreas. Children pick up a little Manx when they leave school. Old people, so to speak, ‘dream in Manx’. Servantsnbsp;like to keep it up as a class language not understood by their masters.
Vicar of Kirk Arhory. Dissenters make considerable way owing to the neglect of Manx by the Church.
Vicar of Kirk Lonan. Manx is preferred by the country people (in parochial ministrations), as they can understand every word, whichnbsp;they cannot in English.
Vicar of St. George’s, Douglas. In country parishes one finds three generations in one cottage: the old speaking Manx only, the middlenbsp;Manx and English, and the children English only.
Of course these statistics can hardly be taken to represent a perfect language census of the Island, and it would be very difficult to obtainnbsp;such a thing by answers from different people, as each man (as regardsnbsp;Mr. Jenner’s second question at any rate) would have his own standardnbsp;to judge by, and without doubt these standards vary considerably.nbsp;Compared with the Census of 1901 many discrepancies will be notednbsp;¦which can only be accounted for in one way, that the vicars of certainnbsp;parishes must have had a very uncertain knowledge of those whonbsp;spoke Manx or English in their respective parishes. Still Mr. Jenner’snbsp;tabulation may be said to give a fair approximate of the philological state of the Isle of Man in the year 1875.
Visiting the Island in the latter year, Mr. Jenner was present on the 4th Sunday after Easter at a service held in the parish church of Kirknbsp;Arbory in the Manx tongue. He remarks, ‘ the congregation consistednbsp;of fifty-three persons, almost all of them above fifty years of age. Itnbsp;was evident that they very much appreciated the benefits of anbsp;service in their own language, for they joined in it very heartily.’
Kirk Arbory I was the only church in which Manx was regularly used, and that only on the last Sunday morning in each month.
’ The archdeacon of Manx states that the Rev. J. Qualtrough, vicar of Kirk Arbory, conducted his last service in Manx on the last Sunday in Julynbsp;i®75, but he continued Manx services at Kirk Bride 1875-9 monthly.
-ocr page 34-
Names of Parishes. |
Popula tion. |
Speaking Manxnbsp;Habitually. |
speaking No English. |
Language Spoken by Children. |
Language Used in Church. |
Is Manx Necessary in Parish Work? |
North District |
about |
about | ||||
Ajrre Sheading: |
(Living Vacant) | |||||
Kirk Bride |
880 |
440 |
12 |
English and a little Manx |
Enghsh. Until 3 or 4 years ago Manx wasnbsp;used 4 times a year | |
Kirk Andreas |
1.757 |
600 |
50 |
Enghsh and a httle Manx |
Enghsh |
Not necessary |
Kirk Christ Lezayre |
2,500 |
2,000 |
0 |
English only |
Enghsh |
Not necessary |
Michael Sheading: |
Useful, but not absolutely necessary | |||||
Kirk Michael |
1,267 |
300 |
0 |
Enghsh and Manx |
Enghsh | |
Ballaugh |
1,077 |
250 |
10 |
English only |
Enghsh |
Useful |
Jurby |
788 |
600 |
0 |
English and a little Manx |
Enghsh (Manx used 14 or 15 years ago) |
Useful |
Garff Sheading: |
Necessary | |||||
Kirk Lonan |
3.741 |
1.850 |
10 |
English only |
Enghsh | |
Kirk Maughold |
4.567 |
2,000 |
I |
Enghsh and Manx |
Enghsh |
Desirable, but not absolutely necessary |
Total of North |
^(gt;,577 |
8,040 |
83 |
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
N.B.—These statistics are exclusive of the town of Douglas. |
20 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION
The Rev. W. Drury, vicar of Kirk Braddan, sometimes introduced bits of Manx into his sermons, as he expressed it, ‘to clinch thenbsp;matter’, for the benefit of the older people; and if he happened tonbsp;see many such present, he would say the Lord's Prayer or give thenbsp;Blessing in Manx, He also often preached sermons in the open airnbsp;on Douglas Quay to fishermen and sailors in a mixture of Manx andnbsp;Enghsh.
16. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;A Modern Revival.
About thirty , or, forty years ago, the wave of Celtic enthusjasm which had swept over Ireland, reached tbe isle of Man. Societieamp;A-having the objecTTir teaching the language in view—sprang up innbsp;various parts of the Island. The Isle of Man Examiner aided thenbsp;movement to a considerable degree, by devoting a column iroekly,nbsp;mostly written in the Manx language, and everything pointed tonbsp;the rehabilitation of the language as the national vehicle of thought.
But Celtic enthusiasm, always of a fugitive nature, sadly waned again ^ring the last twenty yearsTthough there is nmcE evidencenbsp;that this revival has still left an impression which may not benbsp;effaced for many years to come.
Not many years ago the Manx Courts of Law were still fenced in the mother-tongue, but at the present time the only official use madenbsp;of it is the promulgation of all new laws made during the year, onnbsp;the summit of Tynwald Hill. This promulgation ceremony is one ofnbsp;the most interesting events of Manx national life, and always attractsnbsp;vast numbers of tourists from the adjacent isles.
17. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The Manx Language Society.
On the 22nd of March 1899 ^ society for the preservation of the Manx language was formed, being the outcome of a visit to thenbsp;Island by Mr. E. E. Fournier, secretary of the Celtic Association.nbsp;The meeting was organized by Mr. W. Cubbon.
Mr. A. W. Moore, late Speaker of the House of Keys, was elected president; the late Deemster Gill, the late Dr. John Clague, Mr. J. C.nbsp;CreUin, H.K., and the Rev. Canon Savage, were appointed vice-presidents; the late Mr. W. Quayle secretary, and Mrs. Laughtonnbsp;treasurer. A strong committee was formed with power to add to theirnbsp;number. The executive and other sub-committees were to be electednbsp;by the above, the officials being ex-officio members of the committee.
The Objects, Constitution, etc.
That the name of the Society be the ‘Manx Language Society’— in Manx ‘ Yn Qheshaght Ghailckagh’.
That its objects be (i) the preservation of Manx as the national
-ocr page 37-HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;2X
language of the Isle of Man; (2) the study and publication of existing Gaehc literature and the cultivation of a modem literature in Manx.
That its means be (i) the encouragement of the formation of classes for the study of Manx; (2) the holding of public meetings andnbsp;lectures for the purpose of stimulating and informing pubhc opinionnbsp;on behalf of the Manx language; (3) to encourage the people whonbsp;know Manx to speak it habitually, and to impart it to their young;nbsp;(4) to endeavour to secure facilities for teaching it in the publicnbsp;schools; (5) the publication and distribution of books and pamphletsnbsp;in or relating to Manx; (6) the encouragement of Manx music andnbsp;of songs in Manx; (7) to inform the public on questions relating tonbsp;the movement by contributions to magazines and journals; (8) thenbsp;collection of oral Gaelic literature, consisting of folk-tales, poemsnbsp;songs, proverbs, riddles, amp;c., still extant among the people.
Constitution: (i) the society shall consist of a president, vice-presidents, secretary, and committee (who shall form the council), and members; (2) the qualification of membership shall be an annualnbsp;subscription of two shillings and sixpence.
Executive Committee: (3) the business of the society shall be conducted by an executive committee, which shall consist of the president, vice-presidents, secretary, and treasurer, and seven other persons to be chosen annually by and from the members of the council. Fivenbsp;members of the executive committee shall form a quorum. (4) Thenbsp;council shall be elected by the members at a general meeting to benbsp;held on HoUantide Day (the 12th of November), and shall hold officenbsp;for the term of one year. (5) The president, vice-presidents, secretary, and treasurer shall be elected annually by the members.nbsp;(6) The secretary shall summon extraordinary general meetings onnbsp;receipt of a requisition signed by ten members.
The following literature has been published by the M.L.S.: Psalmyn Ghavid (metrical); Cregeen’s Manx Dictionary (reprint);nbsp;Yn Saase Jeeragh; and also several pamphlets and tracts.
18. The Manx Language Census of 1901.
The following statistics are taken from the language returns of 1901.
With the exception of H. Jenner’s statistics of 1874, no census of the language had hitherto been taken, and not until 1901, a lapse ofnbsp;nearly 30 years, was there an official census taken, and it is owing tonbsp;the indefatigable zeal of the late A. W. Moore that this was thennbsp;accomplished.
The total number of Manx speakers, 4,419, or 8-i per cent., is probably in excess of what would have been expected. This result
-ocr page 38-22 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION
may be partly accounted for by the test as to what constitutes ‘ Speaking Manx ’ having been an easy one. On the other hand, therenbsp;were not a few who could speak Manx and would not admit it.
Number of Bilinguists {Manx-English) in the Isle of Man igoi.
District. |
Total Population. |
Bilinguists. |
Percentage. |
Parish of Bride1 |
539 |
124 |
23-0 |
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Arboryt |
8o2 |
184 |
2219 |
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Jurby t |
504 |
II2 |
2212 |
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Andreas1 |
1,144 |
220 |
19-2 |
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ballaugh1 . |
712 |
137 |
19-2 |
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;German1 |
1,230 |
197 |
i6'0 |
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Rushen1 |
3.277 |
516 |
15-8 |
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Michael1 |
928 |
138 |
14-9 |
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Lezayre1 |
1.389 |
201 |
14-5 |
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Maughold1 . |
887 |
128 |
14-4 |
Town of Peelt .... |
3.306 |
393 |
II-9 |
Parish of Patrickf |
1.925 |
228 |
II-8 |
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;1-onan1 |
2.513 |
278 |
II-I |
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Malew1 |
2,113 |
140 |
6-6 |
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Marownf |
973 |
63 |
6-5 |
Town of Ramseyt |
4.672 |
294 |
6-3 |
Parish of Braddanf . |
2.177 |
132 |
6-1 |
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Santant |
468 |
23 |
5-0 |
Town of Castletownf |
1.963 |
83 |
4-2 |
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Douglasf |
19.149 |
713 |
3-7 |
Parish of Conchan f |
3.942 |
115 |
2-9 |
Western Division (a) . |
8,101 |
1.093 |
13-5 |
Northern ,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;(6) . |
9.135 |
1.079 |
II-8 |
Southern „ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;(c) . |
8.693 |
946 |
II'O |
Eastern nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;id) . |
28,754 |
1.301 |
4-6 |
Sheadings: | |||
Michael nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;.... |
2.144 |
387 |
180 |
Ayre ..... |
3.072 |
545 |
17-7 |
Rushen nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;.... |
6,192 |
840 |
15-3 |
Garff ..... |
3.400 |
406 |
12-0 |
Glenfaba nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;.... |
4,128 |
488 |
II-8 |
Middle ..... |
6.587 |
270 |
4-1 |
The Towns |
29,090 |
1.483 |
5-1 |
Total nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;.... |
54.613 |
4.419 |
8-1 |
From Captains of Parishes, t Taken by A. W. Moore from Census Returns.
(a) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Peel, German, Patrick, Michael, Ballaugh.
(b) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ramsey, Maughold, Lezayre, Andreas, Bride, Jurby.
(c) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Castletown, Malew, Santan, Arbory, Rushen.
{d) Douglas, Conchan, Lonan, Braddan, Marown.
-ocr page 39-23
HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION
Ages | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
The figures for each parish were given in the 1901 census, but are not given in the above table. The fourteen males and seventeen females speaking Manxnbsp;only in Douglas are obviously errors, and should have been corrected by thenbsp;enumerators responsible.
Language Spoken. | ||||||
Both English and | ||||||
English only. |
Manx only. |
Manx. | ||||
Area. |
Males. |
Females. |
Males. |
Females. |
Males. |
Females. |
Isle of Man |
982 |
986 |
0 |
0 |
18 |
Ï4 |
Douglas . |
993 |
993 |
0 |
I |
7 |
7 |
Peel |
967 |
981 |
2 |
— |
31 |
19 |
Ramsey . |
988 |
986 |
— |
— |
12 |
14 |
Remainder of | ||||||
Island . |
971 |
979 |
0 |
0 |
29 |
21 |
Total number of persons speaking Manx and English in 1921. 896.
24 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION
a pleasant surprise will come to all patriotic Manx people the Census revelation, that Manx Gaelic is spoken by 4,419 of the inhabitants ofnbsp;this Isle. 8-1 per cent, of the Manx people resident in the Isle of Mannbsp;preserve the old tongue—one in twelve can make themselves understood in the language of their fathers. And pleasure is intensified bynbsp;the announcement that Manx is spoken even in these young days ofnbsp;the twentieth century by a number of children. Undoubtedly of latenbsp;a fillip has been given to the preservation of Manx as a spokennbsp;tongue, and we of the ‘ Examiner ’ pride ourselves that we have donenbsp;not a little to promote the revival of the study of the ancient languagenbsp;of the island. Doubtless during the last two years many Manxnbsp;people have set themselves to learn to read and speak Manx, and itnbsp;is more than probable that many adults, able to converse in Manx,nbsp;have gone to some trouble to impart their knowledge of the languagenbsp;to young children. Anyhow, Manx is far from being a dead languagenbsp;—it is not even moribund—and if the Manx people but respond asnbsp;they ought to the appeals of the leaders of the Pan-Celtic movement,nbsp;Manx will be spoken for centuries to come. The crusade for thenbsp;revival of the Gaelic has a practical as well as a sentimental value.nbsp;It is universally admitted that people who are bilingual have annbsp;advantage commercially and intellectually over people who speaknbsp;but one tongue, and this advantage is all the more pronounced whennbsp;one of the languages spoken by the bilinguist happens to be English.nbsp;Wherefore are Manx people who speak Manx in addition to Englishnbsp;likely to find their accomplishment a useful one. On the grounds,nbsp;then, of utility, as well as patriotism, the people of the Isle of Mannbsp;would do well to foster the study of Gaelic.’
21. The Relationship of Manx to the other Goidelic Dialects.
The Celtics£eech of the Isle of Man stands in a very close relationship to Irish and Scottish (laelic, though this is to a certain extent obscurednbsp;by.the.Qrthography. Early Irish may be regarded as the parent of allnbsp;living Gaelic dialects, and it is worthy of note that this tem^GaiMisnbsp;used by the Celtic-speaking inhabitants of Ireland, Man, aHTthenbsp;Highlands, to denote the native speech. Since the medieval periodnbsp;all the Goidelic dialects have gone their own way. But it may be saidnbsp;that the south of Ireland (Munster) has on the whole been conservative, whilst N. Irish, Manx, and Scottish Gaelic have developed muchnbsp;more rapidly. Manx appears to approach more closely to the languagenbsp;of the Highlands than to Irish, but it is well to remember that the Irishnbsp;of County Down, which might be expected to present the greatest resemblance to Manx, is almost extinct and that our information concerning it is very imperfect. We shall first of all mention some of the featuresnbsp;which Manx shares in common with N. Irish and Scottish Gaelic.
-ocr page 41-HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;25
(i) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Northern Gaelic, as opposed to the language of the south ofnbsp;Ireland, exhibits a tendency to use analytical and periphrastic formsnbsp;in the verb, and in this Manx and Scottish Gaelic go farther than thenbsp;Irish of Donegal. In Man and Scotland the verb ‘to do’ (Manxnbsp;jannoo, Scottish deanamh) is employed with an infinitive to expressnbsp;the past and present. The Manx carvals, however, retain a number ofnbsp;verb-inflexions which have long disappeared from the spoken language. Like the langu^Lge of the Highlands the old Manx present,nbsp;where used, has acquired a momentary (future) signification.
(ii) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Manx goes as far as many of the dialects of the Highlands innbsp;dropping unstressed final vowels, e.g. ghiarn, lord, Irish tighearna.nbsp;Similarly in pre-tonic position written Manx drops many syllablesnbsp;that are stiU written in Ireland and Scotland, though in a numbernbsp;of cases they are not preserved in these other dialects as spoken,nbsp;e.g. Manx noght, Ir. anocht; Manx nish, Ir. anois; Manx^iM, Ir. indiu;nbsp;Manx jea, Ir. indé.
(iii) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The negative particle in common use in Manx is cha as innbsp;N. Irish and Scottish Gaelic.
(iv) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;It is very interesting to find that Manx agrees with Scottishnbsp;Gaelic and the Irish of County Down in retaining the short e soundnbsp;in a word hke fer, whereas elsewhere in Ireland it has become d. Thenbsp;vowels a, 6 are much confused as in Scotland, e.g. Manx cass, foot.nbsp;Sc. cas, Ir. cos.
(v) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;On the other hand Manx agrees with Irish as against Scottishnbsp;Gaehc in retaining the echpse in the genitive plural of substantivesnbsp;a-fter the article.
(vi) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;As in Scotland, there is a tendency to make the plural of allnbsp;substantives except masculine monosyllables end in -yn (Sc. -aw),nbsp;e.g. Manx cassyn, Sc. casan, Ir. cosa.
(vii) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;In Scotland and Man the initial group sr becomes str, e.g. Ir.nbsp;syutkdn, stream, Scottish struthan, Manx strooan.
As features peculiar to Manx the following may be mentioned.
(i) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ir. a which in Ireland varies from a (Munster) to a palatal anbsp;(Donegal), which is also common in Scotland, has in Manx becomenbsp;fronted to amp;. Ir. 5 has in Manx lost its rounding and also given amp;.nbsp;The beginning of this is visible in N. Irish. Hence Ir. has, óg appearnbsp;in Manx as baase, aeg.
(ii) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ir. mh, bh after back vowels tend to become u or w. This isnbsp;also regular in Manx, e.g. Manx laue, hand, Ir. Idmh; Manx doo,nbsp;Ir. dubh. But in Manx ƒ also exhibits this tendency, e.g. Manx coau,nbsp;chaff, from Engl. dial, caff, cauve; Manx lout, Engl, loft; Manx gioot,nbsp;Engl. gift.
(iii) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Intervocalic s and sh in Manx become lisped and voiced to d.nbsp;This goes hand in hand with a fondness to turn medial stops into
E
-ocr page 42-26 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION
spirants. Certain consonants in intervocalic position may disappear
entirely. See § 9 below.
(iv) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;In monosyllables final m, n when following a vowel, are oftennbsp;preceded by an intrusive b, d respectively, a phenomenon that is alsonbsp;found in late Cornish. Thus ben, woman, becomes bedn. See § 10nbsp;below.
(v) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ir. sc becomes st, sht, e.g., Ir.feascar, evening, Manx fastyr;nbsp;Ir. uisce, Manx ushtey.
(vi) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;In the matter of stress Manx exhibits great originality, goingnbsp;farther even than the dialects of the south of Ireland in shiftingnbsp;the stress from the initial syllable. Not only does it shift the stressnbsp;in the case of heavy derivative suffixes like -an and reduce the preceding vowel, e.g. Ir. fuardn, Sc. fuaran, Manx frdn, spring, butnbsp;even in cases like caghlaa, variety, Ir., Sc. caochladh) Manx coraa,nbsp;voice, Ir. comhradh. See § ii below.
22. A Comparison between Bishop Phillips’s Translation of the Prayer Book and that of the Manx Clergy.
Manx Clergy 1765- Bishop Phillips 1610. |
English Revision 1604. |
Yn Shuiskel. Mein. 21. ver. As narr ham ayd argere dy leriusalem,nbsp;as v’ayd ér jit gysnbsp;bethphaje, gys knocknbsp;olivet, aéish ghurr lésynbsp;jis daa austyl3m. 2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;gra riusyn, siuljinbsp;gys y vaUe ta lyeinbsp;harrish nan yoi shiu,nbsp;as drasteyn ieu shiunbsp;asseU chiangilt, as ynbsp;Ijmi mari, feaskyljinbsp;ayd, as toergi aydnbsp;hfiyms. 3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;asmajirrduynenbsp;erbi veg fifs, aberjinbsp;shiuss, ta ymm5n:tsnbsp;ag y ^hiam oru; asnbsp;9helliragh liggi e gaunbsp;siul. |
Yn Sushtal. N. Mian. xxi. i. Tra v’ad tayrn er-gerrey da Jerusalem, as dy row er jeet gysnbsp;Bethphage, gys cronknbsp;ny Oliveyn, hug Yee-sey jees jeh e ostyllynnbsp;er 9haghteraght, 2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;As dooyrt ehnbsp;roo, Immee-jee gysnbsp;y bailey 9heerey tanbsp;shiu dy akin, as 9hel-leeragh yiow shiu as-syl kianlt as Ihiynbsp;maxee: feayshil-jee asnbsp;cur-jeelhieuadhym’s. 3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;As my loayrysnbsp;dooinney erbee vegnbsp;riu, abbyr-jeeshiuish,nbsp;Ta feme ec y ^hiamnbsp;orroo, as 9helleeraghnbsp;Ihiggee eh 3m raadnbsp;daue. |
The Gospel. Matt. 21. I. And when they drew nigh to Hiera-salem, and were comenbsp;to Bethphage vntonbsp;mount Oliuet, thennbsp;sent Jesus two of hisnbsp;Disciples, 2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Saying vntonbsp;them, Goe into thenbsp;Towne that lyeth ouernbsp;against you, andnbsp;anone yee shall findenbsp;an Asse bound, andnbsp;her colt with her,nbsp;loose them, and bringnbsp;them vnto mee. 3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;And if any mannbsp;say ought vnto you,nbsp;say yee. The Lordenbsp;hath need of them:nbsp;and straightway henbsp;will let them goe. |
HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION 4. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;vashoullyjeant,nbsp;gy vodagh e vé emanbsp;ghuiliny vé er nanbsp;lóyrt liórish y pha-deer, gra: 5. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;insigi dy ininnbsp;Seion; jeagh, ta _dynbsp;ri 9hiit hüyds miin,nbsp;na héi er assyll, eisnbsp;lyoi sharragh yn assyll, klaghtiit gys ynbsp;ghuing. 6. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ghaa ny hausty-lyn as ren ayd mar vanbsp;lésy er dóyrt sarynbsp;gau. 7. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;as hugg ayd léunbsp;yn assyll, as y l5mi,nbsp;as ghurr ayd ofru ynnbsp;ydin as hei ayd eshynnbsp;er shenn. 8. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;asskéylymmydinbsp;phobyl an gomraghynnbsp;ayns y rayd: gare fie-lagh elle shiis bang-lanyn vei ny bil9hyn,nbsp;as ghrei ayd ayns ynbsp;rayd. 9- harrish shen, yn pobyl gha rymbu, asnbsp;aydsyn haink nan yei,nbsp;jffii ayd, gra, hosannanbsp;gys mack yavid: ban-iit ta eshin ta phiitnbsp;ayns enym y *9hiam,nbsp;hosanna ayns ynnbsp;yrjid smü. |
4. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Va ooilley shohnbsp;j eant dy voddagh shennbsp;ve cooilleenit va loay-rit liorish y phadeyr,nbsp;gra: 5. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Insh-jee da in-neen Sion, Cur-my-ner, ta dty Ree 9heetnbsp;hood dyimlee, as nynbsp;hoie er assyl, as ernbsp;Ihiy sharragh assyl. 6. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;As hie adsynnbsp;rhymboo, as ren adnbsp;myr va Yeesey ernbsp;n’oardaghey daue. 7. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;As hug ad Ihieunbsp;yn assyl as y Ihiy, asnbsp;hug ad orroo nynnbsp;eaddeeyn, as hug adnbsp;eshyn ny hoie orroo. 8. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;As ren earrooynnbsp;mooarey dy leih ske-ayley nyn gharma-dyn er y raad; ghiarenbsp;feallagh elley bangla-ne5m jehny biljyn, asnbsp;skeayl ad ad er ynbsp;raad. 9. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;As deie yn pob-ble hie roish, as adsynnbsp;haink ny yei, gra. Hosanna gys mac Gha-vid; bannit t’eshynnbsp;ta 9heet ayns ennymnbsp;y ^hiarn. Hosannanbsp;ayns yn yrjid. |
27 4. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;AU this was donenbsp;that it might be fulfilled, which wasnbsp;spoken by the Prophet, saying: 5. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Tellye the daughter of Sion, Behold,nbsp;thy King commethnbsp;vnto thee, meeke, sitting vpon an Asse andnbsp;a Colt, the foale of thenbsp;Asse vsed to the yoke. 6. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The Disciplesnbsp;went and did as Jesusnbsp;commanded them, 7. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;And brought thenbsp;Asse and the Colt, andnbsp;put on them theirnbsp;cloathes, and set himnbsp;thereon. 8. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;And many ofnbsp;the people spred theirnbsp;garments in the way:nbsp;other cut downenbsp;branches from thenbsp;trees, and strawednbsp;them in the way. 9. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Moreouer, thenbsp;people that went before, and they thatnbsp;came after, cryed,nbsp;saying. Hosanna tonbsp;the Sonne of Dauid:nbsp;Blessed is hee thatnbsp;commeth in the Namenbsp;of the Lord, Hosannanbsp;in the highest. |
The Phillips version of the Prayer Book and Psalms contains many Words and grammatical forms which are now obsolete. The possessivenbsp;adjectives ar, nar (Ir.: or, arn), our; an, nan (Ir.; a, an), their; arenbsp;found, and one would naturally expect to find vur, vurn (Ir.: hhur,nbsp;bhurn), your; also, but it does not occur. Dóyrt is the eclipsed formnbsp;of toyrt, giving; now coyrt (from ec ioyrt).
In many respects the PhiUips orthography is superior to that of later Manx.
cedilla (1) is placed under the dental gh to distinguish it from the Ural ch, and is generally used in modern Manx for that purpose, but isnbsp;not found in the Bible, Prayer Book, amp;c.
-ocr page 44-28
HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION
23. The Irish Alphabet.
For the sake of comparison the Irish alphabet is here given:
IRISH ALPHABET MANX | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;29
The Scottish Gaels use the ordinary roman letters, and aspirate with h (as ph). Eclipsis does not occur in Scottish Gaelic.
24. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The Lord’s Prayer in Manx, Irish, and Scotch.
Padjer y Qhiarn
Ajn: ain t’ayns niau, casherick dy row dt’enn5nn. Dy jig dty reeriaght. Dt’aigney dy row jeant er y thalloo myr te ayns niau.nbsp;Cur dooin nyn arran jiu as gagh laa, as leih dooin nyn loghtyn; myrnbsp;ta shin leih dauesyn ta jannoo loghtyn n5m ’oi. As ny leeid shin aynsnbsp;miolagh agh livrey shin veih oik. Son Ihiats y reeriaght, as y phooarnbsp;as y ghloyr. Son dy bragh as dy bragh. Amen.
Atl pAIOin
Aji n-AcAiti, ACA Atl ncAth, 50 nAomcAii c-Ainm; 50 ucisib t)o ttijeAcc; 50 nueuncAti 00 co»t Att An cAtAth mAti sniceAttnbsp;Att ncAih. CAbAift bninn inuiw Ati n-AttAn tAecsAihAit, A5«t*nbsp;tWAic buinn aii fip'-^kCA uiAp ihAiceAmuit) UAt^ ^pdiceAinnAifinbsp;Téinj Asuf HA téis 135CACU5AÓ, acc fAOti finn 6 otc.
Urnuighe an Tighearna
Ar n Athair ata air Neamh gu ma beannuicht’ tainm, gu tigeadh do Rioghacht, gu deanthar do thoill air Tallamh mar ata i air Neamh,nbsp;thoir dhuinn an diugh ar n Arran laitheil, agus maith dhuinn airnbsp;fiacha, mar mhaitheas sinn d’ar feicheannaibh, agus na leig ann amnbsp;buairreadh sinn, ach saor siim o Ole: Oir is leats’ an Rioghachd, agusnbsp;a Chiunhachd, agus a Ghloir gu siorruidhe.
25. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Laws of Manx Accentuation.
These are in the main the same as those of Irish; but Manx has in one particular gone its own way, namely, in that it allows, contrarynbsp;to the general rule, a long vowel to attract the stress to itself in suchnbsp;Words, for example, as the following, accentuated on the finalnbsp;syllable: banglane, a branch; fhyndaa, turning; graihoil, loving. Itnbsp;is worthy of note that French words borrowed through Anglo-Norman channels had the accent on the ultima, where it remains tonbsp;this day, as for example in the case of ashoon, lessoon, jinnair,nbsp;pyeaghoor, emperoor.
26. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Dialect.
The Isle of Man is usually spoken of as divided into two parts. North and South.
The North consists of the eight following parishes: Bride, Andreas, Jurby, BaUaugh, Michael, Lezayre, Maughold, and Lonan.
The South consists of the following nine: Rushen, Arbory, Malew, Patrick, German, Marown, Santan, Braddan, and Conchan.
-ocr page 46-30 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION
The differences of dialect between North and South are not considerable. Here are enumerated the points most deserving of notice:
Words like cloan, children; kione, head; and joan, dust; are pronounced in the South klo:dn, Uo:dn, dzo:dn; while in the North they are apt to be diphthongized into kla'^n, Ua'^n, dzO^n; with the parasitic d much less pronounced than in the Southern forms with thenbsp;simple vowel.
On the other hand the reverse is more nearly the case with such a word as hane, white; or slane, whole; which become hcedn, slcednnbsp;in the North, whereas in the South the vowel retains more or lessnbsp;completely its quantity and quality of d, and the d is not verynbsp;perceptibly developed.
Words like leagh, a reward; geay, wind; are pronounced liix, gH in the South, while in the North they are almost disyllables lUsx, gü9.nbsp;This, however, must not be construed to mean anything more thannbsp;a tendency, certainly not a sharp line of difference, in the pronunciation.
In the South, combinations like cha vel, is not, and cha vow, will not get, are more usual than in the North, where one says cha nel,nbsp;cha now.
Of course individual words vary in pronunciation here and there, and one or two may be added to those just mentioned, such asnbsp;the stock instance of clagh, a stone; which is pronounced in thenbsp;South klo.'x and in the North kla.'x- This applies to aU words of thisnbsp;kind containing the broad vowel a. This peculiarity of dialect isnbsp;also observable in the English spoken. Thus ‘high’, ‘lie’, are pronounced h' in the South, and ha*, la*, in the North.
The Scandinavian name of Snaefell, the highest mountain in the Island, is pronounced in the North sn*cel, fn*cBl, and in the Southnbsp;sn*o:l, fn*o:l. The words doo, black; ooh, an egg; are soundednbsp;dA'‘, a“, in the North; and du, u in the South. Qhibbyr, a well; isnbsp;pronounced tfivsr in the North and tfAhdrt in the extreme South.
It might be remarked here, that the tendency to soften a medial consonant when flanked by vowels is not nearly so noticeable in the South asintheNorth. Thus: (South)ca6amp;y/(pron.Aa.'69/); cabbil{^xon. kavil*).
-ocr page 47-PART I
CHAPTER I
The Manx alfabet is identical with English except that x and z are wanting.
Of the two forms of small s the second is very often found in Manx literature in books 'p™ted quot;Before the beginning of the nineteenthnbsp;century, s is used at the end ofji word, ƒ in all other positions; as,nbsp;and; ajs, out of; arryffagh, repentant; foaft, yet; tofhiaghi, beginning.
As a general rule all proper nouns and adjectives begin with a capital letter, as: Mannin, Man; Manninagh, Manx.
All pronouns, including mee, I, begin with small letters.
Letters are signs and symbols representing sounds. In Manx, as in English, however, the symbols used in the written language do notnbsp;always accurately represent the sounds of the spoken language.
Thusthe same symbo^may represent^fferent^soimds. Eng.: case, rfeë; get, gin; Manx : fMam, c/sied, cass, cass5m; and (aj^differentnbsp;symbols may represent the same sound. Eng. : cat, character, ^ueen;nbsp;Manx: cam, k^y\, ^aiyl. This is due to the fact that English andnbsp;Manx spellings are based either upon a former pronunciation, or uponnbsp;a real or imaginary derivation.
The following^ compaiative tables contain the chief simple vowel lt;lt;L— and consonant sounds of English, Manx, German, and French.
Few sounds, however, in one language are exactly reproduced in another; hence the correspondence of the sounds in the followingnbsp;tables is only approximate.
For purpose of convenience and comparison, phoneticians employ S5mibols of their own, each representing a single sound. Such annbsp;alphabet is given in the right-hand column of each page.
The sign (:) after a vowel is a sign of length, as: bred {breed), bread {brcB'.d). Manx words are always stressed on the long vowels; asnbsp;farrane (farsn), a foimtain; phadeyr (fadsér), a prophet.
The signs -) are placed over Manx words not written in phonetics, when it is necessary to show whether the vowel elementnbsp;is short or long.
-ocr page 48-32
ORTHOGRAPHY
Ger- |
Phon. | |||||
English. |
Manx. |
man. |
French. |
Symb. | ||
«/5 |
Long in nah, fakin, clash- |
Mahl |
pamp;le |
1 | ||
I |
s |
father |
tyn |
la | ||
Short in Ihiannoo, cass |
Mann |
pas |
J | |||
I nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ƒ there |
Long in baase, ayr, aeg |
Bar |
fête | |||
(Open) 1 then |
Short in jeant, ben |
es |
net | |||
0 to |
H | |||||
(Close) fate' |
Long in she, breh, nearey |
Reh |
bébé |
e | ||
3 |
«0 S S 0 «0 |
machine |
Long in jee, creeney Short in bing, kiyt, Ihic |
mir in |
glte | |
I nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ƒ nought |
Long in shoh, ro, boght |
(caret) |
(baut) |
1 | ||
(Open) 1 not |
Short in son, crosh, hon- |
ost |
bol |
r | ||
4 |
s 0 to 6 |
II (Close) No ^ |
nick Long in bio, foast, trome |
froh |
cóte |
J 0 |
I (Open) luck |
Short in hug, muc |
(caret) |
(caret) |
A | ||
5 |
§ 0 |
jr nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;r rude |
Long in 00, ashoon, poo- |
Uhr |
gout |
1 |
ti |
(Close) ^ijook |
sey Short in aarloo, shelloo |
um |
goutte |
1“ | |
err ^ |
Long in seyr, deyr, keyr- |
schön |
Meuse |
lö | ||
¦5 |
rey |
r | ||||
6 |
Short in yn, my, spyrryd |
holle |
jeu |
J | ||
to 1 |
eel ’ |
Long in leah, theay |
Hüte |
müre |
lü | |
Short in keayn, leagh |
füllen |
pu |
r | |||
7 |
1 1 |
misery |
bailey |
Rede |
je |
d |
• The a in English fate is not a pure vowel. Avoid (in Manx) the faint ee sound in which it ends.
^ The o in English no is not a pure vowel. Avoid (in Manx) the faint 00 sound in which it ends.
3 Pronounce with protruded and rounded lips.
-ocr page 49-33
THE LETTERS
English. |
Manx. |
Phon. Symb. | |
I |
height, oil |
drine, thie, siyn, aile, ain |
ai, oi |
2 |
house |
yiow, niau, awin, gow, dou, roue, coau, t’ou, dowin |
au, au |
3 |
rea(d)y |
baih, traie, oaie, oie, fee |
ae* |
4 |
traaue, eu, laue, ceau, reue, ghiow |
aeu | |
5 |
la(d)y |
Iheïe, feïe, greïe |
ei |
6 |
dew |
screeu, diu |
iu |
7 |
bloo{d)y |
ruy, doaie, dooie, mooie |
Al |
8 |
boo(b)y |
dwoaie, twoaie |
ui |
9 |
Iheiy, freoaie, leoaie, seihill |
oi |
English. |
Manx. |
German. |
French. |
Phon. Symb. | |
bay |
6en, carftyd, la6amp; |
Beil |
6as |
b | |
pay |
^aag, sha^^ |
Paar |
yjas |
P | |
1 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;quot;'ï e |
vine |
üoish, cabbyl |
Ifein |
veau |
V |
•'1 q |
fine |
fer, phadeyx |
/ett |
/aux |
f |
do |
doal, raad |
da |
dtos |
d | |
to |
taxToo, thie, soali |
Tag |
t | ||
¦I |
thy |
shassoo, baatey, xoddan |
(wanting) |
(wanting) |
« |
§ |
jew |
jiaxg, yough |
,, |
,, |
d.? |
Cl |
cherry |
fAiam, ushiey, tuiiiym |
»* |
,, |
tj |
real |
ynsaghey, as, poanrey |
sanft |
rèle |
z | |
seal |
sollan, towse |
es |
5a |
s | |
measure |
tosAiaght, -padjex |
Genie |
jamais |
3 | |
sure |
s/soh, tash |
ScAiff |
chat |
ƒ | |
:vou |
Yee, billey |
/ahr |
travail |
j | |
hew |
Aooyl, Aiarn |
icA |
(wanting) |
? | |
good |
geay, glass, bolg |
gut |
gare |
g | |
8 |
could |
carrey, gueig, mucA |
Aönnen |
car |
k |
?3 8 |
loc^ |
chayt, nogAt, logA |
ach |
(wanting) |
X |
0 |
(wanting) |
ghow, ghxeeyxn, magAer |
(wanting) |
q | |
1 |
low |
/aue, ooyl |
Land |
/a |
1 |
row |
raue, ard, mooar |
Pand |
rat |
r | |
my |
wee, ennyw |
wein |
wis |
m | |
to 8 |
Migh |
Moa, la«e |
«ein |
ni |
n |
Sl«^ |
M’gAoaill, bi«g |
Riwg |
(wanting) |
0 | |
^ 8 |
Aouse |
Aullad, Aug |
Haus |
(wanting) |
h |
34
ORTHOGRAPHY
Vowels are either long or short. A vowel doubled, or followed by h is sure to be long. Before a group of consonants a vowel is, as anbsp;rule, short.
A digraph is a double symbol with only a single vowel sound, in contradistinction to a diphthong, which contains two vowel sounds.nbsp;Thus: faik (fak) contains a digraph, while ain (ain) contains anbsp;diphthong.
and sounded a „nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ae
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ae:
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;a:
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ae:
a:
and sounded a: „nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ae:
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ae
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ü
i:
e: i
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;i
o:
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;u:
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;3
o:
a is short in ad, labh, mac a ,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,, lane
a is long in rollage, drollane a ,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,, fakin, cha, shiaght
a nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mar00, sdrey
The prefix aa is pronounced aah is long in raah, daah .nbsp;aenbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;aeg
ai is short in caill, faik, faill ay is long in kaynbsp;ahnbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;cah, gah
e is short in hen, beg, kesh ê is long in meriu, venbsp;eanbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;bea, rea
ea is short in leagh . ee is long in feed, feesh, reenbsp;eenbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;fheet, hee’m .
ei nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;treigeil
ey nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;key
ey nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ley
ey is short in keyl ey is long in keyrreynbsp;ehnbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;eh,feh
i is short in idd, Ihig, pick i is diphthongal in bine, sidenbsp;iy is short in kiytnbsp;onbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;son, sock
Ó is long in dhdne, 6ney oanbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;deal, moal
oe nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;croe
oe nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;coe
oi is short in croitt . oi is long in roish, roin, voishnbsp;oo is short in dooin, rooinnbsp;00 is long in noo, loo, doon
-ocr page 51-
THE LETTERS |
3. | ||
oy |
is long in noym, voym, roym, royd |
. and sounded |
0: |
oh |
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„ shoh, poh |
• nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;it |
o: |
oh |
is short in stoht, poht . |
• nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;a |
0 |
u |
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„ muc, hug |
• » |
A |
u |
is diphthongal in Ihune, kute . |
• nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;a | |
ui |
is short in guilley, huic |
• nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;t* |
i |
y |
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„ yn, dyn, my, dty . |
• nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;it |
Ö |
y |
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,, ynsagh, ymmodee . |
• nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;it |
i |
Sometimes these digraphs are further lengthened by adding another vowel, such as e, i, h or y, but the pronunciation usuallynbsp;remains the same. Examples: aae, caaig, caayr, eairk, leeid, meeyl,nbsp;coayl, cooid. These are occasionally pronounced slightly disyllabic,nbsp;as cooid (ku'd‘).
What is meant by d', t'.Jac., is not that a distinct i is heard after the consonant, but a slight whispered sound. Say ‘had you’, andnbsp;then try and omit the ou, the result being ‘had y’; the sound thusnbsp;produced will be nearly identical with the Manx slender d. It isnbsp;really the effect of the slender preceding vowel which causes thisnbsp;phenomenon. This may be more plainly demonstrated by taking annbsp;Irish word as an example, as the Manx orthography disguises it tonbsp;a certain extent: Ir. bds; sing. gen. bdis, and pronounced respectivelynbsp;bo:s, bo:f. Manx: baase, baaish {bce:s, blt;2:f).
§ 7. DIPHTHONGS, ETC. | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
vowel or diphthong: rollage (rol ae:g), a star; bane (bse.n), white, craue {kr3e:“), a bone; laue (lae:quot;), a hand; aase (se.s), growt . The Manx vowel system being based upon English phonetics— |
36 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ORTHOGRAPHY
which are notoriously clumsy—it is impossible to give any fixed rules. Many simple vowel sounds have a group of two or morenbsp;symbols to represent them. To assist the student, the principalnbsp;combinations are here given. If a vowel be preceded or followed bynbsp;i a slight ‘yot’ is heard, as kione (k‘o:n), head; aitt (at% queer.
In many words the ‘yot’ is hardly heard, as: Mark (kark), hen; Mart (kart), right.
§ 8. NASAL VOWELS
A hst of words is here given containing all the nasal vowels and diphthongs in the Manx language. Nasalization is shown thus (^).
Phon. Symb.
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Maghal, niart, cha, sniaghtey ....nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;a:
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mainstyr, ainle, aile, ain, kianlt ....nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;a‘
3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;niau, awin .......nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;a“
4. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mwaagh, quaagh, carrane, haink .nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;. se:
5. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;craue, laue .......nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;£è“
6. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mairagh, Kneale (pron. kre:l‘) ....nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ê:
8. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;insh, injil ........nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;I
9. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;cloan, croan, moddey, noa, Sniaul, poanrey, ronsey .nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;5:
10. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;moddee ........nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;5
11. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ayns, noid .......nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;o
12. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;moir ........nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;5‘
13. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mow ........nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;6“
14. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;chamoo, smoo, noo, troo, mooar, jymmoogh, thal-
looin ........ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ü:
15. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;coonlagh ........nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ü
16. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;kys .........nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;o
17. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;smayl, Mayl .......nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;o:
18. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Meayll, meayl .......nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;u:
As a general rule, most of these words had originally a nasal consonant, which in modem Manx has either disappeared, or has been changed into another consonant. Examples: niau (Ir. neamh) ;nbsp;laue (Ir. lamh); craue (Ir. cnamh). From these instances it will benbsp;observed that, although the nasal consonant has disappeared, thenbsp;nasal vowel—which always accompanies it—still remains.
§ 9. CONSONANTS
b initially and finally is pronounced like b in Eng., as in bea (be:), lifetime; cab (kab), jaw. Occurring medially, and flanked bynbsp;vowels, it is pronounced something like Eng. v in ‘heavy’, as innbsp;IMabbee (l'a;vi), bed; cabbyl (ka:val), horse. Medially, but preceded
-ocr page 53-THE LETTERS nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;37
by I or r, it is pronounced like Eng. b, as in colbagh (kolba^), heifer; carbyd (karbad), bier.
p initially and finally like p in Eng., as in paag (pseg), kiss; shapp (Jap), shop. Medially like b in the same position, as in tappeenbsp;(ta:vi), quick.
V except in a few words such as voish, amp;c., never occurs as a radical initial, but an aspiration of b or m. It never occurs finally.nbsp;It is usually pronounced like Eng. v, but sometimes slides into anbsp;sound more akin to w, or a pure labial v, i.e., a sound formed by thenbsp;lips alone, as distinguished from a v uttered with the aid of thenbsp;lower lip and the upper teeth. These sounds are distinguished bynbsp;phoneticians by the terms ‘bi-labial’ and ‘denti-labial’.nbsp;f like /in Eng., as in fer, a man. It never occurs medially or finally.nbsp;_d before or after the broad vowels a, 0, u, or y, and sometimes e,
¦ is pronounced much more explosively than is the case in English. In the phrase ‘he had the book ’, the sound formed by the conjunction of d and th, conveys a very good idea of the Manx broad d,nbsp;as in daa (dae: or döae:), two. In a few monosyllables it is pronounced 5, as: dy (öa), to or of. Medially, it is pronounced ö ifnbsp;preceded or followed by a broad vowel, as moddey (mo:Ö3), dog.nbsp;Before or after i, initially, it is pronounced like Eng. d in ‘dew’.nbsp;Initially, this sound is written j in modem Manx, in the majoritynbsp;of cases. This slender d is heard in such words as noid (no:d'),nbsp;enemy; mayd (mad‘), we; glennid (glenid'), cleanliness. Medially,nbsp;slender d is pronounced like an Eng. / as in troiddey (trAdsa), scolding, and often as a Frenchy, as in sheidey (fe.'sa), blowing; sheeideynbsp;(Ji:33), silk. Colloquially, slender medial d is frequently elided, asnbsp;in credjal (krae:jal), believing.
t broad is pronounced much more exj[)losively than Eng. t. Slender t is usually writeen gh in modem Manx, except finally.nbsp;T is broad in tarroo (tarn), bull; jeant (d3aent), done. Broad tnbsp;medially is pronounced 8 as in baatey (bae;9a), boat; Ihiatteenbsp;(l’a:9i), side. Slender/medially is pronounced 3, as in aaitin (a:3in),nbsp;gorse. Final slender / is pronounced like / in ‘tutor’, as in cailtnbsp;(kalt'), lost; aspit (aspit‘), colloquial of aspick, bishop,nbsp;j is pronounced like j in Eng. in jiarg (d3arg), red. Medially itnbsp;is generally preceded by d and is pronounced 3 as in padjernbsp;(pa;3ar), prayer; maidjeynbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;stick. It occurs without d in
lajer (la:3ar), strong, j is never found as a final consonant. See d. ch like ch in Eng. ‘ cherry ’ and often written in modem Manxnbsp;with a cedilla as in ghiarn (tjam), lord; ghiamble (tjambal), temple.nbsp;Medially, ch is generally preceded by / as bwoailtghyn (bultJan),nbsp;folds, gh never occurs finally. See t.nbsp;s in Manx, as an initial or final, is pronounced with a more lisped
-ocr page 54-38 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ORTHOGRAPHY
sound than Eng. s, as sap (sap), wisp; cass (kas), foot. Medially, s is pronounced nearly like th in ‘ that ’, as in shassoo (Ja:5u), standing ; and sometimes like z as assyl (a:zal), ass. Finally, when notnbsp;doubled, it is pronounced z, as in as (a:z), and.nbsp;sh is the mouille form of s, i.e. the sound of s before a slendernbsp;vowel, written in Irish se, in Welsh si, and in English and Manxnbsp;sh. S/jamyr (Jaemar), room; teslj (taj), moist. Medially, it is pronounced 3, as in aashag (aeisag), sofa,nbsp;g is sounded exactly like g in English, as in goh (gob), beak; lhag (lag),nbsp;slack; boggey (boigo), joy.
c, k: c is used before a broad vowel, and k before a slender one, and pronounced like c and k in the same position in English, as innbsp;cappan (kavan), a cup; kione (k‘o:n), head. Medially, c is oftennbsp;elided, as in laccal (la:l), wanting.
gh at the beginning of a word is pronounced like gh in Irish, as in ghow (gou), took. Medially, it is usually silent, as in magher (ma:r),nbsp;a field; staghyl (sta;il‘), an awkward person. In such words itnbsp;merely serves to lengthen the preceding vowel. Finally, it isnbsp;pronounced y, as in magh (ma:x), out.nbsp;ch usually occurs as an aspiration of c or It is seldom foundnbsp;medially or finally. It is pronounced y, as in chab (xab), jaw.
1 broad is sounded rather differently from Eng. 1. It is formed by bringing the point of the tongue in contact with the edge of thenbsp;upper teeth, when a kind of thick sound is produced, as in lauenbsp;(laequot;), hand; ooyl (u:l), apple; boalley (borla), wall. I slender isnbsp;pronounced like Eng. I in ‘million’, as in lieh (1'e:), half; baileynbsp;(bad’a), town; sooill (su:l'), eye.
r broad is pronounced with the point of the tongue on a lower level than is the case with Eng. r, as in reih (rsé), choose; mooarnbsp;(muar), big; carrey (kara), friend, r slender is pronounced analogously to nS 1', i.e. a palatalized r; as in riu (fiu), to you; airhnbsp;(ae:r‘), gold; mdrish (me:rish), with,nbsp;m like m in English, as in mee (mi), I; ennym (enam), name,nbsp;n broad is produced with the tip of the tongue brought near thenbsp;edge of the upper teeth, as in noa (no), new. n slender is like n innbsp;‘Britannia’, as in niart (n'art), strength; blein (ble:n‘), year,nbsp;ngas in Eng. ‘king’ (slender); ‘long’ (broad). Bing (big), jury;nbsp;er n’ghoaill (asrqal’), having taken. Never like ng in ‘singe’.
§ 10. GENERAL REMARKS ON THE CONSONANTS
Double consonants generally occim in the middle or at the end of words, and are pronounced as though they were single.
B, d, I, m, n, r, and t followed by h do not differ in pronunciation from the single consonants.
-ocr page 55-THE LETTERS nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;39
Ph is pronounced like ph in ‘Philip’ in phadeyr (fadae'x), prophet.
Qu is pronounced like qu in ‘quail’ in queig (kweg), five.
Wh\s pronounced like wh in ‘when’ in whing (hwiq), yoke.
W is pronounced like w in ‘wean’ in warp (worp), three.
H is pronounced like h in ‘heal’ in hie (ha‘), went, h beginning a word is never silent as in ‘honour’.
Hi is pronounced like h in ‘hue’ in hiarn (h'am), lord. When an initial h is an aspiration of sh or gh it is pronounced like h in ‘hue’, asnbsp;in hooyl (h'u:l), walked; haglym (h'argbm), gathered.
Medial mutation of consonants is by no means a rigid rule, for mediaT^ and J are often pronounced as in ‘copper’, ‘labour’, amp;c.,nbsp;as in ghibbyrt (t ƒ Abort), a well (South); ghibbyr (tjivor), a wellnbsp;(North); napin (napon), a turnip. In regard to this phenomenonnbsp;Sir John Rhys says: ‘ this mutation is not yet quite closed, for betweennbsp;p, h, and v one may still hear various grades of pronunciation. . . .nbsp;In a word this mutation is one which is establishing itself, and tiU itnbsp;is established a certain latitude would be allowed in the pronunciation.'
Hr is pronounced yr as in hreih (xrse'), wretched.
T immediately following certain consonants, as nt, U, is generally pronouncedii, asincoontey (kunda), account; moUeyragh (moldae:rax),nbsp;fraudulent.
The more or less latent yot (j or ') at the end of words like blein, becomes, when the word is closely followed by a vowel, clearlynbsp;perceptible, as in blein elley (ble:n jsela), another year; yn aspicknbsp;(in jarspik), the bishop, (Ir. easpog); yn Arragh (in jarax), thenbsp;Spring, (Ir. earrach); the initial vowel in all such words being pronounced ‘broad’ when not preceded by the article.
The combination of n tnouilU and yot is liable to be changed into a palatal q, as in shinyn (Jiqin), we; dooinyn (diqin), to us; ainynnbsp;(iqin), at us. This change has also occurred in such words as kingnbsp;(Ir. cinn), heads; ghing (Ir. tinn), ill; ping (Ir. pighinn), penny.nbsp;A medial t followed by n is often pronounced k in conversation, asnbsp;taitnys (tatnjis or taknis), pleasure.
The nasal of the articley w-r-the element of which consisted originally of nd—takes ffs colouring from the word to which it is prefixed, andnbsp;in case the latter is one beginning with a dental nasal, the languagenbsp;has a tendency to treat the nasal as a part only of the article. Thusnbsp;yn before the word oor becomes yn (with n broad), whereas beforenbsp;Erin, it becomes(with n mouille or slender), and so in other cases.nbsp;Further, the English word ‘nation’ when borrowed into Manx camenbsp;to be treated as if it were yn ation, so that dtiun, and later ashoon,nbsp;came to be regarded as the complete word. The same thing happensnbsp;in native words, as for example Tn ardnieu, a snake, adder. Here thenbsp;syllable ar represents nar = Irish nathair, Welsh neidr. In fact
-ocr page 56-40 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ORTHOGRAPHY
the English ‘an adder’ forms an apt phonological parallel, as it stands for ‘a nadder’ with the latter word of the same origin as thenbsp;Celtic ones. Siinilarly in the case of the words edd, a nest (Ik. nead);nbsp;OlUck, Christmas (Ir. Nodlaig). Occasionally the nasal n is prefixednbsp;where it has no etymological standing, as in nah, second; fromytt aa.nbsp;In the case of ‘ Kirk Cairbre ’ and ‘ Kirk Conchan ’ a similar changenbsp;has taken place, the generally accepted forms now being ‘Kirknbsp;Arbory’ (the spelling ‘arbory’ probably being a fanciful derivationnbsp;from the English word ‘arbour’, a wooded place), and ‘Kirk On-chan ’. In Manx these are Skeeyll Cairbre and Skeeyll Connaghyn.
The final oo in iroo, envy; chamoo, not more, neither; is sometimes pronounced with an q, as (tru:q, ha'muq).
A phenomenon of considerable importance in the present pronunciation of Manx consists in prefixing to a final nasal consonant ynbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;the corresponding voiced mute. Thus trome {txo'ihm), heavy, kione
(k'o:dn}, head; Ihong (lAgq), ship. The same thing happens with rn and rl, as oarn (ordn), barley; Baarl (baerdl), the English language.
This modification has in its extreme form no Celtic parallel except in the later stages of O. Cornish, where for instance camm, crooked,nbsp;axAgwyn, white, became cahm and gwydn. It is far more interesting,nbsp;however, as being suggestive of historical connexion, to find thatnbsp;this phonetic pectiliarity is one of the actual characteristics of thenbsp;lowland Scottish dialect of Caithness. There, for example, the oldnbsp;Norse word steinn, a stone, has become steidn.
In the spoken language, an I is often introduced between a labial andyot, just as in the Slavonic languages. Bio (bl'o:), hve-, fiogheynbsp;(fl'o:ga), wither. Note also the following: blanc (Fr. white); bianconbsp;(Sp.); bianco (Port.); ban (Ir. and Sc.); bane (Mx.).
There is a change which is undergone by r when it is pronounced z; as in poanrey (beans), pronouncedor pö:zo\ and sometimesnbsp;ynrick pronounced inzik (upright). Similarly, the name writtennbsp;Kinry derived from Mac Henry is pronounced Kinzi.
§ II. ACCENT
Three degrees of accent may be distinguished: principal ('), secondaQy_('), weak (o), which are represented in English ‘victory’nbsp;and in Manx bdrridghi.
In nearly all native Manx words the principal accent rests on the root-syllable, which is usually the first syllable in a word, e.g., glen,nbsp;clean; gUnney, cleaning; glénnèydèr, a cleaner; glénnèydêr'^n, cleaners.
Exceptions are (i) Nouns ending in age, atg, eig, ane, een, eyr, oon, and oor; (2) Adjectives ending in oil; (3) Verbs ending in ean,nbsp;ail, eil.
(i) Rollage, a star; car dig, a beetle; keilUig, a church-enclosure;
-ocr page 57-THE LETTERS nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;41
dhidne, a worm; cliegéen, a jewel; scrudéyr, a writer; cahóon, a capon; wardóor, a gaoler.
(2) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Sheeóil, peaceful; thieóil, domestic.
(3) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Soüshéan, shine; cumrdil, hinder; treigéil, forsake.
These exceptions to the rule given above always retain the accent on the second syllable, although one or more syllables be added, as:nbsp;rolldgëydër, astronomer; scrüdéyr^s, penmanship.
In rèeridght the accent is on the penultimate.
In compound word^the principal accent rests on the qualifying part, i.e. as a rule the second part, the first part then having anbsp;secondary accent, as :feïll-vüc, pork; moöinjêr-véggëy, fairies; thie-óast,nbsp;an inn, hotel; Ihidnndn-shée, a familiar spirit. But if the first partnbsp;is the qualifying one, both parts bear a principal accent, as in^6oc^-góayr, a he-goat; móir-dgglish, a cathedral.
The inseparable prefixes and all suffixes—excepting those given above—are unaccented.
Loan-words as a rule retain the accent which they have in the language from which they are borrowed, as ashóon, nation; lessóon,nbsp;lesson (Fr. legón); jinndir, dinner (Fr. dinér); preaghóor, preachernbsp;(Fr. prêcheür). These are French words borrowed through Anglo-Norman channels.
TABLE OF MUTATIONS
CONSONANTS VOWELS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
CHAPTER II
The word ‘aspiration’ comes from the Latin verb aspirare, to breathe; hence, when we say in Manx that a consonant is aspirated,nbsp;we mean that the breath is not completely stopped in the formationnbsp;of the consonant, but rather that the consonant sound is breathed.
Take, for example, the consonant b. To form this consonant soimd the lips are pressed closely together for an instant, and the breath isnbsp;forced out separating the lips. Now, if we wish to get the sound of bnbsp;aspirated, we must breathe the whole time whilst trying to form thenbsp;sound of b; i.e. we must not close the lips entirely, and the resultingnbsp;sound is like the English consonant v. Hence, we shall see that vnbsp;rarely occurs in Manx as a radical or root initial, but is nearly alwaysnbsp;an aspiration of b or m.
b, m |
aspirate to v |
as ben, ven; mac, vac. |
c, k |
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ch |
,, cab, chab; kione, chione. |
qu |
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;wh |
,, quaiyl, whaiyl. |
d, g |
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;gh |
,, dow, ghow; gob, ghob. |
j, gi |
.. y |
,, joan, yoan; gial, yial. |
f |
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;(quiescent) |
„ foays, oays. |
P |
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ph |
„ partan, phartan. |
s, sh, t, gh |
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;h |
Jsooill, hooill; shapp, hi ” \tash, hash; ghiass, hia |
si |
1 |
,, slat, lat. |
str |
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;hr |
„ str aid, hr aid. |
The principal rules are here given.
(a) The possessive adjectives my, my; dty, thy; and e, his; aspirate the first consonant of the following word, as my wooa (booa), mynbsp;cow; dty voir (moir), thy mother; e chabbyl {cabbyl), his horse. Thenbsp;radical or root-word is given in brackets.
{b) The article aspirates a noun in the nominative and accusative feminine singular, and also in the genitive masculine singular: ynnbsp;ven {ben), the woman; mac yn er {fer), the man’s son.
Exceptions : the letters t, d, gh, j, s, sh are exceptions to the rule given above, as; yn taitnys (fern.), the pleasure; mac yn dooinney, thenbsp;man’s son.
(c) In compound words the initial consonant of the second word is aspirated, except when the second word begins with t, d, gh ox j, andnbsp;the first ends in one of the letters t, d, gh, j, n, I, s ox sh: shenn-voir,
’ Also called nasalization.
-ocr page 59-ASPIRATION, ECLIPSIS, ETC. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;43
a grandmother; cam-hooillagh, squint-eyed; lieh-hooillagh, one-eyed; but shenn-dooinney, an old man; shenn-thie, an old house, a shanty.
Whenever the first word is preceded by a possessive adjective, the second is usually aspirated, as: my henn ghooinney, my old man.
(d) The interjection 0 or Y, the sign of the vocative case, causes aspiration in nouns of both genders and both numbers: y ghooinney!nbsp;man! y Yuan I John! This sign is generally omitted in modem Manx,nbsp;but the aspiration remains, as: Hiarn! {Qhiarn), Lord! Yee! (Jee),nbsp;God!
{e) An adjective is aspirated when it agrees with a feminine noun in the nominative or accusative singular, or with a masculine nounnbsp;in the genitive singular, and in the dative and vocative singular ofnbsp;both genders; also in the nominative plural when the noun ends in anbsp;slender consonant; as booa vane (bane), a white cow; macyn er vooarnbsp;(mooar), the big man’s son; voish yn ven vie, from the good woman;nbsp;tree cabhil vooarey, three big horses.
if) When a noun is immediately followed by an indefinite' noun in the genitive case, singular or plural, the initial of the noun in thenbsp;genitive is usually subject to precisely the same rales as if it were thenbsp;initial of an adjective; e.g. ooh chirkey (coll, ooh chiark), a hen(’s) egg;nbsp;meinn-chorkey, oatmeal. The letters t, gh, d, j, n, I, s and sh are notnbsp;aspirated; and ƒ is often excepted, as the change in sound is so great.
(g) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The initial of a verb is aspirated (i) in the imperfect and thenbsp;conditional, active voice; (2) after the particle my, if; (3) after thenbsp;simple relative particle ny, expressed or understood :
(i) va{ba)shin, we were; hass(shass)ee, she stood; woaillin, I should strike; (2) my huitt eh, if he fell; (3) eshyn (ny) hooylys, he who walks.
(h) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The initial of the word following by (the past tense and conditional of the verb she) is usually aspirated.
by vie Ihiam, I liked or would like.
V are (fare) lesh, he preferred or would prefer.
(i) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Some of the simple prepositions aspirate the initials of the nounsnbsp;immediately following them: fo halloo, under land or underground,nbsp;subterranean; ta shin goll gy Ghoolish (Doolish), we are going tonbsp;Douglas.
Eclipsis is the term used to denote the suppression of the sounds of certain Manx consonants by substituting others produced by the samenbsp;organ of speech.
There is usually a great similarity between the eclipsing letter and the letter eclipsed: thus p is eclipsed by 6; i is eclipsed by d, amp;c.nbsp;If the student pronounce the letters p and b, t and d, he will imme-
'¦ i.e. one not preceded by the del. art., poss. adj., amp;c.
-ocr page 60-44 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ORTHOGRAPHY
diately notice the similarity above referred to. Thus h and d are like p and t, except that they are pronounced with greater stress ofnbsp;the breath, or, more correctly, with greater vibration of the vocalnbsp;chords.
Eleven of the consonants can be eclipsed, viz. h, c, gh, d, ƒ, g, j, k, p, q, t. Each consonant has its own eclipsing letter, and can be eclipsednbsp;by no others. In Manx the eclipsed letter is not written.
Formerly eclipsis was shown by placing the eclipsing letter immediately before the eclipsed letter, and this is stiU done in Irish.
Manx : nyn darroo, their bull.
Irish : a dtarhh, their bull, b is eclipsed by m as hard, mard.
c, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;k, q
d. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;j
f
g
P
t
f cahbyl, gahhyl; kione, gione;
® nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;” Xquail, guaiyl.
j „ ghiarn, jiarn. n „ darragh, n’gharragh; jee, n’yeenbsp;Vnbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;vuill.
ng ,, guilley, n’ghuilley. b ,, padjer, hadjer.nbsp;d ,, tonn, donn.
Although d in writing is apparently changed into gh, j into y, and g into gh, the simple consonants heard in pronunciation are n innbsp;‘now’ and ‘new’ and ng in ‘king’, therefore it is more correct to saynbsp;that d andy are eclipsed by n, and g by ng. Thus er n'gholl (old verbalnbsp;noun doll) is pronounced or nAl, and er n’ghoaill is pronouncednbsp;or ïjo'l'.
§ IS. RULES FOR ECLIPSIS
{a) The possessive adjective plural—nyn, our, your, or their— eclipses the initial consonant of the next word, as nyn maatey {haatey),nbsp;our boat.
(6) The demonstrative adjective (article) ny eclipses the initial consonant of the noun in the genitive plural (both genders): laueynnbsp;ny vir, the men’s hands. This usage is literary, in colloquial Manxnbsp;the initial consonant of the genitive plural noun remains unchanged.
(c) The initial consonant of a verb is eclipsed after the particles cha, not; a, an, whether; ere, where; nagh, whether . . . not, that. . .nbsp;not; dy, gy, that; mannagh {my nagh), if not, unless; ga dy, although;nbsp;dy, if; doig shiu (interr. part, understood, a doig shiu?) Do you understand? Will you understand? Nagh vel eh ghing? Is he not ill?nbsp;Cre vel eh? Where is he? Dooyrt eh dy darragh eh, he said that henbsp;would come; cha drag eh, he shall not raise; mannagh jig ad, if theynbsp;come not; ga dy daink eh, although he came.
-ocr page 61-45
ASPIRATION, ECLIPSIS, ETC.
§ 16. THE INSERTION OF n
When a word begins with a vowel, the letter n is usually prefixed in all those cases in which a consonant would be eclipsed: e.g. Tanbsp;mee er n’aase, I have grown; cka n’aasagh eh, he would not grow.
§ 17. THE INSERTION OF g
When a verbal noun begins with a vowel, g is prefixed to form the present participle: e.g. ta mee g’aase, I am a-growing. This is for annbsp;older Ta mee ec aase, the verbal noun being preceded by the preposition ec to form the present participle.
§ 18. THE INSERTION OF d
When a verb begins with a vowel, d is prefixed to show the imperfect tense: e.g. d’aase eh, he grew. This is an abbreviation of dy, an old particle which formerly preceded all verbs in the imperfectnbsp;tense, and caused aspiration when preceding a consonant. When dnbsp;is prefixed to a slender vowel, it is generally pronounced, and sometimes written j: j’eeck, -pdld; j’etlee, flew; j’immee, went.
§ 19. THE INSERTION OF t
{a) If a noun begins with s followed by a vowel, or by I, n, or tr, the s is replaced by t after the article in the nom. and acc. fern, sing.,nbsp;and gen. mas., and sometimes in the dat. sing, of both genders.nbsp;sooill, an eye.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;yn tooill, the eye.
slat, a rod. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;yn tlat, the rod.
snaid, a needle. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;yn tnaid, the needle.
straid, a street. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;yn traid, the street.
In later Manx si is changed to cl, as: yn clot. In modem Manx si and sn remain unchanged after the article. All nouns initialednbsp;by str were formerly sr, the insertion of t between s and r probablynbsp;being a natural development for easier prommciation.
Sh is changed to gh, as: shamyr, a room; yn ghamyr, the room. In this case t is not written but is heard in the pronunciation, e.g.nbsp;tshamyr.
Thie yn taggyrt, the priest’s house.
T'ad gheet veih’n ghelg, they are coming from the hunt.
(b) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;This replacing of s by i occurs after some words ending in n,nbsp;as: yn ghenn ghenn-ayr, the great-grandfather.
(c) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The letter s is often classed among the eclipsable consonants,nbsp;because its sound is suppressed, and that of another consonant
-ocr page 62-46 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ORTHOGRAPHY
substituted; but as the substitution of t follows the rules for aspiration rather than those for eclipsis, it is better to class s with the non-eclipsable letters I, m, n, r, s.
(d) This t is really part of the article, which would formerly be writtenywi, zs,\ynt sooill, the eye; the s being suppressed.
Particles which neither aspirate nor eclipse, and which end in a vowel, prefix h to words beginning with a vowel. Although this hnbsp;is not always written, it may be heard in the pronunciation. Such isnbsp;the case with the following; e, her; dy, gy, to; dy, gy, with (formingnbsp;adverbs); ny, the (in the nom., acc., and dat. plural, also in the gen.nbsp;sing, feminine).
Attenuation is the process of making a broad consonant slender. This is usually done by placing an i immediately before the broadnbsp;consonant, or changing the broad vowel into an i. A final isnbsp;changed to ee. Thus cabhyl, a horse is attenuated to cabbil to formnbsp;the plural, and the broad I becomes slender.nbsp;fer, one, a man.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;fir, men.
Manninagh, a Manxman. Manninee, Manxmen.
Broadening is the process of making a slender consonant broad. This is often done by omitting an i, as bwoaill, strike; bwoalley,nbsp;striking.
When a single consonant, or two consonants which easily blend together, come between two vowels, both the vowels must be slendernbsp;or both must be broad.
This rule does not always apply to Manx spelling, but is always heard in pronunciation.
Take such a word as ushtey, pronounced Aftfo. If sh were replaced by s (a broad consonant), we should have the pronunciation ASio. Innbsp;Irish phonetics this change would be shown as follows: uiste (slender,nbsp;pron. ift'o); usta (broad, pron. Asta).
Whenever in a word of two or more syllables an unaccented vowel or diphthong occurs in the last syllable between a liquid {I, m, n, r)nbsp;and any other consonant, or between two liquids, the unaccentednbsp;vowel or diphthong is elided whenever the word is lengthened by anbsp;grammatical inflexion beginning with a vowel. This elision of onenbsp;or more unaccented vowels from the body of a Manx word is called
-ocr page 63-ASPIRATION, ECLIPSIS, ETC. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;47
syncope', and when the vowels have been elided the word is said to be syncopated.
The following examples will fully exemplify the method of syncopating words;
ohhyr, work. ollan, wool.nbsp;aalin, fair. caddil, sleep (imperat.). annym, soul.nbsp;ennym, name. |
dbhragh, working. olley, wool.nbsp;aaley, fairer.nbsp;cadley, sleeping.nbsp;anmey, of (the) soul.nbsp;enmyn, names. |
PART II
CHAPTER I
Nouns are divided into two main classes. Proper and Common.
Proper, such as Mannin, Man; Sostyn, England; Juan, John; Moirrey, Mary, amp;c.
Common Nouns are subdivided into:
{a) Ordinary class names, such as hilley, a tree; thie, a house; dooinney, a man; ten, a woman, amp;c.
(6) Collective nouns, such as sleih, people; ollagh, kine; maase, cattle; chan, children, descendants, amp;c.
(c) Definite numerals, such as nane, one; jees, two, a couple; troor, three, a trio; feed, twenty, a score, amp;c.
{d) Indefinite numerals, such as quoid ic’wooad), how much, how many; ny smoo, more; ny sloo, less; wheesh, as many, so many;nbsp;whilleen, as many; rouyr, too many, too much; heggan, little, toonbsp;little, too few; mooarane, many; dy-Uooar, enough; shiartanse,nbsp;several, amp;c.
[e) Abstract nouns, such asgraih, love; dwoaie, hate; feoh, disgust; gloyr, glory; pooar, power.
All nouns derived from other nouns, adjectives, or verbs, ending in id,ys, and aght, belong to this class, as aalid, prettiness; donaghys,nbsp;darkness; foalsaght, deceit. To this class also belong the verbalnbsp;nouns, as lhaih, reading; screen, writing.
§ 24. GENDER
There are two genders in Manx, Masculine and Feminine. There is no Neuter Gender.
The gender of most Manx nouns may be learned by the application of a few general rules.
Masculine Nouns
{a) Names of males are masculine, as dooinney, a man; toshiagh, a chieftain, prince; ayr, a father; kellagh, a cock.
(amp;) The names of occupations, offices, amp;c., peculiar to men, are masculine, as olloo, a doctor (of learning); bard, a poet; briw, a judge;nbsp;ree, a king; sidoor, a soldier.
(c) Personal agents ending in agh, ee, er, erey, eyr, oon, or oor are
H
-ocr page 66-50 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ACCIDENCE
masculine: Frangagh, a Frenchman; greasee, a cobbler; fidder, a weaver; coagerey, a cook; scmdeyr, a writer; wardoon, a warden;nbsp;war door, a jailer.
{d) Diminutives ending in an, ane. See., and most abstract nouns ending in ys are masculine: crongan, a hillock; carnane, a barrow,nbsp;monument; yindys, wonder.
(e) The diminutives ending in in, een, are usually said to be of the same gender as the noun from which they are derived. Notwithstanding this rule they seem to be all masculine. Caillin,^ a girl,nbsp;wench, is masculine,^ i.e. it suffers the same initial changes as anbsp;masculine noun, hut the pronoun referring to it is feminine. She is thenbsp;fairest girl, T’ee yn caillin s’aaley.
(ƒ) Many nouns which end in a consonant or two consonants preceded by a broad vowel are masculine: as boayl, a place; leagh,nbsp;a price; croan, a mast, amp;c.
(g) Nouns ending in oo or ey are generally masculine, as also are verbal nouns when used substantively, as jannoo, an action; jalloo,nbsp;an image; goo, a report; hainney, milk; freeney, a pin; eggey, a webnbsp;of cloth; shooyl, walking; fakin, seeing; cooney, helping.
Exceptions: (i) All words of two or more syllables ending in ag, age, aght, aig, eig, oge, and a few in ys.
(2) A large number of norms ending in a broad consonant are feminine.
Feminine Nouns
{a) Names of females and designations of females are feminine: ben, a woman; moir, a mother; kiark, a hen; keyrrey, a sheep.
(6) The names of countries, rivers, amp;c., are feminine: Mannin, Man; Yn Doo, the river Doo (black); yn Cholloo, the Calf (of Man).
(c) Words of two or more syllables ending in ag, aght, id. Sec., are feminine, as ushag, a bird; creenaght, wisdom, aalid, beauty.
{d) Nouns ending in a consonant or two consonants preceded by a slender vowel, are feminine, as gheer, county; sooill, an eye; keeill,nbsp;a church.
Exceptions: (i) Diminutives in in, een. (2) A few nouns ending in a slender consonant are masculine.
Words that are common to both sexes, as ghaghter, a messenger; sharvaant, a servant; paitchey, a child; although grammaticallynbsp;treated as masculine nouns, are often said to be of the Commonnbsp;gender.
Gender is decided by grammatical
' In colloquial Manx it is feminine.
^ Do not confound sex with gender, usage only.
-ocr page 67-THE NOUN nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;51
The gender of the names of Living Creatures is shown in two
ways:
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;By adding a word to form both the Masculine and Feminine:
Masculine nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Feminine
fer-coyrlee, an adviser. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ben-coyrlee.
fer-reill, a ruler. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ben-reill.
fer-obbee, a wizard, sorcerer. ben-obbee, a witch, a sorceress.
Or, by adding a word to form either the Masculine or Feminine : jee, a god.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ben-jee, a goddess.
ree, a king. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ben-rein, a queen.
kayt, a cat. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;collagh-kayt, a he-cat.
guiy, a goose. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;kellagh-guiy, a gander.
goayr, a goat. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;bock-goayr, a he-goat.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;By having different words for each gender:
dooinney, a man. ayr, a father.nbsp;mac, a son.nbsp;braar, a brother.nbsp;jishig, papa.nbsp;naim, an uncle.nbsp;guilley']nbsp;scollag] shennayr, grandfather. jishig-mooar, grandpapa.nbsp;cabbyl, a horse.nbsp;rea, a ram.nbsp;tarroo, a bull.nbsp;stoht, a bullock.nbsp;braar-sy-leigh, brother-in-law.nbsp;kellagh, a cock. |
ben, a woman. moir, a mother. inneen, neen, a daughter. shuyr, a sister. mummig, mamma. naunt, an aunt. neen I . , doodee}^^^^^- mwarree, grandmother. mummig-vooar, grandmamma. laair, a mare. keyrrey, a sheep. booa, a cow. colhagh, a heifer. shuyr-sy-leigh, sister-in-law. kiark, a hen. |
Nouns have two numbers: the Singular and Plural.
By a peculiar idiom, the sing. num. always follows the numbers two, twenty, a hundred, and a thousand.
Examples :
un Hoar, one book. daa Hoar, two books.nbsp;tree Hoaryn, three books.nbsp;jeih Hoaryn, ten books.
feed Hoar, twenty books. daa-eed Hoar, forty books.nbsp;keead Hoar, 100 books.nbsp;shey-feed Hoar, 120 books.
thousane Hoar, 1,000 books.
52 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ACCIDENCE
The Plural Number
The plural number is formed from the singular in two ways:
(1) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;By adding a termination, as:
I. Uinnag-yn, window.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;4. Glion-teeyn, glen.
2 Braar-aghyn, brother. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;5. Keyll-jyn, grove.
3. Laair-eeyn, mare. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;6. Gaaue-nyn, smith.
7. Lugh-ee, mouse.
Examples of Plurals
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;yn: dorrys, door; ogher, key; ping, penny; Ihong, ship; sooill,nbsp;eye; cass, foot; assyl, ass; strooan, stream; eeast, fish.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;aghyn: ayr, father; moir, mother; (^heer, country; skynn, knife;nbsp;cree, heart; bing, jury; braar, brother; shuyr, sister.
3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;eeyn: daar6, dish; daunse, dance; bunney, sheaf.
4. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;teeyn, teenyn: gioal, pledge; lieen, linen; oarn, barley; raane,nbsp;bail; strain, nose; raun, seal (animal); streean, bridle.
5. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;9hyn, jyn, tyn: geaylin, shoulder, pi. geayltyn; bwoaillee, fold,nbsp;pi. bwoailghyn; bailey, town, pi. baljyn; uillin, elbow, pi. uiljyn.
6. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nyn, inyn: naboo, neighbour, pi. nabooyn, naboonyn; jough,nbsp;drink, pi. joughinyn.
7. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ee: feeaih, deer; crodane, gurnard; lourane, leper; Iheiy, calf;nbsp;deigh, hedge, dyke.
(2) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;By attenuation. See § 21.
Examples: bart, a bundle, pi. buirt] beeal, a mouth, pi. beill', boayrd,2i table, pi. buird] cabbyl, horse, cabhil\ dag, clock, pl.duig;nbsp;crank, hill, pi. croink] tarrao, buU, pi. terriu, amp;c.
The termination agh attenuates to ee: Albinagh, a Scotsman, Albinee, Scotsmen; gimmagh, a lobster, gimmee, lobsters.
Irregular Plurals
pi. croiyn. ,, gaan.
,, guaiee. „ laghynnbsp;mountain ,, sleityn.
A few nouns have irregular plurals, as: ben, womannbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;pi.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mraane.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;era, nut
booa, cow nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;baanbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;goa, report
caa, hound nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;cayin.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;guiy, goose
crackan, skin nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;craitnyn.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;laa, day
crammag, snail ,, crummeeyn.
§26. CASE
In Manx there are five cases: the Nominative, Accusative, Genitive, Dative, and Vocative.
{a) The Naminative case in Manx corresponds to the English nominative when the subject of a verb.
{b) The Accusative corresponds to the English objective case when governed by a transitive verb. The accusative case of every noun
-ocr page 69-THE NOUN nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;53
in Manx has the same form as the nominative, and suffers the same initial changes as regards aspiration and eclipsis.
(c) The Genitive case corresponds to the English possessive case.
{d) The Dative case is the case governed by prepositions.
{e) The Vocative corresponds to the English nominative of address. It is always used in addressing a person or persons. It is, in literarynbsp;Manx, preceded by the sign y, although ‘ O ’ may not appear beforenbsp;the English word.
Rules for the Formation of the Cases
N.B. These rules apply to all declensions.
(a) The Nominative Case Singular is always the simple form of the noun.
(amp;) The Dative Case Singular is the same as the nominative singular, except (i) in the 2nd declension, when the noun ends in anbsp;broad consonant; (2) in most of the nouns of the 5th declension.
With very few exceptions the dative case is obsolete in modem Manx.
(c) The Vocative Case Singular is always the same as the nominative singular, except in the ist declension, in which it is likenbsp;the genitive singular.
In modem Manx the vocative case of the ist declension is like the nominative singular.
Whenever the nominative plural is formed by the addition of yn, fhyn, jyn, tyn, inyn, eeyn, nyn, aghyn, ee, amp;c., it is called a strongnbsp;nominative plural.
When the nominative plural is formed by attenuation it is called a weak nominative plural.
The Genitive Plural
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The genitive plural in the ist, 2nd, and 3rd declensions is likenbsp;the nominative singular, except strong plurals.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;In the 4th declension, and in the case of nearly all strong plurals,nbsp;the genitive plural is like the nominative plural.
3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;In the 5 th declension the genitive plural is like the genitivenbsp;singular.
4. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;In the Manx of the present day the genitive plural in all declensions is like the nominative plural.
The Dative and Vocative Plurals
The dative and vocative plurals are like the nominative plurals.
§ 27. THE DECLENSIONS
The number of declensions is not quite settled: it is very much a
-ocr page 70-54
ACCIDENCE
matter of convenience. Five is the number usually reckoned in Irish, and this seems the most convenient number for the Manxnbsp;declensions also.
The declensions are known by the inflexion of the genitive singular.
The First Declension
All the nouns of the ist declension are masculine, and end in a broad consonant, ey, w, or oo.
All masculine nouns ending in a broad consonant are not of the 1st declension.
The genitive singular is formed by attenuating the nominative. This is generally done by placing an i after the last broad vowelnbsp;of the nominative, or changing the vowel into i, or a digraph havingnbsp;i as its last element.
Example
SINGULAR nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;PLURAL
Nom., Acc., and Dat. foawr, a giant. foawir.
Gen. foawir. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;foawr [mod. foawir).
Voc. (y) oawr. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;(y) oawir.
cronk, hill; eayn, lamb; geayl, coal; mayl, rent; shiaull, a sail; are declined like foawr.
In words of more than one syllable, if the nominative ends in agh the genitive singular is formed by attenuating to ee. In modemnbsp;Manx, the nominative plural of these nouns is like the genitivenbsp;singular.
Examples mullagh, a summit.
Nom., Acc., and Dat. muUagh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mullee [mod. muUee}m).
Gen. muUee. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mullagh [mod. mulleeyn).
Voc. (y) vullagh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;(y) vuUee.
markiagh, a horseman.
Nom., Acc., and Dat. markiagh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;markee.
Gen. markee. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;markiagh [mod. markee).
Voc. (y) varkiagh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;(y) varkee.
kellagh, a cock.
Nom., Acc., and Dat. kellagh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;kellee.
Gen. keUee. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;kellagh [mod. kellee).
Voc. (y) chellagh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;(y) chellee.
N.B. The majority of nouns in agh belonging to this declension are declined like the foregoing examples.
The following must be borne in mind as regards the Manx of the present day. (i) That the Dative Case is obsolete, except in a fewnbsp;set phrases. (2) That the Genitive Case, singular and plural, is like
-ocr page 71-THE NOUN nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;55
the Nominative, especially when preceded by the article. (3) That y is usually omitted in the Vocative Case, but aspiration remains.
Most verbal nouns form their genitives by attenuating to or adding ee.
caggey, fighting; gen. caggee. screen, writing; gen. screeuee.nbsp;hannaghey, blessing; gen. bannee.nbsp;imhyl, brewing; gen. imlee.
Colloquially, agh is often added, as aarlaghey, preparing; gen. aarlagh.
Many verbal nouns admit of no inflexion:
lhaih, reading. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;lessoon-lhaih, a reading-lesson.
loayrt, talking. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;greïe-loayrt, a talking-machine.
roie, running. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;fer-roie, a runner.
shooyl, walking. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;maidjey-shooyl, a walking-stick.
reill, ruling. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;fer-reill, a ruler.
Besides the above simple method of forming the genitive singular of most nouns of this declension, there are also the following modifications of the vowels of the nominative singular:
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Examples of vowel-changes in genitive singular: |
sing.
mac, a son.
Nom., Acc., Dat. mac. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mec.
Gen. mic (mac). nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mac (mec).
Voc. y vie (vac). nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;y vec.
The words given in brackets are the modern forms. As the particle y never precedes the voc. in modem Manx, it will be omitted fromnbsp;the further examples.
cabbyl, a horse.
Nom., Acc., Dat. cabbyl. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;cabbil.
Gen. cabbil (cabbyl). nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;cabbyl (cabbil).
Voc. chabbyl. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;chabbil.
-ocr page 72-56 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ACCIDENCE
The final consonant is often doubled, as hun, bottom; gen. hinn; stoht, a bullock, stitt.
A final s becomes sh, as glass, a lock; gen. sing, glish', baase, death, baaish) rass, seed., resh-,jeeas, ear of com, jeish] soost, a flail, sooisht.
The gen. of kione is king.
When a monosyllabic word containing a broad vowel is initialed with c, the initial becomes k when attenuated; cayr, a knot (in timber);nbsp;gen. sing, khyr', corp, a body, kirp.
Some nouns of this declension form their nominative plural by adding yn, aghyn, or eeyn.
NOUN |
GEN. SING. |
NOM.PLUR. |
baase, death. |
baaish. |
baase5m. |
beaghey, food. |
bee. |
beegh3m. |
caggey, war. |
caggee. |
caggaghyn. |
dorrys, door. |
dorrysh. |
dorrysyn. |
doonaght, Sunday. |
doonee. |
doonee5m. |
eaddagh, cloth. |
eaddee. |
eaddeeyn. |
eayl, lime. |
eayil. |
eayllyn. |
fouyr, autumn. |
fouyir. |
fouyryn. |
geurey, winter. |
geuree. |
geuraghyn. |
keayn, sea. |
keayin. |
keaynyn. |
keynnagh, moss. |
keynnee. |
keynneeyn. |
lhargagh, declivity. |
lhargee. |
lhargeeyn. |
losserey, herb. |
losseree. |
lossreeyn. |
margey, market. |
margee. |
margagh}m. |
mullagh, summit. |
muUee. |
mullee5m. |
rass, seed. |
resh. |
rassyn, rassinyn. |
seihll, world. |
seihill. |
seihllyn. |
soalt, barn. |
soailt. |
soaltyn. |
soost, flail. |
sooisht. |
soostyn. |
toshiaght, beginning. |
toshee. |
toshiaghtyn. |
Many nouns of this declension have two forms in the nom. plur. the regular plural is the better one, the others are generally usei | ||
colloquially. | ||
NOUN |
WEAK PLUR. |
STRONG PLUR. |
beark, a grain of corn. |
birk. |
beark5m. |
blod, a blade. |
bluid. |
blodyn. |
boayl, a place. |
buill. |
boayll5m. |
boayrd, a table. |
buird. |
boayrdyn. |
bun, bottom, end. |
binn. |
bunn5m. |
carbyd, a bier. |
carbid. |
carbydyn. |
carkyl, a circle. |
car kil. |
carkylyn. |
carroo, a carp. |
kerriu. |
carrooyn. |
57
57 NOUN criggyl, a cripple. geayl, coal.nbsp;jeir, a tear.nbsp;purt, harbour.nbsp;spoht, a spot. THE NOUN WEAK PLUK. criggil. geayil. jeir. puirt. spuit. |
STRONG PLUR. criggylyn. geaylyn. ieimyn. purt}m. spohttyn. |
There is often a slight difference of meaning between the weak and strong plural, like the English ‘penny’, ‘pennies’ (individually),nbsp;‘pence’ (collectively); as jeïr, tears; jeirnyn, a few tears.
The Second Declension
Almost all nouns of the 2nd declension are feminine. They all end in consonants, but the consonants may be either broad or slender.
The gen. sing, is formed by adding ey (if the last vowel of the nom. be broad it must be attenuated); and if the last consonant be gh it isnbsp;changed into ee in the gen. (except in words of one syllable).
The dat. sing, is formed by dropping ey of the gen. This is practically obsolete in modem Manx.
The nom. plur. is formed by adding yn, eeyn, or aghyn to the nom. sing.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Examples
cass, a foot.
| ||||||||||||||||||||
Nouns that take yn in nominative plural: |
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
' Formerly belonged to the 5th declension. I |
58 ACCIDENCE | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
The Third Declension
Nouns of the 3rd declension are either masculine or feminine according as they end in broad or slender consonants.
The gen. sing, is formed by adding ey. If the last vowel of the nom. be slender, it is usually broadened in the gen.
The nom. plur. usually adds yn, inyn, tyn, amp;c.
Most of the derived nouns in aght and id, being abstract in meaning, do not admit of a plural. When pluralized, yn is usually added.
Nouns ending in er, eyr, aght, formerly belonged to this declension, but as the gen. is exactly like the nom. in modem Manx, they maynbsp;be classed in the 4th declension.
Examples feeyn, wine.
Nom., Acc., Dat. feeyn. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;feeynyn.
Gen. fee3mey. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;feeyn.
Voc. eeyn. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;eeyn3m.
feill, flesh.
Nom., Acc., Dat. feill. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;feiUyn.
Gen. foalley. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;feiU.
Voc. eiU. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;eillyn.
-ocr page 75-59
THE NOUN dreeym, the back.
Nom., Acc., Dat. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;dreeym.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;dreeymyn, dreeminyn.
Gen. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;drommey.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;dreeym.
Voc. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ghreeym.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ghree5miyn, ghreeminyn.
moain,' turf.
Nom., Acc., Dat. moain. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;moaintyn.
Gen. moaney. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;moain.
Voc. voain. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;voaintyn.
blein, year.
Nom., Acc., Dat. blein. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;bleeantyn.^
Gen. bleeaney. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;blein.
Voc. viein. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;vleeantyn.
NOM. SING. |
GEN. SING. |
NOM.PLUR. |
annym, soul. |
anmey. |
anmee(n)yn. |
a5T, father. |
ayrey. |
ayraghyn. |
braar, brother. |
braarey. |
braaraghyn. |
ennym, name. |
enmey. |
enmyn. |
fuill, blood. |
folley. |
fuill5m. |
glion, valley |
glionney. |
gliontee(n)yn. |
Ihune, ale. |
Uiionney. |
Ihuneyn. |
mill, honey. |
molley. |
milljyn. |
moir, mother. |
mayrey. |
moiraghyn. |
mooinjer, kinsfolk. |
mooinjerey. |
mooinjeryn. |
mooir, sea, ocean. |
marrey. |
mooiraghyn. |
rheynn, division. |
ronney. |
rheynnyn.3 |
Sauin, Hollantide. |
Souney. |
Sounaghyn. |
stroin, nose. |
stroanney. |
strointecyn.quot;* |
The Fourth Declension
The 4th declension includes (i) personal nouns in er, eyr, erey, ee, which are masculine; (2) diminutives in in, een (usually masculine); (3) abstract derivatives formed from adjectives, as gillid,nbsp;brightness, from gial) aalid, prettiness, from aalin] donid, dorraghys,nbsp;darkness, from donaghey, ynrickys, uprightness, ixora ynrick, amp;c.;nbsp;(4) all nouns ending in vowels, and which do not belong to the 5thnbsp;declension. This declension differs from all others in having all thenbsp;cases of the singular exactly ahke.
This is the commonest declension in the spoken language, as many nouns which formerly belonged to the other declensions may now benbsp;classed with this.
The nom. plur. is usually formed by adding yn or aghyn.
‘ Also 5th decl.
’ Also ronnaghyn.
^ bleeaney, after numerals. * Also stroinyn.
-ocr page 76-6o nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ACCIDENCE
The genitive plural is like the nominative plural.
caillin, a girl.
SINGULAR nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;PLURAL
Nom. and Acc. caillin. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;caiUin3m.
Gen. and Dat. caillin. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;caillinyn.
Voc. chaillin. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;chaillinyn.
The following nouns take tyn or jyn immediately after the last consonant to form the nominative plural:
bailey, a town. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;pi.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;balj3m.
billey, a tree. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;biljyn.
sliennoo, a surname. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;slientyn.
Iheiney, a shirt. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Iheintyn.
9henney,j^re. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;5hentyn.
Dooinney, a man, makes deiney in nom. plur.
The Fifth Declension
Most of the nouns belonging to this declension end in a vowel, and are, with few exceptions, feminine.
The genitive singular is formed by adding a broad consonant.
The consonant is usually n or gh. When the nom. sing, ends in a consonant, a or i comes between that consonant and the consonantnbsp;added.
The dat. sing, in old Manx would be formed by attenuating the genitive, but now it is like the nominative.
The nom. plur., as a general rule, is formed by adding yn to the gen. sing. Caarjyn, friends; noidyn, enemies; gaauenyn, smiths;nbsp;which are the plurals of carrey, noid, gaaue.
Some others form the nom. plur. by attenuating the gen. sing., as in coyin, hounds; kirree, sheep.
The gen. plur. is exactly like the gen. sing.
Of the genitive ending in n only one example remains in modem Manx: thalloo, earth; gen. thallooin.
Several old datives are now used nominatively: cuisle, a vein; dat. cuishlin; awy a river; dat. awin; Erey,^ Ireland; dat. Erin;nbsp;Albeyd Scotland; dat. Albin.
The old nominative form Albey is sometimes used genitively: Ree ny h Albey, the king of Scotland.
Another old dative ending in d is now used nominatively: /ee,' twenty; AsA. feed; now,^ an enemy; dat. noid.
Genitives in n are commonly found in surnames, as: gaaue, a smith; gen. gaauin;^ mac Gaauin, Smith’s son; hence the modemnbsp;surname Gawne.
' Obsolete forms.
-ocr page 77-THE NOUN nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;61
Genitives in gh are the commonest of this declension.
keyrrey, a sheep.
PLURAL
kirree.
keyixagh.
chirree.
SINGULAR
Nom., Acc., Dat. keyrrey.
Gen. keyrragh.
Voc. cheyrrey.
Heteroclite Nouns
Heteroclite nouns are those which belong to more than one declension, as:
NOUN
moain, turf. strain, nose.
DECLENSIONS GEN. SING. NOM. PLUR.
Imoaney. moaintyn or ^nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;tmoanagh. moainteeyn.
2 and 3.
PLURAL mraane.nbsp;ben (mraane).nbsp;vraane.
PLURAL
baa’ (ollagh). booa (oUee).nbsp;vaa (ollagh).
ƒ stroinney. stroinyn or Istroanney. strointeeyn.nbsp;Irregular Nounsnbsp;ben, fern., a woman.nbsp;singularnbsp;Nom., Acc., Dat. ben.
Gen. mrieh (ben).
Voc. ven.
booa, fern., a cow. singular
Nom., Acc., Dat. booa.
Gen. baa (booa).
Voc. wooa.
The forms given in brackets are those generally used in the spoken Manx of to-day.
Although ollagh is used for the nom. plur. of booa, it is really a collective noun, and has no etymological relation with the latter noun.
* Booaghyn is occasionally met with.
-ocr page 78-CHAPTER II
Adjectives are divided into three: Qualitative, Quantitative, and Demonstrative.
Qualitative, as hane, •white-, graney, ugly; fhiu, thick; mooar, big; beg, little; Manninagh, Manx; Iheid, such, amp;c.
Quantitative, as {a. Cardinal Numbers) un, one; daa, two; queig, five, amp;c.
{b. Indefinite Numerals) ymmodee, many; quoid, crewhilleen, how much, how many; lane, mooarane, monney, much; ny smoo, ny shlee,nbsp;more; ny sloo, less; smoo, shlee, most; sloo, least; wheesh, -whilleen,nbsp;as much, as many, as big; rouyr, too much, too many; beggan,nbsp;little, too little; ynrican, only; dy-liooar, enough; erhee, any; ooilley,nbsp;all, amp;c.
Demonstrative, as {a. Ordinal Numbers) kied, first; sheyoo, sixth; daaoo . . . yeig, twelfth.
{b. Pronominal) yn, the; my, my; dty, thy; e, his, her; nyn, our, your, their; quoi, which; ere, what; dagh, gagh, each; dy-chooilley,nbsp;every; derrey, either; shoh, this; shen, shid, that; keddin, same; hene,nbsp;self, same, own; elley, other; ennagh, some.
Formerly in Manx the adjective would agree with the noun which it qualified in gender, number, and case.
Example gial, bright. | ||||||||||||||||||
|
In modem Manx the adjective is declined thus:
MAS. AND FEM. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;MAS. AND FEM.
Nom. and Acc. gial. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;gialley.
Gen., Dat., and Voc. gial. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;gialley.
' Obsolete forms.
-ocr page 79-63
63
THE ADJECTIVE § 30. GENDER The initial consonant of a feminine adjective is aspirated; | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Exceptions are, all adjectives initialed by vowels, by the liquids I, n, r, and the sibilants s, sh when followed by any other consonantnbsp;but the liquids, as sp, st, amp;c.
§ 31. NUMBER
Qualitative adjectives are pluralized by adding the termination ey.
SING. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;PLUR.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;SING.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;PLUR.
mooar, hig. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mooarey.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;dhone, brown.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;dhoney.
ard, high. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ardey.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;liau}^:, long.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;liauyrey.
beg, little. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;beggey.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;glass, grey.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;glassey.
There is an increasing tendency in modem Manx to use the singular form in both positions.
Monosyllabic adjectives ending in vowels are seldom pluralized— as mie, doo, amp;c.—although exceptions are found in the dictionaries.
Adjectives of two syllables are not usually pluralized, as niartal, peccoil, amp;c.
The initial consonant of a feminine plural adjective is not usually aspirated.
The following pronominal adjectives are pluralized as follows:
PLURAL ny, the.
quoi ny, which. ere ny, what.nbsp;ny . . . shoh, these.nbsp;ny . . . shen, those.nbsp;ny . . . shid, those.nbsp;(Iheid . . . ny, such)
SINGULAR y, yn, the.nbsp;quoi’n, which.nbsp;cre’n, what.nbsp;yn . . . shoh, thisnbsp;yn . . . shen, that.nbsp;yn . . . shid, that.
(also: Iheid . . . y, such).
§ 32. DEGREES OF COMPARISON
A qualitative adjective may be of three degrees:
Positive (giare); Comparative (ny s’girrey); Superlative (s’girrey).
-ocr page 80-64 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ACCIDENCE
Comparative Degree: the Comparative Degree may be of three sorts: of equality, superiority, or inferiority.
(1) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The Relation of Equality is expressed in Manx by:
Qualitative : cha . . . as, co . . . rish, as .. . as.
as,
Quantitative: wheesh ... as, whilleen ... as, as much . .
so much . . . as, as many . . . as, so many . . . as.
Examples : cha doo as, as black as; co creoï rish, as hard as.
na,
(2) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The Relation of Superiority is expressed by: ny s’ . .nbsp;ny smoo . . . na, more . . . than, -er than.
Examples : ny s’baney na, whiter than; ny smoo gloyroil na, more glorious than.
(3) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The Relation of Inferiority is expressed by: ny sloo ... na,nbsp;less . . . than.
Example : ny sloo ynsit na, less learned than.
The commonest way of expressing the Relation of Inferiority in Manx is:
cha . . . cha ... as, not so .. . as.
The comparisons of Superiority and Inferiority may be strengthened by adding mooarane or lane, much.
Examples: mooarane s’jeadee na, much more diligent than] lane share na, much better than.
(1) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The Absolute Superlative is formed by placing an adverbnbsp;before the positive, as: feer vie, very good] ro oik, too bad] smoo gloyroil, more glorious.
(2) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The Relative Superlative may be of Superiority, and isnbsp;expressed by yn . . . s’, 5m . . . smoo, the most] of Inferiority, andnbsp;is expressed by yn . . . sloo, the least.
Examples: yn 5mseydagh s’jeadee, the most diligent pupil] yn dooiney sloo ynsit, the least learned man.
Many adjectives are attenuated to show the Comparative and Superlative Degrees.
The termination eyis usually added, and adjectives in agh attenuate to ee.
positive |
comparative AND SUPERLATIVE |
bog, soft. |
buiggey. |
gial, bright white. |
giUey. |
giare, short. |
girrey. |
garroo, coarse. |
girroo. |
shenn, old. |
shinney. |
moal, slow. |
meUey. |
65
THE ADJECTIVE | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
‘ Numerals in brackets used in counting. K |
66 ACCIDENCE | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
THE ADJECTIVE nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;67
many numbers having duplicate forms, either of which may be used. Those already given are, perhaps, the more commonly used, but thenbsp;following may also be noted:
From 12th to 19th; yn ghaa-yeigoo, amp;c.
From 32nd to 39th; yn ghaaoo-yeig ... as feed, amp;c. yn lieh cheeadoo, the 50th; lit. the half-hundredth.nbsp;yn cheeadoo . . . dy lieh, the 150th; lit. the looth and half.nbsp;lieh cheead, 50; keead dy lieh, 150.
Alternate Forms
un or nane. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;un-jeigoo or nane-jeigoo.
nah or daaoo. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;keeadoo or queig-feedoo.
trass or treeoo. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;daa-cheeadoo or jeih-feedoo.
Milley is an older and better word than thousane, but it is obsolescent.
Daaoo is never used for ‘second’.
§ 34. THE EMPHATIC PARTICLES
The emphatic particles can be used with (i) the possessive adjectives, (2) the personal pronouns, (3) the prepositional pronorms, and (4) the sjmthetic forms of the verbs.
PLURAL —yn.nbsp;—sh.
—syn.
SINGULAR
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;—s.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;—S.
ƒ Mas. —syn. iFem. —^ish.
Examples
nyn dhiesyn, our, amp;c., house. mish (mees), myself.nbsp;eshyn, himself.nbsp;ocsyn, at themselves.
my hie’s, my house. dty hie’s, thy house.nbsp;e hiesyn, his house.nbsp;e thieish, her house.nbsp;bwoaiUjms, I strike, I shall strike.
In modem Manx the particle —only is used with possessive adjectives, as e hie’s.
The word hene may also be used to mark emphasis, either by itself or in conjunction with the emphatic particles, as:
my hie hene, my own house.
my hie’s hene, even my house.
My hie hene and my hie’s hene may both mean ‘ my house ’, but the latter is used when we wish to distinguish our own property from thatnbsp;of another person, your house and mine, yn thie euish as ayms.
-ocr page 84-CHAPTER III
In Manx there are eight classes of pronouns: Personal, Reflexive, Prepositional, Relative, Demonstrative, Partitive, Interrogative, and Reciprocal.
SINGULAR nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;PLURAL
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mee, I.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;shin, we.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;(fam.)nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;00, thou.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;(resp.)nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;shiu, you.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;shiu, you.
3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;eh, he.
3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ee, she.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ad, they.
Shin and shiu are sometimes contracted to in and iu respectively. Each of the above may take an emphatic increase, equivalentnbsp;to the English suffix self.
Emphatic Forms of the Personal Pronouns
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mish, myself.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;shin5m, ourselves.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;uss, thyself.
2. shiush, yourself. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;shiuish, yourselves.
adsyn, they.
Jeshyn, himself. tish, herself.
The word hene is added to the personal pronouns to form the Reflexive Pronouns ; as woaill mee mee-hene, I struck myself.
The reflexive pronoims are as follows:
SINGULAR nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;PLURAL
mee-hene, myself. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;shin-hene, ourselves.
00-hene, thyself.
shiu-hene, yourself. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;shiu-hene, yourselves.
eh-hene, himself.
ee-hene, herself. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ad-hene, themselves.
The above are also used as emphatic pronouns; as, Hie shin dy-valley, mee hene as eh hene, Both he and I went home.
My, dty, e, and nyn, which are usually given as the genitive cases of the personal pronouns, are not—strictly speaking—pronoims, butnbsp;adjectives; because they can never be used without a noun.
The compounds of the pronouns with the preposition da, to, are usually given as the dative cases of the personal pronouns; but aym.
-ocr page 85-THE PRONOUN nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;69
ayd, amp;c., or the compounds with any of the other prepositions are just as much the datives of the personal pronorms as dou, dhyt, amp;c.nbsp;Hence the Manx personal pronouns have no declension.
The contractions in and iu are often used in poetry, as ta’in for ta shin, ta’iu for ta shiu, amp;c.
Oo is the Singular of Familiarity and is used when addressing an animal or an inferior or equal. It is more commonly used thannbsp;its equivalent ‘thou’ in English.
Shiu is the Singular of Respect used in polite conversation as ‘you’ in English. It is the word made use of when addressing somenbsp;one of superior rank or station in life, or an elder.
In colloquial Manx, in the 3rd person singular, there is a tendency to develop an accusative form, which, as regards pronunciation,nbsp;might be represented by a. (a: North Pron., 0 South Pron.) As varrnbsp;eh a, and he killed him; Ghow eh yn coo as vaih eh a sy logh, he tooknbsp;the hound and drowned it in the lake.
§ 37. PREPOSITIONAL PRONOUNS OR
PRONOMINAL PREPOSITIONS
Sixteen of the simple prepositions combine with the personal pronouns; and to these combinations is given the name of Prepositional Pronouns or Pronominal Prepositions.
All the combinations may take an emphatic suffix.
One example will be given:
SINGULAR
ec, at or with.
ain, at us. eu, at you.
PLURAL
70
iou, to me. dhyt, to thee.nbsp;ƒ da, to him.nbsp;\jee, to her.
Ihiam, with me. Ihiat, with thee,nbsp;rlesh, with him.nbsp;\lhee, with her.
voym, from me. void, from thee.nbsp;ƒvoish, from him.nbsp;\voee, from her.
hym, to me. hood, to thee,nbsp;f huggey, to him.nbsp;Xhuic, to her.
ACCIDENCE da, to.
dooin, to us. diu, to you.
daue, to them^
lesh, with.
Ihien, with us. Ihiu, with you.
Ihieu, with them.
voish or veih, from.
voin, from us. veue, from you.
voue, from them.
hug, to, towards.
hooin, to us. hiu, to you.
hue, to them.
ro, roish, before.
roin, before us. reue, rhymbiu, before you.
roym, before me. royd, before thee.
rroish, before him. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,
Iroee, rhymbee, before her.
ass, out.
assym, out of me. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;assdooin, out of us.
assyd, assdhyt, out of thee, assdiu, out of you. rass, out of him.
\assjee, out of her.
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;aynym, in me.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;aynyd, in thee.
iayn, in him. \aynjee, in her.
assdoo, assdaue, out of them.
ayns, in.
aynin, in us. ayndiu, in you.
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;jeem, of me.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;jeed, of thee.
ijeh, of him. \jee, of her.
ayndoo, in them.
jeh, of, off, from.
jin, of us. jiu, of you.
jeu, of them.
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;foym, under me.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;foyd, under thee.
(fo, under him. \foee, rmder her.
THE PRONOUN fo, imder.
Join, under us. feue, under you.
foue, under them.
7Ï
harrish, over.
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;harrym, over me.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;harryd, over thee.
(harrish, over him. Xharree, over her.
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;moom, about me.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mood, about thee.
rmysh, about him. \moee, about her.
harrin, over us. harriu, harrishdiu, over you.nbsp;(karroo, harrishdoo, harrystoo.nbsp;1 over them,nbsp;mysh, about.
mooin, about us. miu, about you.
moo, mumboo, about them.
rish, to, by.
rooin, to us. riu, to you.
roo, to them.
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;rhym, to me.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;rhyt, to thee.nbsp;ƒ rish, to him.
\ree, to her.
m^rish, with, in company with.
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mdrym, with me.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mdrin, with us.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mayrt, with thee.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;meriu, with you.
fmdrish, with him. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;, ,,__
q J nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mar00, with them.
\maree, with her.
liorish, by (expressing instrument), beside.
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;liorym, by me.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;liorin, by us.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;liort, by thee.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;lieriu, by you.
rliorish, by him. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,. u
a. thoroo, by them. Vhoree, by her.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;¦'
There are two simple relatives in Manx, the relative particle ny, which signifies who, which, or that; and the negative particle nagh,nbsp;signifying who . . . not, which . . . not, that . . . not.
There are also the compound relatives shen ny, that which; quoid {ere wooad), which, that; quoi-erbee, whoever; cre-erbee, whatever;nbsp;shen nagh, that which . . . not.
The demonstrative pronouns are shoh, this, shen, that, shid, that (in mind).
-ocr page 88-72 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ACCIDENCE
When we are referring to a definite object these pronouns take the forms eh shoh (mas.), this; ee shoh (fern.), this; ad shoh (pL), these;nbsp;eh shen (mas.) that; ee shen (fern.), that; ad shen (pi.), those; eh shidnbsp;(mas.), that; ee shid (fern.), that; ad shid (pi.), those.
This is especially the case when the English words ‘this’, ‘that’, amp;c., are equivalent to ‘this one’, ‘that one’, See.
§ 40. PARTITIVE PRONOUNS
The principal partitive pronouns are:
fer (mas.), one. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;veg, any.
nane, one. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;cagh, all, every one, one.
jeh, one. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;paart, some.
feallagh, ones. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;peagh, one, a person.
ooilley, all.
§ 41. COMPOUND PARTITIVE PRONOUNS
dagh-fer, each.
fer-ennagh, nane-ennagh, some one. feallagh-ennagh, some ones, some folk.nbsp;dy-chooilley-fer, dy-chooilley-nane,nbsp;every one.
cha . . . veg, none, nought. fer-elley, nane-elley, another.nbsp;cagh-elley, all the rest.
feallagh-elley, others.
§ 42. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS
The interrogative pronouns are; quoi, who, which; ere, cred, ce, he, que, what; quoi lesh, quoi s’lesh, whose; quoi jeu, which of them;nbsp;quoi jin, which of us; quoi jiu, which of you.
§ 43. RECIPROCAL PRONOUN
The reciprocal pronoun in Manx is y cheilley (really e cheilley, his fellow), meaning each other, one another.
Phrases containing the Reciprocal Pronoun The reciprocal pronoun may be used with any of the prepositions:nbsp;veih my cheilley, from each other, asunder.nbsp;lesh y cheilley, with each other, together.
fud y cheilley, through each other, confused, without any order. dy cheilley {da y cheilley), to each other.
-ocr page 89-CHAPTER IV
In Manx there are two conjugations of regular verbs. AU verbs of the 1st conjugation begin with a consonant, as moyll, praise; whilstnbsp;verbs of the 2nd conjugation begin with a vowel, as ee, eat.
Forms of Conjugation
In the past tense there is only one form of conjugation, the Analytic, as voyll mee, 00, amp;c., I, thou, amp;c., praised. In the presentnbsp;and future tenses there are two forms. The ist person, sing, and plur.,nbsp;has a Synthetic form, as moyllym, I praise, I shall praise; moyllmayd,nbsp;we praise, we shall praise. The 2nd and 3rd persons have only thenbsp;analytic forms: moyllee 00, thou praisest, thou wilt praise. Thenbsp;imperfect tense has a synthetic form in the 1st person singular only,nbsp;as voyllin, I used to praise.
In modem Manx, the compound present (with ta) is more used than the synthetic and analytic forms, the latter being reserved fornbsp;the future tense.
Verbs have three moods, the Imperative, the Indicative, and the Subjunctive.
Some grammars add a fourth, the Conditional; and some omit the Subjunctive. The Conditional form, however, is always eithernbsp;Indicative or Subjunctive in meaning, and is here classed as a tensenbsp;under the Indicative Mood.
(a) The Imperative has only one tense, the Present. Its use corresponds to that of the Imperative in English.
(è) The Indicative mood has five tenses, the Present, the Imperfect, the Past, the Future, and the Conditional.
The Present Tense corresponds to the English Present, and like it usually denotes habitual action.
In modem Manx both habitual action and present action are usually signified by a compound tense, as ta mee screen, I write or am writing.nbsp;However, as in English, the present tense of certain verbs, especiallynbsp;those relating to the senses or the mind, denote present as well asnbsp;habitual action—e.g. credjym, I believe; heem, I see.
The Imperfect Tense is also called the Habitual or Consuetudinal Past. It denotes habitual action in past time, as screeuin, I used tonbsp;write.
L
-ocr page 90-74 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ACCIDENCE
The Past Tense is also called the Perfect and the Preterite. It corresponds to the Past Tense in English, as screeu mee, I wrote.
Continuous action in past time is denoted by a compound tense, as in English—e.g., va mee screeu, I was writing.
The Future Tense corresponds to the Future in English, as screeuym, I shall write.
The Conditional corresponds to the Compound Tense with ‘should’ or ‘would’ in English, as screeuagh oo, thou wouldest write.
The Conditional is also called the Secondary Future, because it denotes a future act regarded in the past, as Dooyrt eh dy screeuagh eh,nbsp;he said that he would write.
(c) In the Subjunctive Mood there are only two tenses, the Present and the Past. This mood is used principally to express a wish, andnbsp;also after certain conjunctions. The Subjunctive is often dividednbsp;into Optative or ‘wish clauses’, and Conditional.
Active Voice
Each tense has the following forms:
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The action is merely stated, as—
Screeuee^ Juanyn Hoar. John writes the book.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The compound form of No. i.
Nee^ Juan screeu yn Hoar. John writes the book.
3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The action is represented as in progress, as—
Ta Juan screeu yn Hoar. John is writing the book.
4. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The action is represented as about to happen—
Ta Juan nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;screeu yn Hoar. John is about to write the
book.
5. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The action is represented as completed—
Ta Juan nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Hoar. John has written the book.
Passive Voice
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;No simple form.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;No compound form.
3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;(with to).
Ta’n Hoar scruit. The book is written.
(with to, and idiom ‘er’).
Ta’n Hoar er ny screeu. The book is written.
(idiom with ‘ golT).
Hed^ yn Hoar er screeu. The book is written.
Always reserved for the future in modern Manx.
-ocr page 91- -ocr page 92-76 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ACCIDENCE
(c) Past Tense
woaill 00, eh, ee. woaül shin, shiu, ad.nbsp;I praised not.nbsp;he struck not.nbsp;didst thou praise?nbsp;did I strike?nbsp;did he not praise?nbsp;did we not strike?
Sing. I. voyll mee, I praised. woaill mee 2 amp; 3. voyll 00, eh, ee.
Plur. I, 2, 3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;voyll shin, shiu, ad.
Negative; cha voyll mee.
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;cha woaill eh.
Interrog.: voyll 00?
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;woaill mee?
Neg. Interrog.: nagh voyll eh?
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nagh woaill shin?
In the past tense, the aff. and interrog, have the same form, as voyll mee, I praised; voyll mee? did I praise?
{d) Future Tense
The future tense has exactly the same form as the present, which see.
(e) Conditional or Secondary Future The conditional has exactly the same form as the imperfect, asnbsp;voyllin, I would praise, amp;c.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD [a) Present Tense
Sing. 1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mollym.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;hwoaillym.
2 amp; 3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;moyll 00, eh, ee.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;bwoaill 00, eh, ee.
Plur. I. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;moyllmayd.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;bwoaillmayd.
2 amp; 3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;moyll shiu, ad.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;bwoaill shiu, ad.
If a verbal stem adds ee in the 2nd person of the imperative mood, so also does the present tense of the subjunctive mood, as Banneenbsp;yn gheer ain, bless thou our country; Dy bannee Jee ee! May Godnbsp;bless it!
The negative particle is nar or nagh.
(b) Past Tense
Sing. I. moyllin. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;bwoaillin.
2 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;amp; 3. moyllagh 00,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;eh, ee.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;bwoaillagh 00, eh,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ee.
Plur. I, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;2, 3. moyllagh shin,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;shiu, ad. bwoaillagh shin, shiu, ad.
Verbal Noun: woy/Zey. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;bwoalley.
Participle: moyllit. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;bwoailUt.
§ 47. NOTES ON THE MOODS AND TENSES
{a) The Present and Future Tenses In modem Manx the present tense simple is little used, this formnbsp;being reserved for the future.
-ocr page 93-THE VERB nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;77
The present and future tenses of regular verbs are always formed by adding -ym to the stem for the ist person singular, -mayd for thenbsp;1st pers. plur., and -ee for aU the other persons.
Sometimes -ym is divided from the stem, as moyll-ym, and -mayd is often treated as a separate pronoun, as hwoaillee mayd.
Mainyn is the emphatic form of mayd, as Yiow mainyn, we get or find, we shall get or find.
In the 1st pers. plur., the personal pronoun shin is occasionally used instead of -mayd: Caillee shin, we shaU lose.
(amp;) The Imperfect and Conditional Tenses
Both these tenses have exactly the same form, as voyllagh eh means either ‘he was used to praise’ or ‘he would praise’.
The initial consonant of this tense is usually aspirated in the active voice, when possible.
(c) The Past Tense
In the past tense, active voice, the initial consonant of the verb is aspirated.
With the exception of the aspiration of the initial consonant, this tense is exactly the same as the 2nd person singular of the Imperativenbsp;(i.e. the stem of the verb).
§ 48. SECOND CONJUGATION
IMPERATIVE MOOD Singular.
2nd. iu, drink thou.
2nd. iu-jee, drink ye. iu-shiu, drink you.
ymmyrk, bear thou.
Plural.
ymmyrk-jee, bear ye. ymmyrk-shiu, bear you.
INDICATIVE MOOD (a) Present and Future Tenses | ||||||||||||||||||||||
|
78 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ACCIDENCE
Neg. Interrog.: nagh n'iu ad? nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;donbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;they notnbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;drink?
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;naghnbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;n’ymmyrk ad?nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;donbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;they notnbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;bear?
ymmyrkagh 00, eh, ee. ymmyrkagh shin, shiu, ad.nbsp;I used not to drink, amp;c.nbsp;he used not to drink, amp;c.nbsp;used you to bear? amp;c.nbsp;used they to bear? amp;c.nbsp;used you not to drink? amp;c.nbsp;usedst thou not to bear ? amp;c.
{b) Imperfect and Conditional Tenses Sing. I. iuin, I used to drink, amp;c. ymmyrkin.
2 amp; 3. iuagh 00, eh, ee.
Plur. I, 2, 3. iuagh shin, shiu, ad.
Negative, cha n’iuin.
cha n’iuagh eh.
Interrog, n’ymmyrkagh shiu?
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;n’ymmyrkagh ad?
Neg. Interrog.: nagh n’iuagh shiu?
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;naghnbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;n’ymmyrkagh 00?
(c) Past Tense
d’iu mee, I drank, amp;c. d’ymmyrk mee, I bore, amp;c.
I drank not. thou didst not bear,nbsp;did he bear?nbsp;did we drink?nbsp;did you not drink?nbsp;did they not bear?
Negative: cha d’iu mee.
,, cha d’ymmyrk 00. Interrog.: d’ymmyrk eh?
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;d’iu shin?
Neg. Interrog.: nagh d’iu shiu?
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,, nagh d’ymmyrk ad?
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD Present Tense
Sing. I. iuym. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ymmyrkym.
2 amp; 3. iu 00, eh, ee. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ymmyrk 00, eh, ee.
Plur. I. iueemayd, iumayd. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ymmyrkmayd.
2 amp; 3. iu shiu, ad. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ymmyrk shiu, ad.
The past tense of this mood is exactly the same as the imperfect and conditional in form.
Verbal Noun: iu, g’iu. Participle: iuit, iut.
ymmyrkey, g’ymmyrkey. ymmyrkit.
§ 49. GENERAL RULES FOR THE FORMATION OF VERBAL NOUNS
The bulk of Manx verbs, about 400, form their verbal nouns in ey. STEMnbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;VERBAL NOUN
doon, close. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;dooney, closing.
mill, spoil. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;milley, spoiling.
moyll, praise. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;moylley, praising.
gear, laugh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;gearey, laughing.
When the last vowel of the stem is i preceded by a broad vowel,
-ocr page 95-THE VERB nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;79
the i is usually dropped in the formation of the verbal noun. In many disyllabic stems, if the i is preceded by a consonant, syncopationnbsp;takes place, as;
hwoaill, strike. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;hwoalley, striking.
cooin, help. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;cooney, helping.
feayshil, free. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;feaysley, freeing.
foshil, open. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;fosley, opening.
When the stem ends in a vowel, gh or j is inserted:
aah, ford. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;aahghey, fording.
daah, singe. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;daahjey, singeing.
About 200 verbal nouns terminate in agh, aghey, the first being the colloquial form and the second the literary:
bannee, bless. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;hannaghey.
coyrlee, advise. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;coyrlaghey.
gleash, move. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;gleashaghey.
torghee, torment. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;torghaghey.
Stems which take ee in the imperative mood, usually add agh, aghey, or aghtyn.
About 150 verbal nouns end in al, ail, eil. Verbal nouns in al have the syllables equally accented, but those in ail, eil are alwaysnbsp;accented on the last syllable, ail occurs after a stem containing anbsp;broad vowel, and eil after one containing a slender vowel.
STEM nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;VERBAL NOUN
trog, raise. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;troggal.
faag, leave. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;faagail.
treig, forsake. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;treigeil.
About fifty stems add aght (colloquial), aghtyn (literary). smooinee, think.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;smooinaghtyn.
cooinee, remember. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;cooinaghtyn.
fuirree, wait. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;fuirraghtyn.
About forty stems have the following irregular endings: tyn, ghyn, t, 00, iu, in, ean, yn, ym, and ys.
benn, touch. |
bentyn. |
toill, deserve. |
toilghyn. |
baggyr, threaten. |
baggyrt. |
loayr, speak. |
loayrt. |
eebyr, banish. |
eebyrt. |
skass, stand. |
shassoo. |
faik, see. |
fakin. |
soilshee, enlighten. |
soilshean. |
tuitt, faU. |
tuittym. |
boandyr, nurse. |
boandyrys. |
8o nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ACCIDENCE
About twenty stems take ee, nee, yrnee, eree, eraght, amp;c. These verbs are generally defective, being conjugated by the aid ofnbsp;auxiliaries.
bihhernee, shivering. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;thoreeagh, highway robbing.
branladee, raving. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;frapperaght, crackling.
Some verbs have their verbal nouns like the stem;
aase, grow. iu, drink.nbsp;roie, run.nbsp;snaue, swim.nbsp;brah, betray,nbsp;ceau, throw.nbsp;lhaih, read.nbsp;screen, write.
g aase, growmg. g’iu, drinking.nbsp;roie, running.nbsp;snaue, swimming.nbsp;brah, betraying.nbsp;ceau, throwing.nbsp;lhaih, reading.nbsp;screen, writing.
§ 50. THE AUXILIARY (IRREGULAR) VERB ve, to be
IMPERATIVE MOOD
2nd pers. bee, be thou. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;bee-jee, be ye.
The negative particle is ny. The ist and 3rd persons are formed with the aid of Ihig, let; as Ihig don ve, let me be. Colloquially shinnbsp;is added to the plural form in place oijee.
INDICATIVE MOOD (a) Present Tense—Absolutenbsp;Singular.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Plural,
ta mee, I am. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ta shin, we are.
t’ou [ta 00), thou art. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ta shut, you are.
t’eh {ta eh), he is.
fee {ta ee), she is. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;fad {ta ad), they are.
The synthetic forms taim, I am; tamaid, we are; tadyr, they are; are occasionally met with. Ta shin and ta shiu are sometimes contracted to ta’in and ta’iu.
{b) Present Tense—Dependent fél mee, I am, amp;c.
NEGATIVELY nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;INTERROGATIVELY NEG. INTERROG.
I am not, amp;c. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Am I? S-c.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Am I not? amp;c.
cha nel mee, 00, eh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;vel mee? 00? eh?nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nagh vel mee?
00? eh?
cha nel shin, shiu, ad. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;vel shin? shiu? ad?nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nagh vel shin?
shiu? ad?
The eclipsed form vel is also used with cha, as cha vel mee, I am not.
-ocr page 97-THE VERB nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;8i
(c) Habitual Present Singular.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Plural.
bee’m (beeym), I do be, am accustomed to he, amp;c. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;beemayd.
bee 00, eh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;bee shin, ad.
Negatively: cha bee’m, amp;c. Interrogatively: beem? amp;c. Neg. Interrog.: nagh bee’m ? amp;c. Rel. form: vees.
{d) Imperfect Tense
veign, I used to he, was accustomed to he. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;veagh shin,
veagh 00, eh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;veagh shin, ad.
Negatively: cha beign, amp;c. Interrogatively: beign? amp;c. Neg. Interrog.: nagh beign? amp;c. Rel. form: veagh, amp;c.
(e) Past Tense Absolute.
va shin, va shin.
v’ad (va ad).
va mee {rad. ba), I was, amp;c. v’ou (va oo).nbsp;v’eh (va eh),nbsp;v’ee (va ee).
row shin, row shin, ad.
Dependent.
row mee. row 00 (r’ou), eh.
Negatively: ch.z.rov/mee. See. Interrogatively: tow meet amp;c. Neg. Interrog.: nagh row mee? amp;c.
(ƒ) Future Tense
The future tense has the same form as the habitual present. The following contractions are also found: h’ou for hee oo; hhidee for hee ee.
{g) Secondary Future or Conditional The secondary future or conditional has the same form as thenbsp;imperfect tense.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD Present Tense
dy row mee. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;dy row shin,
dy row oo (dy r’ou), eh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;dy row shiu, ad.
The negative particle for this tense is ny, as Ny Ihig eh feel May God not permit it! God forbid!
Past Tense
dy beign. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;dy beagh shin,
dy beagh oo, eh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;dy beagh shiu, ad.
The negative particle is nar. Colloquially, the negative particles nagh, nar, and ny are used indiscriminately for both the present andnbsp;future tenses.
M
-ocr page 98-82
ACCIDENCE
Verbal Noun ve, being, to be.
§ SI. FULL CONJUGATION OF THE VERB coayl, to lose SIMPLE TENSES—ACTIVE VOICE
IMPERATIVE MOOD
2nd pers. caill, lose thou. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;caiU-jee, lose ye.
Ihig da coayl, let him lose) ny caill, lose not) ny Ihig dou coayl, let me not lose.
INDICATIVE MOOD [a) Present and Future Tensesnbsp;caiUeeym, I lose, amp;c.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;cailleemayd.
caiUee oo, eh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;caiUee shiu, ad.
Negatively: cha gailleeym, amp;c. Interrogatively: gailleeym? amp;c. Neg. Interrog.: nagh gailleeym? amp;c. Rel.: chaiUys.
{b) Imperfect Tense (Conditional, amp;c.) chaillin, I used to lose, amp;c.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;chaiUagh shin,
chaülagh oo, eh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;chaillagh shiu, ad.
Negatively: cha gaillin, amp;c. Interrogatively: gaillin? amp;c. Neg. Interrog.: nagh gaillin? amp;c.
(c) Past Tense
chain mee, I lost, amp;c. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;chaill shin,
chain 00, eh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;chaill shiu, ad.
Negatively: cha chain mee, amp;c. Interrogatively: chain mee? amp;c. Neg. Interrog.: nagh chaill mee? amp;c.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD Present Tense
dy gaülym, if or that I lose, dy gaiU shin. may I lose! amp;c.
dy gain oo, eh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;dy gaül shiu, ad.
Negatively: ny gadljun! may I not lose!
Past Tense
dy gaihin, if I were to lose, dy gaUlagh shin. might I lose! amp;c.
dy gaillagh oo, eh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;dy gaihagh shiu, ad.
Negatively: nar {or nagh) gaihin! might I not lose!
Verbal Noun: coayl. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Participle: cainit, caUt.
-ocr page 99-THE VERB nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;83
COMPOUND TENSES WITH 'VE'
IMPERATIVE MOOD
Second pers., bee coayl, he losing, beejee coayl. Negatively, ny bee coayl.
INDICATIVE MOOD {a) Present Tensenbsp;ta mee coayl, I am losing.
Negatively. cha nel mee coayl.
Interrogative. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Neg. Interrog.
vel mee coayl? nagh vel mee coayl?
Relative. ta coayl.
(amp;) Habitual Present and Future bee’m coayl, 7 am accustomed to lose, I shall he losing.nbsp;Negatively.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Interrogatively.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Neg. Interrog.
cha bee’m coayl. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;bee’m coayl?nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nagh bee’m coayl?
Relative. vees coayl.
(c) Imperfect, Secondary Future or Conditional veign coayl, 7 used to lose, I should lose.
Negatively. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Interrogativelynbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Neg. Interrog.
cha beign coayl. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;beign coayl?nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nagh beign coayl?
Relative. veagh coayl.
{d) Past Tense va mee coayl, 7 was losing.
Negatively. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Interrogatively.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;i^^g- Interrog.
cha row mee coayl. row mee coayl? nagh row mee coayl?
Relative. va coayl.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD Present Tense
Affirmatively, dy row mee coayl. Negatively: ny' row mee coayl.
Past Tense
Affirmatively: dy beign coayl. Negatively: nar' beign coayl. Conjugation with ve and the preposition er or erreish, after.nbsp;Imperative: bee er choayl, have lost.
Hah. Pres., amp;c.: bee’m er choayl, 7 shall have lost, amp;c.
' ny or nar or nagh.
-ocr page 100-84 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ACCIDENCE
Pres. Tense: ta mee er choayl, / have lost.
Imperfect, amp;c.: veign er choayl, I should have lost, amp;c.
Past Tense: va mee er choayl, I had lost.
Conjugation with ve and the preposition er ghee, on the point of, or mysh, about.
Imperative: bee er 9hee coayl, he about to lose.
Hah. Pres., amp;c.: bee’m er ghee coayl, I shall he about to lose, amp;c. Pres. Tense: ta mee er ghee coayl, I am about to lose.
Imperfect, 8cc.:ytiga er ghee coayl, I should be about to lose.
Past Tense: va mee er ghee coayl, I was about to lose.
Conjugation with the irregular verb jannoo.
Imperative: jean coayl, lose or do lose.
Pres, and Put.: nee’m coayl, I shall lose, amp;c.
Imperfect: yinnin coayl, / should lose, amp;c.
Past Tense: ren mee coayl, I did lose. See § 56.
Conjugation with fod.
Pres, and Put.: foddym coayl, / may lose.
Imperfect: oddin coayl, I might lose.
Past Tense: d’od mee coayl, I might lose. See § 62.
PASSIVE VOICE
I.}-
I am lost.
bee caillit, be lost. ta mee caillitnbsp;ta mee er my choaylquot;nbsp;bee’m caillit, I shall be lost, amp;c.nbsp;veign caillit, I should be lost, amp;c.nbsp;va mee caillit, I was lost.
bee er ve caillit, have been lost. ta mee er ve caillit, I have been lost.nbsp;bee’m er ve caillit, I shall have been lost.nbsp;veign er ve caiUit, / should have been lost.nbsp;va mee er ve caillit, I had been lost.
bee er ghee ve caiUit, he about to be lost. ta mee er ghee ve caillit, / am about to be lost.nbsp;bee’m er ghee ve caillit, I shall he about to be lost.nbsp;veign er ghee ve caillit, I should be about to he lost.nbsp;va mee er ghee ve caillit, I was about to he lost.
foddym ve caillit, I may be lost. oddin ve caiUit, I might he lost.nbsp;d’od mee ve caiUit, I might be lost.
• This idiom is used with all tenses in ve
-ocr page 101-THE VERB nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;85
Conjugation with goll. hem er coayl, I shall he lost, amp;c.nbsp;raghin er coayl, I should he lost, amp;c.nbsp;hie mee er coayl, I was lost.
IRREGULAR VERBS
There are ten Irregular Verbs in Manx, including the auxiliary verb ve already given.
§ 52. THE ASSERTIVE VERB she
In Principal Sentences
Present Tense: she, sh', s’. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Relative: sh’, s’.
Past Tense: hy. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Future Tense, obsolete.
Secondary Future or Conditional: by.
Suhjunc. Pres.: {with gy) gura; {with ny) nara.
Subjunc. Past: dy by, dy my.
INDICATIVE MOOD {a) Present Tense—Absolutenbsp;Singular.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Plural.
she mee, I am; or, it is I. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;shenbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;shin, we are; or, it is we.
she 00, thou art; or, it is thou. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;shenbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;shiu, you are; or, it is you.
she eh, he is; or, it is he. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;shenbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ad, they are; or, it is they.
(è) Present Tense—Dependent nee mee (re mee)bnbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nee shin,
nee 00, eh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nee shiu, ad.
Negatively: nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;InterrogativelyNeg. Interrog.:
nagh nee mee?
Past Tense and Conditional
The past tense and conditional are little used in modem Manx. The forms by mee, amp;c., are quite obsolete.
§ S3' CUR, COYRT, to give, put, or bring Principal Parts
Imperative. Future. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Participle.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Verbal Noun.
cur (toyr). nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ver, der.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;currit (toyrit). cur, coyrt (toyrt).
The forms in brackets are obsolete.
IMPERATIVE MOOD Singular.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Plural.
2. cur. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;cur-jee, cur shiu.
' Colloquial.
-ocr page 102-86
ACCIDENCE
INDICATIVE MOOD (a) Present Tense and Futurenbsp;Absolute.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Dependent.
Sing. I. verrym {rad. ber). nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;derrym {for dy ver).
2 amp; 3. ver 00, eh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;der 00, eh.
Plur. I. vermayd. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;dermayd.
2 amp; 3. ver shiu, ad. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;der shiu, ad.
Relative', verrys.
By the ‘Dependent Form’ of the verb is meant that form which is used after the following particles: cha, not; a, an, whethernbsp;(generally understood); nagh, whether . . . not; or who, which, ornbsp;that.. . not; dy, that; ere, where; mannagh {my nagh), unless, if not;nbsp;dy, if; and the relative when governed by a preposition.
(amp;) Imperfect Tense and Conditional Absolute.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Dependent.
verrin. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;derrin.
verragh 00. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;derragh 00.
amp;c., like woaillin (§ 46).
(c) Past Tense
The Past Tense has only one form, hug (absolute), dug (dependent). Chur is sometimes used.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
This mood occurs only in dependent construction.
Present: derrym, der 00, der eh, amp;c.
Past: derrin, derragh 00, derragh eh, amp;c.
Radical Forms: ber, tug. Ver (dy ver); der (d’er); hug (dy hug); dug (d’ug). Formerly the radical forms were preceded by particlesnbsp;which caused aspiration. In modem Manx this particle {dy) hasnbsp;either been lost, as in hug, or has become part of the word, as in d’ug.
Verbal Noun: cur, coyrt. Participle: currit.
§ 54. GRA, to say Principal Parts
Verbal Noun. gra’ (raa).
Imperative. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Future.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Participle.
abbyr. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;jir.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;grait' (rait).
IMPERATIVE MOOD 2. abbjnr.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;abbyr-jee.
* Formed from ec raa.
-ocr page 103-THE VERB nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;87
INDICATIVE MOOD {a) Present and Futurenbsp;Absolute.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Dependent.
I. jirrym. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;yiarrym (abbyr5ma).
2 amp; 3. jir 00, eh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;yiar 00 (abbyr 00), eh.
I. jirmayd. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;yiaraiayd (abbyrmayd).
2 amp; 3. jir shiu, ad. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;yiar shiu (abbyr shiu), ad.
The absolute and dependent constructions are often confused. Relative: jirrys. Affirmative: jir eh.
Negative: cha jir 00, or cha n'iar 00, cha n'abbyr 00.
Interrogative: jir ad? n’abbyr ad?
Neg. Interrog.: nagh jir ad?
{amp;) Imperfect and Conditional Absolute.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Dependent.
I. yiarrin. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;jirrin, yiarrin.
2 amp; 3. yiarragh 00, eh, amp;c. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;jirraghoo, yiarragh 00, eh, amp;c.
Affirmative: yiarrin. Negative: cha n’yiarragh 00.
Interrogative: jirragh eh? Neg. Interrog.: nagh jirragh ad?
(c) Past Tense
Absolute. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Dependent.
dooyrt mee, amp;c. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;dooyrt mee, amp;c.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD Present: jirrym, jir 00, jir eh, amp;c.
Past: jirrin, jirragh 00, jirragh eh, amp;c.
§ 55. FEDDYN, GEDDYN, to get, find Principal Parts
Imperative. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Future.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Participle. Verbal Noun.
feddyn, geddyn.
fow. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;yiow, n’ow. feddynit.
Imperative Mood 2. fow.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;fow-jee.
INDICATIVE MOOD {a) Present and Future
Dependent. fowym (fo'ym).
fow 00 (fow’, fowys, i.e. fow uss), eh.nbsp;fowmayd.nbsp;fow shiu, ad.
Absolute.
yiowym (yio’m, yio’ym, yo’ym). yiow 00 (yiow’), eh.
yiowmayd (yio’mayd).
5now shiu, ad.
Negative: cha vowym, cha nowym. Interrogative: now eh? vow eh?
Neg. Interrog.: nagh now eh? nagh vow eh?
-ocr page 104-88 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ACCIDENCE
[b) Imperfect and Conditional Absolute.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Dependent.
yiowin (yo’in, yio’in). nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;fowin (fo’in).
yiowagh (yio’gh) oo, eh, amp;c. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;fowagh (foghe) oo, eh, amp;c.
Negative', cha vowin (nowin). Interrog.: vowin? nowin? Neg. Interrog.: nagh vowin? (nowin?).
(c) Past Tense
Absolute: hooar. Dependent: dooar (dy-hooar, d’ooar). Radical: fooar.
Subjunctive Mood Present: fowym, fow oo, fow eh, amp;c.
Past: fowin, fowagh oo, fowagh eh, amp;c.
§ 56. JANNOO, to do, make Principal Parts
Imperative. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Future.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Participle. Verbal Noun.
jean. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nee, jean.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;jeant,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;jannoo.
IMPERATIVE MOOD 2. jean.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;jean-jee.
INDICATIVE MOOD (a) Present and Futurenbsp;A bsolute.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Dependent.
I. neeym (nee’m). nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;jeanym.
2 amp; 3. nee 00 (ne’oo), eh. jean 00, eh.
I. neemayd. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;jeanmayd.
2 amp; 3. nee shin, ad. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;jean shin, ad.
(6) Imperfect and Conditional I. yinnin.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;jinnin.
2 amp; 3. yinnagh 00, eh, amp;c. jinnagh 00, eh, amp;c.
(c) Past Tense Absolute and Dependent: ren.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD Present: jeanym, jean 00, jean eh, amp;c.
Past: jinnin, jinnagh 00, jinnagh eh, amp;c.
Imperative.
faik.
Verbal Noun. fakin.
§ 57. FAKIN, to see Principal Partsnbsp;Future.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Participle.
hee, faik. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;fakinit.
-ocr page 105-THE VERB nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;89
IMPERATIVE MOOD 2. faik.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;faik-jee.
INDICATIVE MOOD (a) Present and Futurenbsp;Absolute.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Dependent.
I. heeym (hee’m). nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;faikyui.
2 amp; 3. hee 00, eh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;faik 00, eh.
I. heemayd. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;faikmayd.
2 amp; 3. hee shiu, ad. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;faik shiu, ad.
cha vaikjm (naikym). /«fewg.: vaikoo? (naik?). Neg. Interrog.-, nagh vaik shiu? (naikP).
(6) Imperfect and Conditional
I. heein. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;faikin.
2 amp; 3. heeagh 00, eh, amp;c. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;faikagh 00, eh, amp;c.
Negative-, cha vaikin (n’aikin).
Interrogative-, vaikagh eh? (n’aikagh?).
Neg. Interrog.-, nagh vaikagh ad? (n’aikagh?).
(c) Past Tense
Absolute-, honnick mee, 00, eh, amp;c.
Dependent-, faik mee, 00, eh, amp;c.
It will be noticed that the 2nd and 3rd persons dependent have the same form in the past tense as in the present and future. Thenbsp;context always shows the exact tense intended.
Negative-, cha vaik (n’aik) mee.
Interrogative: vaik (n’aik) 00?
Neg. Interrog.: nagh vaik (n’aik) shin?
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
Present: faikym, faik 00, eh, amp;c.
Past: faikin, faikagh 00, eh, amp;c.
§ 58. CLASHTYN, to hear Principal Partsnbsp;Future.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Participle.
Verbal Noun. clashtyn.
Imperative.
clasht.
cluinit.
cluin.
IMPERATIVE MOOD I. clasht.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;clasht-jee.
N
-ocr page 106-go nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ACCIDENCE
(a) Present and Future
Absolute and Dependent.
Singular. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Plural.
cluinnym, cluinnee oo, eh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;cluinneemayd, cluinnee shiu, ad.
Relative: chluinnys. Negative: cha gluinym.
Interrog.: gluin shiu? Neg. Interrog.: nagh gluin ad?
(b) Imperfect and Conditionalnbsp;Absolute.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Dependent.
I. chluinnin. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;gluinnin.
2 amp; 3. chluinnagh 00, eh, amp;c. gluinnagh 00, eh, amp;c.
(c) Past Tense
I. cheayll (chluin) mee. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;geayll (chluin) mee.
2 amp; 3. cheayll (chluin) 00, eh, amp;c. geayll (chluin) 00, eh, amp;c.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD Present: cluinnym, cluin 00, eh, amp;c.
Past : cluinnin, cluinnagh 00, eh, amp;c.
§ 59. QHEET, to come Principal Parts
Imperative. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Future. Participle. Verbal Noun.
tar, trooid. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;hig.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;(caret.)nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;9heet.
IMPERATIVE MOOD
2. tar {literary)-, trooid {colloquial), tar-jee.
INDICATIVE MOOD {a) Present and Futurenbsp;I.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;higym.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;jigym.
2 amp; 3. hig 00 (heu), eh. jig 00, eh.
I. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;higmayd.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;jigmayd.
2 amp; 3. hig shiu, ad. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;jig shiu, ad.
Radical: fhig. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Relative: (like absolute).
{b) Imperfect and Conditional I.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;harrin.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;darrin.
2 amp; 3. harragh 00, eh, amp;c. darragh 00, eh, amp;c.
(c) Past Tense
Absolute: haink mee, 00, eh, amp;c.
Dependent: daink mee, 00, eh, amp;c.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD Present: jigym, jig 00, eh, amp;c.
Past: darrin, darragh 00, eh, amp;c.
-ocr page 107-91
THE VERB
§ 6o. GOLL, to go
Imperative. immee, gow.
Verbal Noun. goll.
Principal Parts Future.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Participle.
hed. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;(caret.)
IMPERATIVE MOOD
f immee.
immee-jee.
Lgow. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;gow-jee.
Although immee is used as the imperative of this verb, it has a regular conjugation of its own.
Gow is really the imperative of goaill. The old imperative of this verb was ghed.
INDICATIVE MOOD
[a) Present and Future
Dependent. jedym (jem).nbsp;jed 00, eh.
jedmayd (jemmayd). jed shiu, ad.
Absolute.
I. hedym (hem).
2 amp; 3. hed 00, eh.
I. hedmayd (hemmayd).
2 amp; 3. hed shiu, ad.
Radical: ^hed. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Relative: (like absolute).
(b) Imperfect and Conditionalnbsp;Singular.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Plural.
I. raghin (rhoin). nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ragh shin.
2 amp; 3. ragh 00, eh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ragh shiu, ad.
Dependent.
(c) Past Tense
Absolute.
hie mee, 00, eh, amp;c. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;jagh mee, 00, eh, amp;c.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD Present: jedym, jed 00, eh, amp;c.
Past: raghin, ragh 00, eh, amp;c.
The verbal noun goll is a contraction of ec doll.
The adverb er sooyl,' away, is generally used as the participle of this verb.
§ 61. GOAILL, to take
This verb is often included among the irregular verbs, but it is conjugated quite regularly.
Imperative: gow {singular), gow-jee {plural).
Indicative {abs. and dep.): gowym (goym), gowee 00, eh; gowmayd, gowee shiu, ad. Relative: ghowys (ghoys).
• Lit. ‘ before the eye ’; sooyl is the old dat. form of sooill.
-ocr page 108-92 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ACCIDENCE
Imperf. and Cond. \ ghowin (ghoin), ghowagh (ghoghe) oo, eh, amp;c. Past Tense', ghow. Verbal Noun', goaill (gowal).
Participle', goit (gowit).
DEFECTIVE VERBS § 62. FOD, to he able, may, cannbsp;This verb has no imperative mood, verbal noun, or participle.nbsp;INDICATIVE MOOD
(a) Present and Futurenbsp;Absolute.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Dependent.
I. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;foddym.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;voddym, n’odd3mi.
2 amp; 3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;fod, foddee 00, eh.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;vod, n’od 00, eh.
I. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;fodmayd.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;vodmayd, n’odmayd.
2 amp; 3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;fod, foddee shiu, ad.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;vod, n’od shiu, ad.
(b) Imperfect and Conditionalnbsp;I.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;oddin.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;voddin, n’oddin.
2 amp; 3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;oddagh 00, eh, amp;c.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;voddagh 00, eh, amp;c.
(c) Past Tense
Abs. and Dep.: d’od mee, 00, eh, amp;c.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
Present', voddym, vod 00, eh, amp;c.
Past', voddin, voddagh 00, eh, amp;c.
§ 63. JARG, to he able, can
This verb has no imperative mood, verbal noun, or participle, and in modem Manx is mostly used negatively and interrogatively.
INDICATIVE MOOD {a) Present and Futurenbsp;Absolute and Dependent.
Singular. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Plural.
I. jargym. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;jargmayd.
2 amp; 3. jarg 00, eh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;jarg shiu, ad.
(6) Imperfect and Conditional Absolute', yargin, yargagh 00, eh, amp;c.
Dependent', jargin, jargagh 00, eh, amp;c.
(c) Past Tense
Abs. and Dep.'. yarg mee, 00, eh, amp;c.
-ocr page 109-93
THE VERB
§ 64. AS, quoth, say, said,
This verb is used only when the exact words of the speaker are given. (It corresponds exactly with the Latin ‘ inquit ’Er henyihie ’,nbsp;as y dooinney. ‘Thereis the house’, said the man. ‘Quoi shiu hene?’nbsp;as eshyn. ‘Who are you? ’ said he.
§ 65. ER, it seems, it seemed
This verb is always followed by the preposition lesh: as er Ihiam, it seems to me, methinks; or, it seemed to me, methought. Er Ihiu,nbsp;it seems to you. Er lesh y dooinney, it seemed to the man.
It appears so, it appears to me, I imagine, I suppose, methinks, it is my opinion. Strooys shen, that is my opinion.
§ 67. HIOLL, HIOLLEE, might have happened
Might. Haghyr eh ny share na hiollee eh. It happened better than it might have done. Hioll mee, I had like, I had well nigh.
§ 68. DOBBYR, it all hut happened
Dobbyr dou tuittym. It all but happened to me to fall, I had like to fall, I had weU nigh fallen. Dobbyr dou ve marrooit. I wasnbsp;nearly killed.
§ 69. LHIS, should, ought
Singular. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Plural.
Ihisin, / should, amp;c. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Uiisagh shin, we should, amp;c.
Ihisagh 00, eh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ihisagh shiu, ad.
Te ceau, te ceau fliaghey, it rains.
Te ceau sniaghtey, it snows.
Te taarnaghey, it thunders.
Te tendreilagh, it lightens.
Te keeiragh, night falls, it becomes twilight.
Te bodjaley, it gets cloudy.
Te riojey, it freezes.
Te curthoollaghey, it lowers, it looks like rain.
-ocr page 110-94 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ACCIDENCE
Impersonal verbs are very often idiomatically rendered by the phrase ta . . . ayn, there is . . . in.
Ta fliaghey ayn, it rains, there is rain.
Ta sniaghtey ayn, it snows, there is snow.
Ta taarnagh ayn, it thunders, there is thunder.
Ta tendreil ayn, it lightens, there is lightning.
Ta keeiragh ayn, it is twilight.
Ta rio ayn, it freezes, there is frost.
-ocr page 111-CHAPTER V
§ 71. There are not many simple adverbs in Manx, the greater number being made up of two or more words. Almost every Manxnbsp;adjective may become an adverb by having the particle ‘DY’ or ‘GY’nbsp;prefixed to it: as mie, good; dy-mie, well; imlee, humble; dy-imlee,nbsp;humbly.
This dy (modem form) or gy (older form) is really the preposition gy^ with its meaning of ‘ with (Do not confound this word with dy,nbsp;gy meaning ‘to’; they are two distinct prepositions.) Of course thisnbsp;particle has now lost its original meaning in the case of most adverbs.
Adverbs may be compared; their comparative and superlative degrees are, however, those of the adjectives from which they arenbsp;derived; the particle dy is not used before the comparative or superlative.
It may be well to remark here that, when an adjective begins with a vowel, dy prefixes h, as dy-haalin, beautifully. This h, however, isnbsp;not always written or pronounced, and the tendency in modem Manxnbsp;is to omit it and lengthen the vowel in dy. As Se telin for Sa hcelin.
§ 72. The following list may now be regarded as simple adverbs, although many of them are disguised compounds: | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
* This preposition is only used in a few phrases: as meHley dy lieh, a mile and (with) a half; keead dy lieh, a hundred and a half; blein dy lieh er dy henney,nbsp;a year and a half ago. |
96
ACCIDENCE
§ 73. CLASSIFICATION OF ADVERBS
Like adjectives, adverbs may be divided into three main classes Qualitative, Quantitative, and Relative.
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Adverbs of Quality. Most adverbs prefixed by the particlenbsp;dy, as dy-olk, badly; cre-cha, how; cha, so; myr, as, amp;c. (sometimesnbsp;called Adverbs of Manner).
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Adverbs of Quantity.
(a) Degree; feer, bunnys, ro. dy-liooar {enough), con, ny-smoo {more), ny-sloo {less), smoo, sloo, mooarane, amp;c.; eer, veg, m)^: {the),nbsp;cha, nagh {not), amp;c.
(è) Repetition of Time: keayrt, once-, mennick; dy-kinjagh, always, constantly.
3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Adverbs of Relation.
{a) Time: nish, eisht, roie {before),leah. {soon), er-dy-henney {since, ago); 9helleeragh {immediately), arroo-y-jea {the day before yesterday),nbsp;nuyr {the day after to-morrow), arroo-y-riyr {the night before last), nurreenbsp;{last year), mleeaney {eclipsed form of bleeaney, generally misspeltnbsp;my-leeaney), this year. See.
(5) Place and Arrangement: a5ms-shoh, here-, ayns-shen, a}ms-shid, there-, a5ms-shoh-wass, over here, down here-, ayns-shid-hoal, overnbsp;yonder-, gys-shoh, dys-shoh, hither-, gys-shen, thither. Sec.
(c) Cause and Consequence: ere’n-fa, cre’n-oyr, why-, er-y-fa-shen, er-yn-oyr-shen, therefore-, er-y-fa, er-yn-oyr, because. See.
It may be useful to remark here that the words jiu, jea, mairagh, amp;c., are strictly adverbs. He came to-day. Hainkehjiu. He wentnbsp;away yesterday. J'immee eh jea. When the English words arenbsp;nouns, the words yw laa ox yn oie are used before 7w, amp;c. Yesterdaynbsp;was fine. Va’n laa jea braew. To-morrow will be wet. Bee yn laanbsp;mairagh (or laa ny vairagh) fliugh. Last night was cold. Va’n oienbsp;riyr feayr. The day after to-morrow will be my birthday. Bee laa.nbsp;ny nuyr yn laa ruggyree aym.
Ichoud. § 74. Affirmative Adverbs when, tra. where, raad, boayl. how, kys, myr-n’aght, cre’n-aght. why, er-yn-oyr, er-y-fa.nbsp;how farnbsp;how long} |
Interrogative Adverbs cuin, cre’n traa. ere, c’raad, cre’n-raad, cre’n-boayl. kys, cre’n-aght, cre’n-ash. cre’n-oyr, cre’n-fa. cre-choud, caid. |
THE ADVERB nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;97
Affirmative Adverbs nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Interrogative Adverbs
whither, gys. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;cre-gys.
whence, veih, voish, ass. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;cre-veih, cre-voish, cre-ass.
how much quot;I whilleen, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;cre-whilleen, cre-wheesh, cre-
how many J wheesh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;wooad.'
§ 75. EMPHATIC ADVERBS
Several adverbs take an emphatic termination, as nish, nishtagh; reesht, reeshtagh; eisht, eishtagh; foast, foastagh.
§ 76. UP AND DOWN
seose, upwards, motion upwards from the place where the speaker is.
Up-
neese, upwards, motion up from below to the place where the speaker is.
keose, up, above, rest above the place where the speaker is.
wass, up, here, rest where the speaker is.
' sheese, downwards, motion down from where the speaker is.
Down
neose, downwards, motion down from above to where the speaker is.
heese, down, below, rest below the place where the speaker is.
wass, down, here, rest where the speaker is.
§ 77. OVER, IN, AND OUT | ||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||
' Also written c’woad and quoid, lit. ‘ what quantity ’, from mooad, quantity. * In modern Manx harrish is used. |
O
-ocr page 114-98
ACCIDENCE
§ 78. NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, WEST
The root ar means front: eear means hack. The ancients faced the rising sun in naming the points of the compass; hence HAR, east; HEEAR, west; HWOAIE, north; YIASS,nbsp;south. | ||||||||||||||||||||
|
The nouns are yn shiar or yn niar, the east; yn sheear or yn neear, the west; j'W twoaie, the north; ynjiass, the south.
The following compounds are also used: gys y shiar, See., towards the east, amp;c.; gour or lesh y shiar (or niar), amp;c., towards the east, amp;c.
north-east, niar-hwoaie. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The north wind, yn gheay hwoaie.
north-west, neear-hwoaie. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;southnbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;yiass.
south-east, niar-ass. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;eastnbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;niar.
south-west, neear-ass. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;westnbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;neear.
NW. wind, geay neear-hwoaie. SW. wind, geay neear-ass.
§ 79. DAYS OF THE WEEK
Jydoonee, Sunday. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Jycrean, Wednesday.
Jylhein, Monday. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;J’ardain, Thursday.
Jymart, Tuesday. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Jyheiney, Friday.
Jysarn, Saturday.
When used as nouns the prefix jy is often omitted, as Doonaght, Lhcin, Mart, Crean (or Curain), Ardain, Einey, Sarn.
Jy (also spelt Je) is really an old word for day. It occurs in the two expressions7VM, to-day; jea, yesterday. It is now never used exceptnbsp;before the names of the days of the week, and in the two expressionsnbsp;just mentioned.
Jy takes the name of the day in the gen. case, hence Doonaght, Jy-Doonee.
-ocr page 115-99
THE ADVERB
§ 8o. COMPOUND OR PHRASE ADVERBS
I at all. er-ash, back. er-gooyl, backwards, behind. er-heenbsp;er-cor-erbeenbsp;er-lheh, apart, aside.nbsp;er-dy-rieau, from eternity.nbsp;er-eiyrt, in pursuit of.nbsp;er-fload, afloat.nbsp;er-lhiurid, in length.nbsp;er-mayrn, remaining.nbsp;er-oie, by night.nbsp;er-y-chooyl, shortly.nbsp;er-y-ghrunf, aground.nbsp;er-y-vullagh, atop.nbsp;er-coontey, on account.nbsp;er-dy-henney, since, ago.nbsp;er-egin, by force.nbsp;er-fenniu, furiously, fiercely.nbsp;er-jerrey, lastly. er-louyn, on a rope, by hand, along. er-niart, by strength.nbsp;er-y-chione, ahead.nbsp;er-y-gherrit, shortly, lately.nbsp;er-y-fa, er-yn-oyr, because.nbsp;er-ard, aloud, openly, publicly.nbsp;er-sooyl, away. ayns-shoh {-shen, -shid), here, there. dy-bragh, ever.nbsp;choud as, as long as, while.nbsp;moghrey-jiu, amp;c., this morning, amp;c. |
fastyr-jiu, this evening. cre’n-fa, cre'n-oyr, why.nbsp;c’raad, cre’n-boayl, where.nbsp;dy-kinjagh, always.nbsp;veih-my-cheilley, asunder.nbsp;dy-liooar, enough.nbsp;dy-jarroo, indeed.nbsp;arroo-y-jea, the day before yesterday. arroo-y-riyr, the night before last. traa-erbee, whenever. raad-erbee | ^^erever. boayl-erbee )nbsp;ry-lhiattee, aside.nbsp;bun-ry-skyn, topsy-turvy.nbsp;ayns-shoh-wass, over here.nbsp;ayns-shid-hoal, over yonder.nbsp;keayrt-dy-row, once upon a time.nbsp;ec-y-toshiaght, at first.nbsp;dy-cheilley, together.nbsp;ny-keayrtyn, sometimes.nbsp;gheu-heose-sheese, upside down.nbsp;lurg-shohnbsp;ny-yei-shoh )nbsp;ass-y-noa, anew.nbsp;keayrt-ny-ghaa, many a time.nbsp;fy-yerrey, at last.nbsp;fud-y-cheilley, confused.nbsp;myrgeddin, likewise. |
CHAPTER VI
§ 8i. The following list contains the simple prepositions:
ass, out of. ayns, in.
ghymmylt, around. da, to.
dar, by (in swearing). dyn, gyn, without.nbsp;dys, gys, to (motion).nbsp;ec, at.
eddyr, between. er, on.
voish.
fo, under. hug, to (motion).nbsp;jeh, of, off, from.nbsp;lesh, with.nbsp;liorish, by.
mdrish, with (company). mysh, about, concerning.nbsp;risk, to.nbsp;roish, before.nbsp;trooid, through.nbsp;veih, from.
There was formerly another old form of yn, namely syn, which was generally used in the dative case, and its initial letter s is stillnbsp;found forming part of the preposition, as:
ayns yn (in the) |
for |
an older ayn syn |
ass yn (out of the) |
i |
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;a syn. |
(to the) |
y |
jdy syn. |
gys yn) |
[gy syn. | |
harrish yn (over the) |
yy |
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;har shyn. |
lesh yn (with the) |
yy |
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;le shyn. |
liorish yn (by the) |
yy |
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;lior shyn. |
mdrish yn (with the) |
y |
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mar shyn. |
mysh yn (about the) |
y |
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;my shyn. |
rish yn (to the) |
y |
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ry shyn. |
roish yn (before the) |
y |
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ro shyn. |
voish (from the) |
y j |
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;VO shyn. |
It will be noticed that this old form of the article followed the rule Ihean lesh Ihean, keyl lesh keyl. This rule is always strictlynbsp;observed in Manx pronunciation, though it is not always apparentnbsp;in the spelling.
The forms ayn, dy, gy, my, ry, ro are still in use.
-ocr page 117-CHAPTER VII
§ 82. The following is a list of conjunctions.
er yn oyr dy, because. agh, but. a, an, 'n, whether. ga dy, although. until. derrey J cha leak as, as soon as. wish my, my, before. er-yn-oyr-shen V. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;, r 7 therefore. er-y-fa-shen J /oast, yet. |
my, dy, if. mannagh, if . . . not. ny sodjey, moreover.nbsp;myr, as.nbsp;na, than.nbsp;ny, or, nor.nbsp;dy gy, gur, that.nbsp;neayr as, since.nbsp;neayr as nagh, since not.nbsp;h, that . . . not. |
§ 83. PHRASES WITH MYR, as
myr ragh, as not, as like, as would, as were. myr shen, so, like that, in that manner.nbsp;myr shoh, thus, like this.
myr yien, as if it were real, in a pretended manner. myr geddin, the same, also, likewise.
-ocr page 118-CHAPTER VIII
INTERJECTIONS AND INTERJECTIONAL PHRASES
A, 0, Y, O (sign voc. case). Eaisht! Hush! List! Jeeagh! Cur-my-ner! J Nearey ori! Fie! Shame on thee! Failt ort! Ltt , nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;, I tWelcome! Shee aty vea! Slane Ihiat! Good-bye! Bannaght Ihiat! Farewell! Slaynt mie! Good health! Guramieayd! Thanks!nbsp;Narlhigeh Jee! God forbid! Bea veayn dhyt! Long life! Dy voddey heayn y ree ! Long live the king! Oie vie {dhyt, ort)! Good night! Shen nish ! There now! Ah! Oh! Ugh! Oh! S’liooar! Hold! Bastagh! Pity! Er-dty-hoshiaght! Forward! Bee-er-dty-hwoaie! Beware! |
Phyt! Pshaw! Ah treih!^ Ughanee! j-Alas! Aless! J Fuirree! Wait! Patience! .... aboo ! Hurrah for! Dy hannee dhyt! Hail! Dy bishee Jee shiu ! God prosper you! Bee dty host! Silence! Shoh slaynt! Here’s health! Aigh vie Ihiat! Good luck! Dy bannee Jee 00! God bless thee! Dygooin Jeelhien! God help us! Baill veih Jee dhyt! Goodwillnbsp;from God! Dy-jarroo! Indeed! Ouwatta! Ho! brave! Hut! Hut! Out upon thee! Smerg! Woe! Ass-dt’aash! Softly! Drogh ort! Deuce take thee! |
CHAPTER IX
An interesting feature of the Manx language is its wealth of prefixes and suffixes, from which innumerable new words can be formed with facility. The following is a list of the prepositional prefixes:nbsp;a, e (eclipses certain consonants), cair, right; aggair, wrong; trome,nbsp;heavy; eddrym, light.
aa, Lat. re (reiterative), bioghey, enliven; aavioghey, revive; caar-jaghey, make friends; aachaarjaghey, reconcile; cummey, form; aachummey, reform; tuittym, fall; aahuittym, relapse; rheynn,nbsp;divide; aarheynn, subdivide.
aa (intensive), goer, pain; aaghaer, great pain; glenney, clean; aaghlenney, purify.
aa (negative), dowin, deep; aaghowin, shallow.
am. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;hlass, taste; amvlass, an insipid liquid.
an. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;aash, ease; anaash, disquietude; atghim, fear; anatghim, intrepidity; caarjagh, friendly; anchaarjagh, unfriendly; carrey, friend;nbsp;ancharrey, enemy; coodaghey, cover; anchoodaghey, uncover, expose;nbsp;Jee, God; anjee, an atheist.
an (intensive), mian, desire, appetite; anvian, craving; ghiass, heat;
ainjys {anjiass), acquaintance, ar, extreme, end. boayl, spot; arhyl, tail, train,nbsp;a, ass, Lat. ex. faar, presence; assaar, absence; caarjys, friendship;
asschaarjys, enmity; slaynt, health; aslaynt, indisposition.
CO (accompaniment), loayr, speak; coloayr, converse; coloayrtys, conversation; kiangley, binding; cochiangley, league, covenant;nbsp;ghionn, tight; ghionnal, a crowd; cohionnal, a congress; cloie, anbsp;play; cochloie, a match.
CO (equality), cadjin, common; cochadjin, catholic, universal;
co-eirey, a joint heir; co-labree, a fellow-workman.
CO, con, nearly, almost, doo, black; condoo, black and blue marks on the skin with beating or bruising; dorraghey, black; conghor-raghey, rather dark; leayrtys, light; coleayrtys, the evening twilight,nbsp;cooyl, back, behind, caaynt, talk; cooyl-chaaynt, slander; skyrraghtyn,nbsp;slide; cooyl-skyrraghtyn, backslide; cassid, accuse; cooyl-chassid,nbsp;backbite.
do (intensive). bran, sorrow; dobran (usually spelt dobber an), mourning, dy (adverbial), aashagh, easy; dy-aashagh, easily; bio, alive, live;
dy-bio, lively; mie, good; dy-mie, well, dyn, gyn, less, without (gyn is the older and literary form). ourys,nbsp;doubt; gyn-ourys, doubtless; gyn-enn, incognito; loght, guilt; gyn-
-ocr page 120-104 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ACCIDENCE
loght, guiltless; soorit, leavened; gyw-soonV, unleavened; tort, heed; dyn-tort, heedless; hog, little, dyn-veg, blank; fys, knowledge,nbsp;information; dyn-ys, secretly; earroo, number; dyn-earroo, innumerable.
eddyr, Lat, inter, between, kiart, right; edyrchiartagh, an umpire; edyrchiartys, arbitration; ashoonagh, national; edyrashoonagh,nbsp;international.
er, on, -ward, dreeym, back; er-dreeym, backward; aggie, fear; er-aggle, lest; ard, high, loud; er-ard, loudly; bun, foundation; er-bun, durable; cur er-bun, establish; fys, information; er-fys, known;nbsp;toshiaght, beginning; er-hoshiaght, foremost.
er (intensive), reayrt, view; erreayrtagh, conspicuous; reartagh, powerful; erreartagh, illustrious.
erskyn, above, earroo, number; erskyn-earroo, innumerable; insh, telling; erskyn-insh, unspeakable; towse, measure; erskyn-towse,nbsp;immeasurable; tushtey, understanding; erskyn-tushtey, incomprehensible.
far, upper, above, dorrys, a door; fardorrys, a porch; hoalley, a wall; farvoalley, a ceiling.
fo, Lat. sub, under, kiannoort, a governor; fo-chiannoort, a lieutenant-governor; cass, a foot; fo-chosh, subdued; thalloo, earth; fo-halloo, subterranean; laue, a hand; folaue, receipt; bailey, a town; fo-valley, a suburb.
im (reversal), ghaght, coming; immeeaght, departing (im-haght).
im (round about), raa, a saying; imraa, mention, report.
jeh, dis-. moylley, praise; jehvoylley, dispraise.
Ihiass, vice-, sub-, step-, under. Ihiass-eaghtyran, vice-president; Ihiass-voir, stepmother; Ihiass-scrudeyr, an under-secretary.
mar, myr, my, with, sannish, a whisper; myr-hannish, in (or with) a whisper; myr-yien, in or with pretence; jeeas, an ear of com;nbsp;myr-yeish, in ear; blaa, a flower; my-vlaa, in flower.
mee (negative). arrym, respect; meearrym, disrespect; arrys, repentance; meearrys, impenitence; crauee, pious, religious; meechrauee, impious; coardail, agree; meechoardail, disagree; credjue, belief;nbsp;meechredjue, unbelief.
neu (negative), aarloo, ready; neu-aarloo, unready; arryltagh, willing; neuarryltagh, unwilling; creaghnit, complete; neuchreaghnit, incomplete; cummeydagh, competent; neuchummeydagh, incompetent; kyndagh, guilty; neuchyndagh, innocent; farrysthie,nbsp;economy; neufarrysthie, un-economy; shassooagh, consistent;nbsp;neuhassooagh, inconsistent; loobagh, flexible; neuloobagh, inflexible.
ro, too, exceedingly, doillee, difficiüt; ro-ghoillee, incomprehensible; jesh, nice; ro-yesh, finical; mooar, big; ro-vooar, too big; dowin,nbsp;deep; ro-ghowin, too deep.
-ocr page 121-WORD-BUILDING nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;105
ro, before, for (Lat. pro), ro-laue, beforehand; ro-laueys, anticipation, roie, before (Lat. pre). roie-raa, a preface.
ry, with, by. ry-heet, future, to come; ry-lhiattee, aside; ry-hoie, nightly; ry-hoi, for the purpose of; ry-cheilley, together, with eachnbsp;other.
sur, over, super-, smooinaght, thinking; sursmooinaght, consideration, tar, over. Iheim, jump; tarlheim, alight (from a horse); mestey, mix;nbsp;tarmestey, interrupt.
§ 86. SUBSTANTIVE PREFIXES
Here is a list of nouns used as prefixes: ar, east. Ar-Vannin, East Man.
ben, woman, -ess. abh, abbot; ben-abb, abbess; mainstyr, master; ben ainstyr, mistress; jee, a god; ben-jee, a goddess; poosey, marriage;nbsp;ben-phoosee, a bride; ree, a king; ben-rein, a queen,nbsp;bock, he, male, goayr, a goat; bock-goayr, a he-goat.nbsp;bun, foundation, butt-end. fockle, a word; bun-fockle, etymology;
lught, people; bun-lught, aborigines, eear, west. Eear-Vannin, West Man.
fer, man, agent, -er, -or. croo, create,/er-croo, creator; Yn Fer-croo, the Creator; kiaull, music; fer-kiaull (or -kiaullee), a musician;nbsp;Ihee, healing; fer-lhee, a doctor, physician; oik, office; fer-oik, annbsp;officer; reill, rule; fer-reill, a ruler; thie, a housQ¦, fer-thie, goodmannbsp;of the house; ynsagh, learning, teaching; fer-ynsee, teacher,nbsp;kellagh, cock, kellagh-guiy, a gander; kellagh-thunnag, a drake,nbsp;kiare, four, quadru- (the other numbers may be similarly used). cass,nbsp;a foot; kiare-chassagh, quadruped; filley, a fold; kiare-fillagh, fourfold, quadruple; Ihiattee, a side; kiare-lhiattagh, four-sided,nbsp;kiark, hen. kiark-frangagh, a turkey-hen.
kione, kin, head, chief, end. ard, high; kione-ard, arrogant, haughty; graue, a graving; kione-ghraue, an epitaph, title; lajer, strong;nbsp;kione-lajer, headstrongpresence; kionenish, in the presencenbsp;of, before; bailey, a town; kione-valley, a capital (of a country);nbsp;oie, night; kinoie, the end of the night,nbsp;laue, hand, manu-. screen, writing; laue-screeuee, manuscript;nbsp;druiaght, wizardry; laue-ghruiaght, palmistry; keird, art, craft;nbsp;laue-cheird, handicraft.
lught, people, thie, a house; lught-thie, household, family; high, law; lught-leigh, the legal profession; Ihee, healing; lught-lhee, the medicalnbsp;profession; ynsagh, teaching; lught-ynsee, the teaching profession,nbsp;mac, son, copy. Hoar, a book; mac-lioar, a copy of a book; soylaghey,nbsp;compare, match; mac-soyley, a copy; tullagh, a height, hill; mac-tullagh, an echo.
p
-ocr page 122-io6 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ACCIDENCE
mainstyr, master, schoül, a school; mainstyr-schoill, a schoolmaster; Mr. Mac y Chleree, Mr. Clark.
marroo, death. druiaght.vAzzxAry •, marroo-ghruiaght,-atcr:omdJiQ.y, Ihieggey, a fall; marroo-lhieggey, a. perpendicnlsLV fall; stroo, currentnbsp;(of a stream); marroo-stroo, the wake (of a ship).nbsp;mian, desire, mian-bee, appetite for food.
moir, mother, metro-, agglish, church; moir-agglish, a cathedral; arrey, a mill-race; moir-arrey, mill-dam; awin, a river; moir-awin, the source of a river; oyr, a cause; moir-oyr, primarynbsp;cause; ushtey, water; moir-ushtey, a reservoir; bailey, a town;nbsp;moir-valley, a metropolis.
oirr, edge, fheer, country, land; oirr-fheerey, boundary; cruinney, a globe; oirr-cruinney, the horizon,nbsp;ree, king, exceedingly, ghaghter, a messenger; reeghaghter, an ambassador; mie, good; ree-vie, exceedingly good; slat, a rod; ree-lat,nbsp;a sceptre.
sheshey, fellow, mate, sheshey-cloie, a playmate; sheshey-obbree, a work-mate; sheshey-pryssoonagh, a fellow-prisoner,nbsp;thie, house, enclosure, arroo, com; thie-arroo, a granary; cloie, play;nbsp;thie-cloie, a play-house, theatre; keesh, a tax, custom; thie-keesh,nbsp;a custom-house; oast, public hospitality; thie-oast, an inn, hotel;nbsp;thie-mooar, kitchen.
toyrt, gift, giving, booise, thanks; toyrt-booise, thanksgiving; mow, min, waste; toyrt-mow, destruction.
§ 87. ADJECTIVAL PREFIXES
Here is a list of adjectives which are commonly used as prefixes. Almost any adjective may be used in this manner,nbsp;ard, high, arch-, principal, ainle, an angel; ardainle, an archangel;nbsp;aspick, a bishop; ardaspick, archbishop; carrey, a friend; ardcharrey,nbsp;a patron; kied, leave; ardchied, privilege; bailey, a town; ardvalley,nbsp;a city ;yma!ys, wonder; azifywtfys, amazement; Yn Ardlught-ynsee,nbsp;the Council of Education; Yn Ardlught-lhee, the Medical Council;nbsp;Yn Ardlught-coyrle, the Privy Cmmcil; ardchoyrleyder, a membernbsp;of the Privy Council.
bane, white, brynnagh, flattering; bane-brynnagh, fawning; glass, grey; bane-ghlass, pale, wan.
blah, warm, luke-. ghiass, heat, warmth; blah-hiass, lukewarmth. bragh, ever, bio, living; bragh-bio, ever-living,nbsp;breek, speckled, sooill, an eye; breck-sooillagh, wall-eyed,nbsp;cair, right, proper, ortho-, credjue, belief, faith; cair-chredjue, orthodoxy; screen, writing; cair-screeu, orthography,nbsp;cam, crooked, awry, cass, a foot; cam-chassagh, bandy-legged;
-ocr page 123-WORD-BUILDING nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;107
sooül, an eye; cam-hooillagh, squint-eyed; jeeragh, straight; cam-jeeragh, tortuous, zigzag; tayrn, draw; camtayrn, bend or draw a bow; mwannal, a neck; cam-wannallagh, wry-necked,nbsp;cor, odd. Iheim, jump, leap, spring; cor-lheim, skip; fockle, a word;nbsp;corockle, a consonant; soie, a seat; corsoie, leisure; mair, a finger;nbsp;corvair, forefinger; mian, desire; corvian, conceit,nbsp;creoi, hard, stiff, mwannal, a neck; creoi-wannallagh, stiff-necked;nbsp;cree, heart; creoi-chreeagh, hard-hearted; pabyr, paper; creoi-phabyr, cardboard.
croym, crooked, bent, shlingan, the back (between the shoulders); croym-linganagh, humpbacked, having a stoop; sooill, an eye;nbsp;croym-hooillaght, sour looks, a grim visage,nbsp;daa, two. foyr, edge; daa-foyragh, two-edged; gooaght, a vowel;nbsp;daa-ghooaght, a diphthong.
doal, blind, tuittym, a fall; doaltattym, sudden, abrupt.
doo, black, dorraghys, darkness; doo-ghorraghys, gloomy darkness;
ellyn, art, manners; doo-ellyn, vice; doo-hooillagh, black-eyed, dowin, deep, ynsit, learned; dowin-ynsit, proficient, erudite,nbsp;drogh, bad, evil, aigh, fortune, luck; drogh-aigh, ill-luck, misfortune;nbsp;spyrryd, spirit; drogh-spyrryd, evil-spirit, the devil; jannoo, annbsp;act; drogh-yannoo, misdemeanour; drogh-yantagh, an evil-doer,nbsp;malefactor;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;use; drogh-ymmyd, ill-usage, misuse,
eer, feer, very, own. saveenys, slumber; eer-saveenys, lethargy; shuyr, a sister; eer-shuyr, an own sister; mullagh, top, summit; eer-vullagh,nbsp;pinnacle; mie, good;/eez-tife, very good, excellent,nbsp;far, false, clashtyn, hearing; farchlashtyn, eavesdropping; credjue,nbsp;isdüi', farchredjue, heresy; ennym, a name; farennym, a nickname;nbsp;shamyr, a room; farhamyr, a lobby,nbsp;foddey, long, beayn, lasting, enduring; foddey-beayn, long-lived;
seihll, the world, lifetime; foddey-heiltys, longevity, geayr, sharp, cooish, a case, affair; geayr-chooishagh, subtle; shilley,nbsp;sight; geayr-hillagh, sharp-sighted; sooill, an eye; geayr-hooillagh,nbsp;sharp-eyed.
giare, short, cooat, a coat; giare-chooat, a jacket; coonlagh, straw; giare-choonlagh, stubble; cummey, form; giare-chummey, compendium; dooinney, a man; giare-ghooinney, a dwarf; ennal,nbsp;breath; giare-ennallagh, short-winded; fuygh, wood; giare-fuygh,nbsp;brushwood; giare-heiltagh, short-lived,nbsp;glass, pale, glass-sooillagh, grey-eyed; neeal, complexion; glass-neeallagh, pale-complexioned; bane, white; glass-vane, wan.nbsp;glen, clean, quite, sollys, light; glen-sollys, quite bright, full day;nbsp;traartys, destruction; glen-traartys, utter destruction; Ihome, bare;nbsp;glen-lhome, quite bare.
jarroo, true, braar, hiother; jarroo-vraar, an own brother, jeean, earnest, aigney, mind; jeean-aignagh, zealous.
-ocr page 124-io8 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ACCIDENCE
jeih, good, dooinney, a man; jeih-ghooinney, a good man; jantagh, a doer; jeih-yantagh, a benefactor,nbsp;jesh, nice, fockle, a word; jesh-focklagh, eloquent; jesh-laueagh,nbsp;handy, apt; jesh-laueys, handicraft,nbsp;jiarg, red. corree, angry; jiarg-chorree, exceedingly wroth,nbsp;lane, full, per-, lane-eash, full age, maturity; lane-jarrooagh, demonstrate; lane-vie, full well, quite well; soilshey, light; lane-soilshagh,nbsp;resplendent; jeant, done, made; lane-jeant, perfect,nbsp;lhag, slack, loose. Ihag-chHeagh, faint-hearted; lhag-ennal, a gasp;nbsp;taghyrt, a happening; lhag-haghyrt, an accident; slaynt, health;nbsp;lhag-laynt, indisposition; tushtey, understanding; lhag-hushtagh,nbsp;simple, ignorant.
Ihome, bare, naked, cass, a foot; Ihome-choshagh, bare-footed; Ihome-hraariys, utter destruction; Ihome-lane (often corruptednbsp;to lung-lane), bumper, brimful; Ihome-leigh, rigour of the law;nbsp;liastey, lazy; Ihome-liastey, very loath; lomarcan, lone; Ihome-lomarcan, solitary, forlorn; scryss, bark, peel; Ihome-scryssey,nbsp;eradicate.
lieh, half, semi-, cadley, sleep; lieh-chadley, doze; cruinney, a sphere; lieh-chruinney, hemisphere; garaghtee, laugh; lieh-gharaghtee,nbsp;simper; lieh-hooillagh, one-eyed, monocular; Ihie, lie; lieh-lhie,nbsp;loll; lieh-chassagh, one-legged.
mie, good, well, mie-ellynagh, weU-bred, well-mannered; mie-ynsit, well-learned.
moal, slow, moal-chredjuagh, diffident; tnoal-foyragh, blunt; moal-hushtagh, idiotic.
mogh, early, appee, ripe; mogh-appee, precocious; traa, time; moghrey (mogh-f-hraa), morning.
mooar, big, magni-. mooar-aignagh, magnanimous; mooar-chooish, splendour; rheynn, a division; mooar-rheynn, a province; mooar-heer, a continent; mooar-eash, majority,nbsp;myn, small, pusil-. brishey, break; mynvrishey, shatter; broo, bruise;nbsp;mynvroo, hash; myneash, minority; myn-choontey, a minute account;nbsp;clagh, a stone; mynchlagh, a pebble; cooid, goods; mynchooid, pedlary; mynfuygh, underwood; gearey, laugh; mynghearey, smile;nbsp;gaddee, a thief; mynghaddee, filch; taggloo, talk; myn-haggloo,nbsp;mutter; myn-ollee, small cattle.
ooilley, all, omni-, pan-, ooilley-barnaltagh, all-conquering; ooilley-creeney, all-wise; ooilley-fakin, all-seeing; ooilley-fysseragh, allknowing; ooilley-niartal, almighty; ooilley-ynnydagh, omnipresent; ooilley-vannit, all-blessed,nbsp;reih, choice, reih-ghooinney, a chosen man.nbsp;seyr, free, seyr-chreeagh, open-hearted, candid,nbsp;sheer, continual, sheer-ghuee, continual prayer; sheer-chliaghtey,
-ocr page 125-WORD-BUILDING nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;109
continual practice; sheer-lhiantyn, haunt, frequent; sheer-yeear-reeaght, importunity.
shenn, old. shenn-eash, old age, senility; shenn-raa, an adage; shennayr, forefather.
slane, whole, slane-firrinagh, perfectly true; slane-imraa, good-luck;
slane-palfhey, abundance; slane-ynrick, all just, so, good, skeeal, story; sushtal (so-skeeal), gospel; so-chreeagh, tenderhearted.
sou, silly, wrong, keeayll, sense; sou-cheeayll, nonsense, foUy; som-chraueeaght, hypocrisy; sou-chredjue, heterodoxy, trome, heavy, trome-chadlagh, drowsy; trome-chooishagh, important;nbsp;trome-chreeagh, heavy-hearted.
un, one, uni-, un-eairkagh, unicorn; un-laueagh, single-handed.
There are other prefixes which are found in the dictionaries but seldom found in literature. As these are common enough in Irishnbsp;and Scottish they must have formerly existed in Manx, and in factnbsp;compound words are found which contain them, but they are disguised by the orthography. The student is here shown how theynbsp;might be used.
Two useful prefixes are do, difficult to do, and so, easy to do. Here are examples of their use:
geddyn, getting, finding; do-gheddyn, hard to find or get, rare; so-gheddyn, easy to find; fakin, seeing; do-akin, invisible; so-akin,nbsp;visible, easy to see; jannoo, doing; do-yannoo, impracticable; so-yannoo, practicable, easy to do; toiggal, understanding; do-hoiggal,nbsp;incomprehensible, unintelligible; so-hoiggal, intelligible; lostey,nbsp;burning; do-lostey, uninflammable; so-lostey, inflammable; brishey,nbsp;breaking; do-vrishey, unbreakable; so-vrishey, friable, brittle.
Some words beginning with d and s have directly opposite meanings, and are probably old compounds; donnys, bad luck.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;sonnys, good luck.
donney, unlucky. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;sonney, lucky, prosperous.
douyr, uncomfortable, unhappy. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;souyr, comfortable.
deyr, dear, in bondage. doccar, difficult of management.nbsp;doccaragh, hard to manage.
seyr, free, cheap. soccar, easy of management.nbsp;soccaragh, easy to manage, easygoing.
jee (Ir. di), de-, dis-, is found in jeeyl, damage, loss, from haül, prosperity {jee-vaill); also in jymmoose, displeasure, from booie, victory, pleasure {jee-mooie-ys; booie eclipsed); (modem usage) jee-chion-naghey, behead.
yl, many, poly-. (Ir. il.) yl-cheirdee, a jack of all trades; yl-lioar, a book of several volumes.
-ocr page 126-no nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ACCIDENCE
ym, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;many, poly-. (Ir. im.) mooad, a quantity; ymmodee {ym-mooadee), much, many; ym-chroo, multifonn; daah, colour; ym-ciaaAagA,many-coloured; ghengey, a tongue.-,ym-hengagh, polyglot.
yn, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;fit, worthy. (Ir. in.) yn-lhaih, fit to be read, worth reading,nbsp;readable; yn-ee, eatable: yn-ghoaill, fit to be taken; yn-phoosee,nbsp;marriageable; yn-yannoo, fit to be done, worthy of doing; yn-arm,nbsp;fit to carry arms; yn-chowree, worthy of note.
§ 88. SUFFIXES
The following are the principal suffixes used in Manx:
I. Nominal Suffixes-.
(a) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Verbal Nouns:
agh (coUoq.) kionnee, buy; kionnagh, buying, aghey (lit.)nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,, kionnaghey,
aght (coUoq.) smooinee, think; smooinaght, thinking, aghtyn (lit.)nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„ smooinaghtyn, thinking,
ail nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;paart, depart, die; paartail, departing,
al nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;trog, lift; troggal, lifting,
eil nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;treig, forsake; treigeil, forsaking,
ey nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;dooin, close; dooney, closing,
in nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;faik, see; fakin, seeing.
00 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;shass,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;stand; shassoo, standing,
t nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;loayr,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;speak; loayrt, speaking,
tyn nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ihian,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;adhere; Ihiantyn, adhering,
ym nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;tuitt, fall; tuittym, falling,
yn nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;jeeagh, look; jeeaghyn, looking.
(b) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;From Adjectives: (diminutive and abstract)
ag (f.) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;doo, black; dooag, a black animal.
aghee (m.) shenn, old; shennaghee, a reciter of the old heroic tales.
aght (f.) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;cruinn, round; cruinnaght, an assembly.
an (m.) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;beg, little; beggan, too little.
ane (m.) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mooar, big; mooarane, much.
ey (f.) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;firrinagh, true; firriney, truth.
id (f.) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;trome,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;heavy; trimmid, weight.
shey (f.) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,, trimshey, sorrow.
ys (m.) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ghing, sick; ghingys, sickness.
(c) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;From Nouns: (diminutive, abstract, and agent)
ag (f.) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;bass, palm (of the hand); bassag, a box (with the palm).
age (f.) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;goal, a fork, bow; gollage, an earwig (also a table-fork).
aght (f.) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ghaghter, a messenger; ghaghteraght, a message,
an (m.) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;cronk, a hill; crongan, a hillock,
ane (m.) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;kiaull, music; kiaullane, a hand-beU.
ar (m.) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;banc, a bank; bancar, a banker.
-ocr page 127-WORD-BUILDING nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;iii
een (m.) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;breag, a lie; hreageen, a fib.
er (m.) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;dorrys, a door; dorryser, a doorkeeper,
erey (m.) hreag, a lie; hreagerey, a liar, eyder (m.) kiaull, music; kiaulleyder, a musician,nbsp;eyr (m.)nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;luss, a herb; losseyr, a herbalist,
lin (m.) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mooir, sea; mooirlin, a sea-basket,
tar (m.) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;hlaa, a flower; blaatar, floweriness of speech,
ys (m.) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;noid, a foe; noidys, enmity.
From Nouns: (collective and reiterative) aghteenbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;cassaghtee, coughing.
ernee, yrnee nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;bihbernee, shivering; gluggemee, gurgling; shutternee,
neighing; jeestyrnee, creaking; streighyrnee, sneezing; gounstyrnee, barking.
intys nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;claggintys, ringing (church-bell); dag, a bell,
lagh nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mudagh, piggery, pigsty; muc, a pig.
lee nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;eeanlee, fowls of the air; eean, a bird,
raght nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;daggeraght, babbling; dag, a beU; frapperaght, crack
ling; frap, a crack; streighraght, sneezing; gounsty-raght, barking.
The roots of many of these reiterative verbal nouns are obscure, and are probably onomatopoetic. They usually imply a continuednbsp;action, as gearey, laughing; garaghtee, continuing laughing.
{d) From Verbs:
ee nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;buinn, reap; beaynee, a reaper.
dagh nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ynsee, teach; ynseydagh, a student, pupil.
der nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,, ynseyder, a teacher.
deyr nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;screen, write; scrudeyr, a writer.
deyrys nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;scrudeyrys, penmanship.
oor nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;preafh, preach; preaghoor, a preacher.
teyr nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;moll, deceive; molteyr, a deceiver.
teyrys nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,, moUeyrys, deceit.
tys nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;toyr, give; toyrtys, a gift (from verbal noun toyrt).
2. Adjectival Suffixes'.
{a) From Verbs:
it, jey, t nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;moyll, praise; woyfZff,praised; caill, lose; cailjey, lost;
dooin, close; doont, closed.
(amp;) From Numerals:
00 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;kiare, four; kiarroo, fourth.
(c) From Nouns:
agh nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ardvalley, city; ardvaljagh, civic,
al nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;niari, strength; niartal, strong.
-ocr page 128-
II2 |
ACCIDENCE |
ar |
leagh, price; leaghar, valuable. |
ey |
airh, gold; airhey, golden. |
oil |
thie, a house; thieoil, domestic. |
[d) From Adjectives: | |
id |
aalin, beautiful; aalid, beauty. |
yr |
bio, live; bioyr, lively. |
(e) From Prepositions;
1 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;heose, up; ooasle, noble.
1 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;heese, down; injil, low (Old Manx, ishil).
3. Verbal Suffixes'.
agh loayr, speak; loayragh, would speak.
ee
in
ins
raayd
mainyn
ym
yms
ys
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;loayree, will speak.
loayrin, I should speak, (emphatic form of in).nbsp;loayrmayd, we should speak,nbsp;(emphatic form of mayd).nbsp;loayrym, I shall speak,nbsp;(emphatic form oiym).nbsp;loayrys (relative form).
4. Prepositional Suffixes'.
ee (emph. eeish) eu, iu (emph. euish)nbsp;in (emph. inyn)
00, ou (emph. oosyn) yd (emph. yds)nbsp;ym (emph. yms)
har, over; harree, over her.
harriu, over you. harrin, over us.nbsp;karroo, over them.nbsp;harryd, over thee.nbsp;harrym, over me.
5. Emphatic Nouns:
s laue, a hand; my laues, my hand, snbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;dty laues, thy hand,
syn nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;e lauesyn, his hand,
ish nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;e laueish, her hand,
nyn ,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ny lauenyn, our hand,
ish nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nyn laueish, yovLT hand.
syn ,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nyn lauesyn, their hand.
These emphatic forms of the nouns after the possessive adjectives are common in old literature, notably in the carvals and in Bishopnbsp;Phillips’s translation of the Prayer Book, but in modem Manx, withnbsp;the exception of the first and second person singular, they arenbsp;obsolete.
-ocr page 129-WORD-BUILDING nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;113
Notes on some of the Suffixes
agh, when it is the termination of an adjective, means ‘full of, abounding in ’: clagh, a stone; claghagh, stony, agh, when it is the termination of a noim, denotes a person or personalnbsp;agent, as Mannin, Man; Manninagh, a Manxman; Sosiyn,nbsp;England; Sosinagh, an Englishman,nbsp;aght is an abstract termination, like the English -dom: creeney, wise;nbsp;creenaght, wisdom.
ee is a personal termination denoting an agent: cass, a foot; coshee, a pedestrian; obbyr, work; obbree, a mechanic,nbsp;eyr and erey are personal terminations denoting an agent: kialg,nbsp;deceit; kialgeyr, a deceiver; coag, cook; coagerey, a cook,nbsp;oil, a termination having the same force as the English -like or -ly:
moddey, a dog; moddoil, caninea prince; flahoil, princely, ys, an abstract termination like the English -ness: mie, good; mieys,nbsp;goodness.
ey is an adjectival termination, but not very common: grayn, hatred; grayney, hateful.
id is usually added to an adjective to form an abstract noun, and is equivalent to the English -ness: millish, sweet; miljid, sweetness;nbsp;gial, bright (white); gillid, whiteness.
§ 89. DIMINUTIVES
There are three diminutive suffixes or terminations in Manx, viz., in or een, an or ane, ag or age. Words ending in in, an, or agnbsp;are accented on the first syllable, and words ending in een, ane, or agenbsp;are accented on the second syllable. In many cases these diminutives, with the exception of een, have lost their force, and now simplynbsp;imply something which bears a relationship to the root-word. Evennbsp;the root-word has disappeared in many instances, and the diminutive form has taken its place.
in, the following are true diminutives: perkin, a porpoise (Lat. poreus, Fr. pore, a pig); kibbin, a skewer {Map, a block, stump);nbsp;napin, turnip (OE. knap, a knob); blebbin, a simpleton {pleb, anbsp;fool). These have lost their diminutive sense: kerrin, a square,nbsp;pane {Mare, four); briggin, a speckled animal {breek, speckled);nbsp;eruitin, a hunchback {eruit, a hump); sMaghtin, a week {sMaght,nbsp;seven).
een, the true diminutives are dooinneen, a pigmy {dooinney, a man); eayneen, a lambkin {eayn, a lamb); eruineen, a bubble, globulenbsp;{cruin, round); bineen, a tiny drop {bine, a drop); eluigeen, a jewelnbsp;{elag, a bell); ereggeen, a little rock {ereg, a rock). The following havenbsp;lost their diminutive force: doarneen, a handle, hilt {doarn, fist);
Q
-ocr page 130-114 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ACCIDENCE
roosteen, a naked person (roost, stripped); stroineen, a ring for a pig’s nose (stroin, a nose); gliooneen, a garter (glioon, knee).
an, the true diminutives are laggan, a dimple (lag, a hollow); glionnan, a ravine (glion, a glen); paalan, a tent (^aal, a pavihon); tooran, anbsp;small stack, a midden (poor, a tower); treoghan, an orphan (treogh,nbsp;widowed); lioaran, a pamphlet (Hoar, a book); loghan, a lakelet,nbsp;pool (logh, a lake); altan, a brook (alt, a mountain stream); babban,nbsp;a doll (bab, a babe); bolgan, a blister (bolg, a belly); dossan, a sprignbsp;(doss, a bunch, cluster); crongan, a hillock (cronk, a hill).
The following are no longer diminutives; bouyran, a blockhead (bouyr, deaf).nbsp;buighan, the yolk of an egg (buigh, yellow).nbsp;caignan, a rasp, file (caign, chew).nbsp;cappan, a cup (cap, a cup).nbsp;cassan, a path (cass, a foot).nbsp;claghan, stone steps over a stream (clagh, a stone).nbsp;craughan, a file, rasp (crane, a bone).nbsp;creggan, a rocky hill (creg, a rock).nbsp;crossan, coral (crosh, a cross).
doalan, the blind person (in blind man’s bufi) (doal, blind). dooan, a fish-hook (doo, black).
eaghtyran, a superior, president (eaghtyr, surface, top).
eairkan, a lapwing (bird) (eairk, a horn).
fynnican, the white of an egg (fynn, white).
gialan, white of the eye (gial, bright white).
glassan, salad (glass, green).
goayran, a clown (goayr, a goat).
gollan, a fork (goal, a fork, bow, arch).
jargan, a flea (jiarg, red).
kionnan, a lump, quantity (kione, a head).
lauraghan, a handle {lane, a hand).
Ihiannan, a follower (Ihian, follow).
lomman, a scorching wind (Ihome, bare).
lossan, a flame (loss, burn).
marrooan, the margin of a book (marroo, dead).
scaan, a mirror (scaa, shadow, reflection).
skeaban, a brush (skeab, a besom).
skian, a wing (skia, a wing).
slattan, a mallet to beat linen or yam (slat, a rod).
sluggan, a whirlpool (slug, swallow).
snauan, a float (for a fishing-line) (snaue, swim).
soiagan, a cushion (soie, sit).
strooan, a stream (stroo, current of a stream).
-ocr page 131-WORD-BUILDING nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;115
ane. The following end in ane and are accented on the second syllable:
bolgane, the calf of the leg, a muscle {bolg, a belly).
bolvane, an idiot (balloo, dumb).
calmane, a pigeon, dove {calm, a dove).
carnane, a heap (esp. of stones), a stony hill {cam, a heap).
croagane, a hook {croag, a claw).
croanane, a thicket {croan, a tree, bush).
farrane, a fountain {feayr, cold).
fluighane, a champignon {fluigh, wet).
freoaghane, a blaeberry {freoagh, heather, heath).
jialgane, a goad {jialg, a thorn),
mairane, a thimble {mair, a finger).
reeastane, a wild, barren heath {recast, uncultivated mountain land). snieuane, a gossamer {sneeu, spin).
ag. The following diminutives are syllable: broddag, a bodkin {brod, a stab). buitag, a short furrow {butt, anbsp;heap). cadlag, an animal that sleeps in the winter {caddil, sleep).nbsp;cammag, a hockey stick {cam,nbsp;crooked). casag, a curl {cas, twist). craitnag, a bat {crackan, skin).nbsp;cronnag, a desk {croan, a tree).nbsp;croshag, a charm by the sign of thenbsp;cross {crash, a cross).nbsp;crossag, a small bridge {cross, tonbsp;cross). cruinag, crown of a hat {cruin, round). donnag, a brown animal {dhone, brown). dooag, a black animal {doo, black). |
in ag and are accented on the first dromag, a horse’s back-band {dreeym, back). dronnag, a hump on a hill {dron, hmnp). duillag, a leaf {duilley, a leaf). fynnag, whiting (fish) {fynn, white). gialag, a white animal {gial, white). glassag, a sod rampart {glass, green). gobbag, a dog-fish {gob, a mouth). minniag, a pinch {myn, little). mollag, a dogskin bag {mol, a bag). pronnag,a.sausage {pron, tostulf). slattag, an accent {slat, a rod). soiag, a seat {sole, sit). sooillag, an eyelet {sooill, an eye). |
age. The following end in age, amp;c.: carrage, a small black beetle {keeir, dark grey or black); cuilleig, a nook, cupboard {cuill ornbsp;cooill, a comer); doomage, a mitt {doom, a fist); beishteig, an insectnbsp;{beisht, a monster); fraueig, a fibre (Jraue, a root); kinneig, anbsp;particle, bit {kione, the head).
-ocr page 132-
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
friends). |
WORD-BUILDING fheeroil, social. fhennoil, fiery, hot. creeoil, hearty. ennymoil, renowned, celebrated. feroil, manly.nbsp;flahoil, princely, generous.nbsp;gray noil, horrid.nbsp;jeeoil, godly, divine.nbsp;laaoil, daily, diurnal.nbsp;modoil, orderly.nbsp;recoil, kingly, royal.nbsp;sheeoil, peaceful. ar, yr, ey. A very small class ends in ar, ey, or yr. The following almost exhaust the list, and some of them are rarely found: NOUN fheer, land, country. ghenney, fire. cree, heart.nbsp;ennym, name.nbsp;fer, a man, one.nbsp;flah, prince.nbsp;grayn, horror.nbsp;jee, god.nbsp;laa, day.nbsp;mod, order.nbsp;ree, king.nbsp;shee, peace. aigh, luck. airh, gold. bio, live, living. dooinney, man (pi. deiney). grayn, horror. leagh, price, value. Ikieen, number. loo, activity. (a) Verbs derived from Nouns: NOUN bannaght, blessing. bass, palm (of hand).nbsp;bea, lifetime.nbsp;bee, food.nbsp;blaa, flower.nbsp;cowrey, sign.nbsp;eeast, fish.nbsp;ennym, name.nbsp;gortey, famine.nbsp;laad, load.nbsp;laboraght, labour.nbsp;mark, horse.nbsp;niart, strength.nbsp;obbyr, work.nbsp;osney, sigh.nbsp;poodyr, powder.nbsp;sollys, light.nbsp;taarnagh, thunder. |
117 ADJECTIVE country-like, homely. aighar, lucky. air hey, golden.nbsp;bioyr, lively, brisk.nbsp;deiney, human.nbsp;graney, horrible.nbsp;leaghar, valuable. Ihieenar, numerous, abundant. looyr, active, nimble. VERB (stem) bannee, bless.nbsp;bassee, clap (hands).nbsp;baghee, live.nbsp;beaghee, feed.nbsp;blaaghee, flower.nbsp;cowree, signal.nbsp;eeasiee, fish.nbsp;enmee, name.nbsp;gortee, hurt.nbsp;laadee, load.nbsp;labree, labour.nbsp;markee, ride.nbsp;niartee, strengthen.nbsp;obbree, work.nbsp;osnee, sigh.nbsp;poodree, powder.nbsp;soilshee, light.nbsp;taarnee, thunder. |
(b) Verbs derived from ADJECTIVEnbsp;ard, high.nbsp;bane, white.nbsp;beayn, eternal.nbsp;bouyr, deaf.nbsp;fhirrym, dry.nbsp;coon, narrow.nbsp;doo, black.nbsp;feayr, cold.nbsp;fluigh, wet.nbsp;injil, low.
Mart, right. lag, slack.
Ihean, wide. mooar, big.nbsp;myn, small, fine.nbsp;slane, whole.
ACCIDENCE Adjectives:
VERB (stem) yrjee, hft, raise.nbsp;banee, whiten.nbsp;beaynee, prolong.nbsp;bouyree, deafen.nbsp;ghirmee, dry.nbsp;coonee, narrow.nbsp;dooghee, blacken.nbsp;feayree, cool.nbsp;fluighee, wet.nbsp;injillee, lower.
Martee, rectify. laggee, slacken.
Iheanee, widen, dilate. mooaree, begrudge.nbsp;mynee, mince, explain.nbsp;slanee, heal.
-ocr page 135-CHAPTER I
§ 91. In Manx one noun governs another in the genitive case, and the governed noun comes after the governing one:
a horse’s head, a head of a horse,nbsp;a foot of the horse,nbsp;the horse’s head,nbsp;the head of the horse,nbsp;the foot of a horse.
genitive noun must be aspirated if
kione chabbil. kione jeh cabbyl.nbsp;cass jeh’n chabbyl.nbsp;kione y chabbil.nbsp;yn kione jeh’n chabbyl.nbsp;yn chass jeh cabbyl.
The initial consonant of a possible.
In colloquial Manx the nom. case is often used in place of the genitive, as kione chabbyl.
When the article or demonstrative adjective {yn) precedes the governing noun, the preposition jeh must precede the governed one:
Yn kione jeh’n chabbyl, or
Kione y chabbil, not
Yn kione yn chabbil.
The latter construction is quite inadmissible.
If the two nouns form a compound word, the article is used before the first: pabyr-naight, a newspaper; ynpabyr-naight, the newspaper.
In the following English phrases the analytic genitive is usual— ‘the taste of bread’, ‘the smell of fish’. In Manx the syntheticnbsp;genitive is commonly employed—‘blayst arran’, ‘soar eeast’.
If a nominative be followed by several genitives the article can be used only with the last (if ‘the’ be used in English), as, trimmidnbsp;chione yn chabbil, the weight of the horse’s head; but literally, thenbsp;horse’s head’s weight.
Strictly, the genitive of kione {king) should be employed here, but it is rarely found.
When the governed noun in the genitive is a proper name it is aspirated.
Penn Voirrey, Mary’s pen. Lioar Yuan, John’s book.
-ocr page 136-120 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;SYNTAX
A noun may be used adjectively in Manx, the initial consonant being aspirated as if it were a simple adjective:
ooh-chiark, a hen’s egg.
fainney-airh, a gold ring.
meinn-chorkey, oatmeal.
Collective nouns (except in their own plurals) take a singular article:
Yn ^heshaght Ghailckagh, The Manx Language Society.
Ta’n sleih gheet, the people are coming.
Va’n ollagh ayns y vagher, the cattle were in the field.
Exception : feallagh usually takes a plural article. Ny feallagh, the
ones, the folk or people.
Collective nouns take the qualif5dng adjective in the plural: ny feallagh vooarey, the big ones.nbsp;yn vooinjer veggey, the little ones.
Exception : sheshaght vooar, a big company.
Nouns denoting fullness or part of anything are usually followed by the prepositions dy or jeh.
Dy is used without the article, as: lane dy hollan, full of salt.nbsp;punt dy hooylyn, a pound of apples.
Definite and indefinite numeral nouns are followed by dy: jees dy chabbil, a couple of horses.nbsp;iroor dy vraane, a trio of women.nbsp;kiare dy gheiney, four men.nbsp;tree feed as jeih dy chirree, seventy sheep.nbsp;quoid dy laghyn? how many days?nbsp;ny-smoo dy lioaryn, more books.nbsp;vel veg dy argid eu? have you any money?nbsp;ta paart d’airh aym, I have some gold.
Jeh is employed with the article, as:
Unnane jeh ny rollageyn, one of the stars.
D’iu eh lane chappan jeh’n ushtey feayr, he drank a cupful of the cold water.
The genitive is often employed to denote the part of anything: trie my vraagey (colloq. vraag), the sole of my shoe.nbsp;lane e ghoarn, the full of his fist.nbsp;mullagh y thie, the roof of the house.
In phrases such as ‘some of us’, ‘one of them’, amp;c., ‘of us’, ‘of them’, amp;c., are usually translated by ain, oc, amp;c., or jin, jeu, amp;c.
-ocr page 137-THE NOUN nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;I2I
Cha duitt wheesh renaig jeh kione unnane eu, there shall not a hair fall from the head of one of you.
Hooar paart jeu baase, some of them died.
§ 92. EXAMPLES OF THE GENITIVE CASE
Poyll Vaaish, the Pool of Death (Poolvash, p.n.). kione chiyt, a cat’s head, the shell-fish sea-urchin.nbsp;mwannal chabbil, a horse’s neck.nbsp;slat-sooisht, a flail-handle.
Balley-Chruink, Hill Farm (p.n.).
folt y ching, the hair of the head.
rollage y Voddee, the Dog Star, Sirius.
snaie resh, the thread of seed, the vital thread.
cron Ihuingey, a ship’s mast.
laa banshey, a wedding day.
stoyl-coshey, a footstool.
skell-greiney, a simbeam.
Balley-Drommey, Back Farm (p.n.). ben-varrey, a mermadi, sea-woman.nbsp;cooid-ronney, a dividend, goods of division.nbsp;cassan-ny-greiney, the zodiac, path of the sun.nbsp;oirr-ny-marrey, the sea-coast, seaside.
Laa Souney, HoUantide Day.
messyn y thallooin, the fruits of the earth.
§ 93. THE GENITIVE PLURAL
The plural article {ny) eclipses the initial consonant of a following noun in the genitive case:
Close ny dark, the Close of the Hens.
In later Manx this became Close ny Giarkyn, and in the colloquial Manx of the present day. Close ny Kiarkyn.
Although eclipsis is still found, this old plural genitive has become obsolete, and is generally found in place-names, or set phrases.
Examples
Rehollys vooar ny gabbyl, the great moonlight of the horses. (See Cregeen’s Dictionary, 2nded., p. 153.)nbsp;kerroo ny gronk, the quarterland of the hiUs (p.n.).nbsp;magher ny grongan, the field of the hillocks (p.n.).nbsp;ooig ny seyir, the cave of the carpenters (p.n.).nbsp;gob ny voillan, the promontory of the gulls (p.n.).nbsp;creg ny mollan, the rock of the carps (p.n.).nbsp;burroo ny nedd, the hillfort of the nests (p.n.).
-ocr page 138-122 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;SYNTAX
croit ny grooag, the croft of the worms (p.n.). ollan ny keyrragh, the wool of the sheep (sing.).nbsp;bwoaillee ny geyrragh, the fold of the sheep (plur.).nbsp;faiyr y vagheragh, the grass of the field or fields.nbsp;thie ny moght, the house of the poor (people).nbsp;ynnyd ny maase, the place of the deaths.
§ 94. THE GENITIVE AFTER PREPOSITIONS
gour y ghib, towards the mouth or beak. gour y ching, towards the head, headlong.nbsp;my yeish, in ear (com).
car y touree, through the summer, all summer. fud ny hoie, through the night, all night.
§ 95. THE DATIVE AFTER PREPOSITIONS
er y chosh, on foot, out of bed. fo chosh, under foot, subdued.nbsp;ry chosh, rish y chosh, by foot.
§ 96. TIME
The hour of the day is expressed as follows: nane er y chlag, i o’clock, lit., one on the clock.nbsp;queig minnidyn lurg nane, 5 minutes past (after) one.nbsp;kerroo-oor lurg nane, a quarter-past one, lit., a J hr. after one.nbsp;lieh-oor lurg nane, half-past one.nbsp;queig minnidyn as feed dys jees, 25 minutes to two.nbsp;kerroo-oor dys jees, a quarter to two.
lieh-oor lurg munlaa, half-past twelve (a | hr. after noon or midday). lieh-oor lurg meanoie, half-past twelve, midnight.nbsp;voish jeih er y chlag ’sy voghrey dys jeih er y chlag ’syn astyr, fromnbsp;10 a.m. to 10 p.m. (from ten o’clock in the morning to ten o’clocknbsp;in the evening).
moghrey jea, moghrey jiu, as moghrey mairagh ec nuy er y chlag, yesterday morning, this morning, and to-morrow morning at ninenbsp;o’clock.
fastyr jiu ec hoght er y chlag, this evening at eight o’clock. jiu ec munlaa, to-day at twelve o’clock.nbsp;noght ec meanoie, to-night at twelve o’clock.
-ocr page 139-CHAPTER II
§ 97. An adjective may be used either predicatively or attribu-tively. An adjective is used predicatively when it is predicated of a noun by a verb, and in this case it is usually separated from the nounnbsp;by the verb. ‘The road is long.’ ‘The weather was cold.’ ‘The daynbsp;is fine.’ ‘ He made the coat short.’ ‘ Long ’, ‘ cold ’, ‘ fine ’, and ‘ short ’nbsp;are used predicatively. An adjective is used attributively whenevernbsp;it is not separated from the noun by the verb, and is not predicatednbsp;of a noun by a verb, as ‘ This is a long road. ’ ‘ It is a cold day.’ Thenbsp;adjectives ‘long’, ‘cold’, are here used attributively.
In Manx almost every common adjective can be used both predicatively and attributively. There are, however, one or twonbsp;exceptions: drogh, bad, and jeih, good, can never be used predicatively. If ‘bad’ or ‘good’ be used predicatively, we must use thenbsp;words oik, bad, and mie, good. The adjectives drogh sudjeih alwaysnbsp;precede the noun.
Examples
drogh ghooinney, a bad man.
ta’n dooinney oik, the man is bad.
jeih ghooinney, a good man.
ta'n dooinney mie, the man is good.
We can also use oik and mie attributively: dooinney mie, a good man; dooinney oik, a bad man.
The adjective immey (many) is always used predicatively with she, written shimmey; shimmey (or sh’immey) oie, ’tis many a night.
§ 98. ADJECTIVE USED ATTRIBUTIVELY
{a) The Position of the Adjective
As a general rule the adjective follows its noun in Manx, as Hoar vooar, a big book; dooinney beg, a little man.
Exceptions: (i) A numeral adjective, whether ordinal or cardinal, when it consists of one word, always precedes its noun: as treenbsp;moddee, three dogs; daa chiark, two hens. The interrogative, possessive, and most of the partitive pronouns, when used adjectively,nbsp;precede their noun.
(2) Monosyllabic adjectives are frequently placed before the noun, but then the noun and adjective form a compound noun, and consequently the initial of the noun is aspirated, when possible. This isnbsp;always the case with the adjectives good; drogh, bad; shenn.
-ocr page 140-124 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;SYNTAX
old; and frequently with ard, high; giare, short; lhag, slack, and a few others.
Examples
jeih-ven, a good woman. drogh-yantagh, an evil-doer, malefactor.nbsp;shenn-thie, an old house, shanty.nbsp;ard-ree, a high or chief king.nbsp;giare-ghooinney, a short man, dwarf.
Ihag-la5nit, slack or ill health, indisposition.
There is frequently a difference in meaning between adjectives preceding or following:
ard-valley, a city, a principal bailey ard, a town in a high or town.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;lofty position.
mooar-fheer, a continent. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;gheer vooar, a big country.
mooar-rheynn, a province. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;rheynn vooar, a large portion.
The article always precedes its noun, and agrees with it in gender, number, and case:
yn kione, the head. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;y ching, of the head.
yn cheyll, the grove. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ny keylley, of the grove.
The demonstrative adjectives shoh, shen, and shid follow the norm, but the noun must be preceded by the article, as ta’n thie shen mynbsp;charrey ry chreck, that house of my friend is for sale.
This also applies to the pronominal prepositions aym, ayd, amp;c., when used as demonstrative adjectives, as yn thie aym as yn thienbsp;ayd, my house and yours.
(1) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The article is used before the names of some countries, as ynbsp;Spaainey, Spain; yn Rank {Frank), France; yn Raue, Rome; ’« Erin,nbsp;Ireland; ’n Albin, Scotland; yw Thalloo Bretnagh, Wales. The articlenbsp;is not used before Bretin, Britain; Sostyn, England; Mannin, Man.
(2) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;It is frequently used before abstract nouns, as tra hig yn baasenbsp;dy ghoaill 00, when death comes to take thee.
(3) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Before adjectives used as noims: yn mie as yn sie, the good andnbsp;the bad, i.e. goodness and badness; share Ihiam yn gorm na’n jiarg,nbsp;I prefer blue to red.
(4) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;After quoi, which; and ere, what:
Quoi’n dooinney? Quoi ny deiney?nbsp;Cre’n Hoar?
Cre ny Hoaryn? (5) To translatenbsp;weight or measure:
Which man?
Which men?
What book?
What books?
apiece’, ‘per’, or ‘a’ before words expressing
-ocr page 141-THE ADJECTIVE nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;125
Ihig da daa chooaty pheeshy ve eu, have two coats apiece (or each). kiare pingyn yn trie, fourpence a foot.nbsp;skillin y tuhhag, a shilling per bushel.nbsp;keayrt ‘sy vlein, once a (in the) year.
(6) The article is used before the word denoting the use to which a thing is put:
cruishtin yn ushtey, the water-jug. kurn y vainney, the milk-can.
(6) Agreement of the Adjective
When an adjective is used attributively and follows its noun, it agrees with the noun in gender and number, as hen vooar, a bignbsp;woman; dooinney mooar, a big man; deiney mooarey, big men.
Since the adjective in English has no inflexion for gender, it is quite a common thing to have one adjective qualifying two or morenbsp;nouns of different genders. Sometimes in Manx we meet with onenbsp;adjective qualifying two nouns of different genders or numbers;nbsp;in such cases the adjective follows the last noun, and agrees with itnbsp;cdone. However, the more usual method is to use the adjective afternbsp;each noun, as:
Dooinney mie as hen vie.
A good man and (a good) woman.
If a plural noun ends in a slender vowel or consonant, the initial consonant of a following adjective is aspirated, if possible:nbsp;fer mooar, a big one.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;fir vooarey, big ones.
moddey jooigh, a greedy dog. moddee yooighey, greedy dogs.
If a feminine norm ends in a strong plural, the initial consonant of a following adjective is not aspirated:
clagh hrome, a heavy stone. claghyn trommey, heavy stones.
§ 99. ADJECTIVE USED PREDICATIVELY
{a) Position of the Adjective
An adjective used predicatively always follows its noun, except when it is predicated by means of the verb she, in any of its forms,nbsp;expressed or understood:
The men are good. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta ny deiney mie.
The woman is fair. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta’n ven aalin.
If the verb she be used in these sentences, notice the position of the adjective and the use of the pronoun:
The men are good. J Good men they are. J |
S’mie ny deiney ad. |
126
SYNTAX
The woman is fair. quot;I Fair is the woman. Jnbsp;Is not the darkness great? '1nbsp;ss!)
S’aalin y ven ee.
Nagh mooar yn dorraghys eh!
How great is the darkness I In the spoken language the verb ta is often introduced, as:
S’mie ny deiney t’ad.
S’aalin y ven fee.
(b) Agreement of the Adjective An adjective used predicatively need not agree with its nounnbsp;in either gender or number: in other words, the simple form of thenbsp;adjective is always used.
Moreover, it is never aspirated by the noun.
Notice the difference between the following:
Ta’n wooa vooar doo. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Thenbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;big cow is black.
Ta’n wooa ghoo mooar. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Thenbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;black cow is big.
Ta’n oie dorraghey as fliugh. The nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;night is dark and wet.
Ta’n oie fliugh dorraghey. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Thenbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;wet night is dark.
§ loo. EXAMPLES OF COMPARISONS
Ta’n maidjey shoh cha liauyr as shen.
This stick is as long as that.
T’ad wheesh eeit seose lesh moym.
They are so much eaten up with pride.
Ta shinyn er screen whilleen screeunyn as shiuish, agh cha nel shiuish er screen wheesh as shinyn.
We have written as many letters as you, but you have not written as much as we.
Ta’n ven ny s’aaley (or s’aalin) na’n dooinney.
The woman is fairer than the man.
Ta yiam ny s’ymmydoil na airh.
Iron is more useful than gold.
Ta’n dooiney ny smoo marroo na bio.
The man is more dead than alive.
The latter construction is not very common.
Ta mish ny s’lhiurey na shiuish.
I am taller than you.
Ta’n lioar shoh ny s’theiney na shen.
This book is thinner than that.
Ta airh ny s’trimmey na argid.
Gold is heavier than silver.
-ocr page 143-THE ADJECTIVE nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;127
Ta’n cabbyl ny s’melley na’n laair.
The horse is slower than the mare.
If we wish to emphasize the adjective, it is brought to the beginning of the sentence, and the particle ny omitted:
S’troshey yn dooinney na’n ven.
Stronger is the man than the woman.
Share anmagh na dyn dy-bragh.
Better late than never.
Ny is also omitted when the adjective is preceded by the interrogative pronouns quoi and ere:
Quoi s’lhiurey (ta), shiuish ny mish?
Who is taller, you or I?
Quoi s’trimmey (ta), leoaie ny yiam?
Which is heavier, lead or iron?
The words in brackets may be omitted.
Cre share oddagh ve eu na shen?
What better could you have than that?
Ta’n dooinney ny sloo ynsit na’n ven.
The man is less learned than the woman.
The latter construction is not very common.
Cha vel shin5m cha berghagh as shiuish.
We are not so rich as you; or. We are less rich than you.
Ta’n braar aym lane s’jeadee na’n ghuyr aym.
My brother is much more diligent than my sister.
In an interrogative or negative sentence monney is used instead of mooarane and lane:
Cha nel eh monney shinney na shiuish.
He is not much older than you.
Cha nel jm lioar eu monney smoo na’n nane shoh.
Your book is not much bigger than this one.
Note. The second of the two terms of the Comparison of Superiority and Inferiority is often understood, as;
Ta’n thie euish mooar, agh ta’n fer ainjm lane smoo.
Your house is big, hut ours (our one) is much bigger (thanyours). Cha n’aik mee rieau dooinney s’daaney (na Peddyr).
I never saw a man more impudent (than Peter).
Myr s’ ... s’ .. . The . . . the . . ., e.g.:
Myr smoo jm gheshaght, s’reaie yn cloie.
The bigger the company, the merrier the play.
-ocr page 144-128 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;SYNTAX
Myr sloo yn 9heshaght, smoo yn aym.
The smaller the company, the bigger the share.
Myr share yn laa, share yn jannoo.
The better the day, the better the deed.
'All the more’ is translated by wheesh shen smoo:
Va’n lhag-haghyrt shoh wheesh shen s’neuhaitnyssee er-yn-o)^ shen.
This accident was all the more disagreeable because of that.
Ta Peddyr yn ynseydagh s’jeadee {or smoo jeadagh) ayns y schoill.
Peter is the most diligent pupil in the school.
Ta fhalse 5m fer sloo berghagh jeu ooilley.
Charles is the least rich of {them) all.
Sh’ is prefixed to fare, lee, and lea.
S’, sh’ aspirates a few words initialed by ƒ, as:
fare becomes share. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;feeu becomes sheeu.
foalsey becomes s’oalsey. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;fodjey becomes sodjey.
The irregular comparisons are generally written without an apostrophe, as saa, sassey, shlea, smoo, sloo, amp;c.
Colloquially, a few of these irregular comparisons are regularly compared, as s’aashagh, s’aalin.
It will be noticed that part of the verb she is always used with the degrees of comparison.
Thus yn ven s’aaley really means ‘ the woman who is fairest ’.
Formerly the past tense was used also, as yn dooinney by hroshey, ‘the man who was strongest’.
By, usually abbreviated to b’, is still found, as:
Share Ihiam, it is better with me; I prefer.
Bare Ihiam, it was or would be better with me; I preferred or should prefer.
By hrimshey lesh y ree, there was sorrow with the king, i.e. the king was sorry. Manx Bible, Mian xiv. 9.
Ny {nhee), a thing; thus ta’n ven ny s’aaley na .. .is literally ‘the woman is a thing fairer than . . .’
S’, sh’ is omitted altogether when an adjective is initialed by s or sh, as sampleyragh, exemplary; sampleyree, more or most exemplary;nbsp;sayntoilagh, sayntoilee, covetous; seihlltagh, seihlltee, worldly.
-ocr page 145-129
THE ADJECTIVE
§ loi. NUMERAL ADJECTIVES
Position of the Words
A numeral adjective, whether ordinal or cardinal, when it consists of one word, goes before the noun:nbsp;kiare cabbil, four horses.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;shey kirree, six sheep.
yn chied guilley, the first boy.
The words for 40, 60, 80, 200, 300, amp;c., also precede their nouns. A numeral adjective, except those just mentioned, consisting ofnbsp;two or more words, takes its own noun immediately after the firstnbsp;part of the numeral, as:nbsp;kiare cabbil jeig, fourteen horses.nbsp;daa eayn yeig, twelve lambs.nbsp;daa vooa yeig as feed, thirty-two cows.
After sixty the lesser numbers are usually placed last, as:
72 cows.
129 miles.
79 horses.
5,635 men.
356 sheep.
1,666 years.
A.D. 519
52,000 of the Roman army.
More than 400 years.
About 80.
tree feed booa as daa-yeig. shey feed meeiley as nuy.nbsp;tree feed cabbyl as nuy-jeig.nbsp;queig thousane, shey cheead dooinneynbsp;as queig-jeig as feed,nbsp;tree cheead keyrrey shey-jeig as daeed.nbsp;shey cheead blein jeig tree feed as shey.nbsp;Blein nyn Jiarn queig cheead as nuy-jeig.
daa-yeig as daeed thousane jeh’n armee Romanagh.
erskyn kiare cheead blein. mysh kiare feed.
The initials of the numerals undergo the very same changes with regard to aspiration and eclipsis as a noun would in the same position.
When numerals are used substantively the noun always comes last in a sentence, and is in the plural number:
356 sheep, tree cheead shey-jeig as daeed dy chirree.
79 horses, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;tree feed as nuy-jeig dy chabbil.
129 miles, shey feed as nuy dy veeilaghyn.
Ollagh the modem plural of booa is always preceded by a substantive numeral:
3 cows. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;tree d’ollagh.
15 cows. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;queig-jeig d’ollagh.
12 cows. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;dussan'- or daa-yeignbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;d’ollagh.
6 cows. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;lieh-ghussan' or shey d’ollagh.
^ Lit., a dozen, half a dozen.
S
-ocr page 146-130 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;SYNTAX
§ 102. THE NUMBER OF THE NOUN AFTER THE NUMERALS
The noun after un is always in the singular, even in such numbers as II, 21, 31, 41, amp;c., as:nbsp;wn ooyl, one apple.nbsp;un ooyl jeig, eleven apples.nbsp;un ooyl as feed, twenty-one apples.
The numerals daa, two; feed, twenty; daeed (daa-eed), forty, amp;c., keead, a hundred; thousane or milley, a thousand; are regarded asnbsp;simple numeral adjectives which take the noun after them in thenbsp;singular number.
This peculiar construction has arisen from the fact that these numerals are really nouns, and formerly governed the nouns afternbsp;them in the genitive plural. As the genitive plural of most Manxnbsp;nouns had formerly exactly the same form as the nom. sing., thenbsp;sing, form has come to be used in modem Manx after these numerals.nbsp;Keead cronk, a hundred hills; feed markiagh, twenty horsemen.
In the case of the numeral daa, two; in old Manx it would always take the noun after it in the dual number, which had the same formnbsp;as the dative singular, as daa chosh, two feet. In modem Manx thenbsp;nom. sing, is used, daa chass.
The initial of an adjectivequot; qualifying and agreeing with a noun preceded by daa will be aspirated, no matter what the gender or casenbsp;of the noun may be, as:nbsp;daa hie yeig, twelve houses.nbsp;yn daa laue vaney, the two white hands.nbsp;lam e daa lam
yn lane jeh n daa laue veggey eck^j
Daa is frequently aspirated, except after words ending in d, n, t, I, s (dentals), or after the possessive adjective e, her.nbsp;ghaa cheead yeig, twelve hundred.
§ 103. THE POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE
A possessive adjective can never be used without a noun, as ‘her father and his’, e hayr as e ayr.
In modem Manx it is more usual to say yn ayr eck as echey.
The possessive adjectives always precede their nouns, as my voir, my mother.
But when the prepositional pronoun is used, the noun must be
quot; Except demonstrative, possessive, indefinite, and interrogative adjectives. * Colloquial.
-ocr page 147-THE ADJECTIVE nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;131
preceded by the article and followed by the prep, pronoun, asyn voir aym.
The possessives my, my; dty, thy; and e, his; aspirate the initials of their nouns, as my (dty, e) chione, my (thy, his) head; radical kione.
E, her, does not aspirate, as e kione.
Nyn, our, your, their, causes eclipsis, as nyn gione.
If a noun begins with a vowel, my and dty may become m’ and dt’; e (his) becomes quiescent; e (her) prefixes h: as m’arrane, my song;nbsp;dt’ayr, thy father; ’aigney, his mind; e hayr, her father.
The use of hene, own, self, very:
yn fheer ain hene, our own country.
yn dooinney hene, the man himself.
noght hene roish genym y chellee, this very night before the crowing of the cock.
The qualitative adjective Iheid, such, is always followed by y in the sing, and ny in the plur., e.g.:
Iheid y dooinney, such a man.
Iheid ny deiney, such men.
Lheid is also used substantively meaning ‘such a thing’ or ‘the like’, as Vel e Iheid ayn? Is its like in (existence)? Cha n’aik meenbsp;rieau ’Iheid roie, I never saw the like (or, such a thing) before.
yn dooinney shoh, this man (present).
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;shen, that „ (farther away from speaker).
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;shid, that „ (in mind, out of sight).
CHAPTER III
The personal pronouns agree with the nouns for which they stand in gender, number, and person, as, He is a big man. T'eh ny ghooinneynbsp;mooar. They are big men. T’ad nyn gheiney mooarey.
In Manx there is no neuter pronoun corresponding to the English ‘it’, hence, in translating ‘it’, the gender of the Manx noun (mas. ornbsp;fem.) must be determined and eh (he) or ee (she) used accordingly, asnbsp;Shoh yn thie, t’eh feer vooar, this is the house, it is very big. Ta’nnbsp;Hoar aym, cha net ee thummidagh, I have the book, it is not bulky.
In such a phrase as ‘It is very cold’, eh is often written e, as te {fe) feer feayr, it is very cold.
The pronoun 00, thou, is used in familiar conversation, as. How art thou? Kyst'ou? What a man thou art! Cre’n dooinney t’ou!
The pronoun shiu, you, is used for both the sing, and plur. It is the sing, of respect, as Kys ta shiu, vainstyr? How are you, sir?
The personal pronouns, whether nom. or acc., always come after the verb, as T’eh moylley shiu, he praises you.
The accusative personal pronoun usually comes last in the sentence or clause to which it belongs, as D’aag mee myyei eh, I left it behind me.
It may, however, immediately follow the nominative, as D’aag eh ad ay ns yn ynnyd shen, he left them in that place.
The relative particle follows its antecedent and precedes its verb, as yn dooinney ny chadlys, the man who sleeps.
As the position of the verb in Manx indicates whether the sentence is absolute or relative, the affirmative relative particle is oftennbsp;omitted, as:
ta’n dooinney g’ohhragh, the man is working.
yn dooinney ta g’obbragh, the man who is working.
d’iu yn dooinney, the man drank.
yn dooinney d’iu, the man who drank.
marree eh, he kills or wiU kill.
eshyn varrys, he who kills or shall kill.
In sentences like the last one the emphatic personal pronoun is usual.
-ocr page 149-THE PRONOUN nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;133
The neg. particle nagh must never be omitted, as:
yn dooinney nagh vel g’obhragh, the man who is not working.
yn dooinney nagh d’iu, the man who drank not.
eshyn nagh man, he who kills not.
The relative particle, whether expressed or understood, always causes aspiration in the present or future, as yn dooinney vee’s^nbsp;g'ohbragh, the man who will be working.
In English, when the rel. or interrog, pronoun is governed by a preposition, the pronoun very often comes before the governingnbsp;word, as. What are you speaking about? The man that he gave thenbsp;book to is here.
In Manx the rel. particle is generally separated from the preposition which governs it; but instead of using a simple preposition at the end of the sentence, as in English, a prepositional pronoun isnbsp;used, as yn dooinney ta cabbyl echey,^ the man who has a horse; ynnbsp;dooinney chreck mee yn wooa rish, or yn dooinney rish chreck mee ynnbsp;wooa, the man to whom I sold the cow.
In sentences like the last, the emphatic form of the prep, pronoun is frequently used, as yn dooinney dasyn hug mee yn Hoar, the mannbsp;to whom I gave the book.
As the accusative case of the rel. particle has exactly the same form as the nominative, the context must determine, in those tensesnbsp;in which the verb has no distinct termination for the relative,nbsp;whether the rel. particle is the subject or object of the verb; ynnbsp;dooinney woaill Juan may mean, the man whom John struck, or,nbsp;the man who struck John.
§ 106. TRANSLATION OF THE GENITIVE CASE OF THE ENGLISH RELATIVE
The Manx relative has no inflexion for case; hence, in order to translate the English word ‘whose’ when not an interrogative, thenbsp;following construction is used:
The man whose son was sick.
Yn dooinney va mac ghing echey. or:
Yn dooinney va e vac ghing (literary).
Yn dooinney va’n mac echey ghing (colloquial).
The woman whose son is sick visited us yesterday.
Yn ven ta’n mac eck ghing hug ee shilley orrin jea.
* Radical, beeys.
^ In older Manx tliis phrase and such others were written, Yn dooinney dy 'oel cabbyl echey.
-ocr page 150-134 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;SYNTAX
To translate the English rel. pronoun when governed by an active participle, we employ a somewhat similar construction, as:
The hare that the hounds are pursuing.
Yn mwaagh ta ny coyin cloh.
The man whom I am striking.
Yn dooinney ta mee bwoalley.
§ 107. EXAMPLES WITH THE PRONOUNS
Vel veg eu? Cha nel veg aym. Ta paart aym. Vel ny feallagh elley er jeet? Y derrey yeh as y jeh elley. Myr shinney cagh smessey cagh. Laa feailley Jliaghee as cagh buinnnbsp;traagh. Quoi mdrish hie ad? Cre lesh woaill shiu eh? Ta ooilley ny haink roym’s nyn maarlee as roosteyryn. Cha hoig ad shen ny v‘eh er loayrt roo. Ny ta scruit aym, te scruit. Quoid^ oddys 00 hoiggal. S’ Jeer shen. Shen eh. [Ta) shoh yn ynnyd. Trog eh shen. V’eh shoh Ean. T’ee shen Moirrey. Quoi ad shoh? Vel eh shid Thomase? Nee shoh yn fer? Cha nee, shoh eh. Ta’n ooreyder mooar ec Juan as ta’n fer beg ec Jamys. Ta’n Hoar yiarg ayms as ta’n nane gheayney euish. Tany kirree vooarey aynsy vagher ^ V. p |
Have you any? I have none. I have some. Have the others come? The one and the other. The older one is the worse one is. A wet holiday and all mowing hay. With whom did they go? With what did you strike him? All who came before me are thieves and robbers. They understood not that which he had spoken to them. What I have written, I have written. Which thou mayest understand. That is true. That’s it. This is the place. Lift that (one). This was John. That is Mary. Who are these (ones). Is that (about whom you were speaking, but not present)nbsp;Thomas? Is this the one? No, this is it. John has the big watch and James has the little one. I have the red book and you have the green one. The big sheep are in the field |
97-
-ocr page 151-135
THE PRONOUN
as ny feallagh veggey ayns y woaillee. Gow jeed ny oashyryn ayd as cur feallagh fhirrym ort. Vel pagh sthie? Ta feallagh ennagh as palghey oc. Quoi ren shen? Cre’d t’eu? Cre’d shen t’ayd? Quoi jeu share ta? Cre’d ta shen? Quoi s’leshyn Hoar? Quoi rish loayr shiu? Quoi gollrish fee? Hug Finn ny laueyn oc ayns laueyn y cheilley. Scarr Ottar as Olave rishy cheilley. |
and the little ones in the fold. Take off thy stockings and put dry ones on (thee). Is there any one in? Some (ones) have plenty. Who did that? What have you? Wdiat is that thou hast? Which is the better? What is that? Whose is the book? To whom did you speak? Whom is she like? Finn put their hands in the hands of each other. Ottar and Olave separated from each other. |
CHAPTER IV
§ io8. As a general rule the verb precedes its subject, as t’eh, he is; va’n dooinney ayns shen, the man was there.
Exceptions: (i) When the subject is a relative or an interrogative pronoun the verb comes after its subject, as;
Yn guilley ta hwoalley mee. The boy who strikes me.
Cre’d t’ayd? nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;What hast thou?
(2) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;In a relative sentence the subject, though not a rel. pronoun,nbsp;may precede its verb; but as the noun is usually far separated fromnbsp;the verb, a personal pronoun is used as a sort of temporary subject,nbsp;so that really the noun and its pronoun are subject to the samenbsp;verb, as:
Yn dooinney ta ny hassoo ec y dorrys woaill eh yn cabbyl.
The man who is standing at the door struck the horse.
Compare the similar use of the French pronoun ce, or the English ‘He that shall persevere unto the end, he shall be saved.’
(3) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The nom. often precedes its verb in poetry, and sometimes evennbsp;in prose:
Raah dy row ort! Success to thee!
§ 109. Transitive verbs govern the accusative case, and the usual order of words is, Verb, Subject, Object.
When the subject or object is a relative or an interrogative pronoun it precedes the verb.
Ren Edardyn baatey shen. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Edward made that boat.
Woaill yn guilley eh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The boy struck him.
§110. USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
The most frequent use of the present subjunctive is with the conjunction dy, expressing a wish. If the wish be negative use nar (except with row).
This mood is often called the ‘Optative’, or the Mood of Wishing. Dy bannee Jee shiu!nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;May God bless you 1
Dy gooin Jeelhien! nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;God help us!
Dy jed 00 slane! nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Safe home! (Mayest thou go
safely!)
Nar Ihig Jee shen! nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;May God not permit that!
Nar Ihig eh Jee I nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;God forbid!
-ocr page 153-THE VERB nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;137
The subjunctive of she is gura, and the neg. subj. nara:
Gura mie eu! nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Thank you! (May you have good!)
Nar ee dooinney erbee mess jeeds! May no man eat fruit of thee!
Nar aase mess erbee orts! nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;May no fruit grow on thee!
Nara ’n yioïn dhyt! nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;’
IPerdition seize thee!
The subjimctive is used after mannagh, unless, when there is an element of doubt:
Mannagh greid shiu mish. Unless you believe me.
Mannagh der shiu yn argid dou. Unless you give me the money.
Roish^ my or my, before, when used with reference to an event not considered as an actual occurrence, takes the subjunctive, as:
Immee royd roish my jig y main- Be off with you, before the master styr.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;come.
My vow eh baase. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ere he die.
The past subjunctive is found after dy or mannagh to express a supposed condition. They may also take a conditional. In translating the English phrases ‘if he believed’ (implying that he did notnbsp;believe), we use dy with the past subjunctive; but as the tense isnbsp;identical in form with the imperfect tense, it may be said that it isnbsp;the imperfect tense which is employed in this case.
If you were to see Thomas on the following day you would pity him.
Dy vaikagh shiu Thomase yn laa er-giyn ghoghe shiu ghymmey er.
If you were to give me that book.
Dy derragh shiu dou yn Hoar shen.
§ III. RELATIVE FORM OF THE VERB
The relative form of the verb is used after the relative particle ny, when it is the subject of the verb (but never after the negativenbsp;relative nagh, which or who . . . not). It has a distinct form in two,nbsp;and only two tenses—the present and the future. In these twonbsp;tenses it ends inys. The verb is aspirated after the relative, expressednbsp;or understood; but nagh eclipses.
Bee yn dooinney g’obbragh.
Yn dooinney vees g’obbragh. Yn cabbyl ta mooie er yn raad.
The man is usually, or will be working.
The man who is usually, or will be working.
The horse which is outside on the road.
In the case of the verb ta the habitual, not the simple present,
' Roish is redundant before my, but it is often written so.
T
-ocr page 154-138 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;SYNTAX
has the relative form, but ta is now regarded as the relative form of the present tense.
In those tenses where there is no distinct form for the relative the context alone can determine whether the relative is the subject ornbsp;the object of the verb.
As, and, as; my, if; myr, as;/oasf, yet; tra, when; are followed by the relative form of the verb in the present and future, and the verbnbsp;is aspirated; kys dy, er-yn-oyr dy, ga dy, or any other such locutions,nbsp;are followed by the dependent form.
Kysdyveleh? How is it?
§ 112. THE VERBAL NOUN AND ITS FUNCTIONS
In Manx there is neither an infinitive mood nor a present participle, both functions being discharged by the verbal noun.
Saillym shooyl.
Dooyrt mee risk dyn gheet. V’eh orrym’s g’eeck.
Cha baillyms bannaghey da. Cha nodpoagey follym skassoo.
I wish to walk.
I told him not' to come.
I had to pay it.
I did not wish to salute him. An empty bag cannot stand.
In the above examples it will be seen that the Manx verbal noun is an exact equivalent in sense of the English infinitive, sign and all.
Some Further Examples
Saillym shooyl y raad.
Saillym loayrt fockle.
Dooyrt m’ayr rhym dynyn cabbyl y chreck (or, dyn creek ynnbsp;cabbyl).
S’cair diu giarey yn faiyr.
N’od shiu toiggal Gailck?
I wish to walk the road.
I wish to speak a word.
My father told me not to sell the horse.
You ought to cut the grass.
Can you understand Manx?
The preposition dy is very often softened to y, and omitted before or after a vowel, as:
Cha voddym coontey’ choyrt. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;I cannot give an account.
In any sentence of the first set of examples there is question of only one thing, e.g. shooyl, gheet, amp;c., but in each of the sentences ofnbsp;the second set there is a relation between two things, e.g. raad andnbsp;shooyl, fockle and loayrt, amp;c., and to express this relationship anbsp;preposition is used. If the relationship between the nouns be alterednbsp;the preposition must also be altered, as:
Ta raad aym ry hooyl. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;I have a road to walk.
Ta fockle aym ry loayrt. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;I have a word to say.
‘Not’ before the English infinitive is translated by dyn or gyn.
-ocr page 155-THE VERB nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;139
Ta cabbyl aym ry chreck. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;I have a horse to sell.
Ta faiyr eu ry ghiarey. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;You have grass to cut.
There is still another preposition which can be used to express another alteration in meaning:
Ta bher ain chum rostey feill. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;We have a spit to roast meat.
Ta cabbyl chum markiaght echey. He has a horse to ride.
If in any of these sentences the wrong preposition be employed the proper meaning cannot be expressed.
In translating the simple English infinitive of an intransitive verb, use the simple verbal noun in Manx, as:
He told me to go to Douglas.
I prefer to walk.
Tell him to sit down.
Tell them to go away.
Ask him to come with you.
Dooyrt eh rhym goU dy Ghoo-lish.
Share Ihiam shooyl.
Abb}^ rish soie sheese.
Abbyr roo g’immeeaght.
Shir er 9heet mêriu.
When the English intransitive infinitive expresses purpose (i.e. the genmdial infinitive), use the preposition ry:
There is something to see. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Tanbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;red ennagh ry akin.
There is music to hear. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Tanbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;kiauU ry chlashtyn.
There is gold to find. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Tanbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;airh ry gheddyn.
He is to come this evening. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;T’eh ry heet fastyr jiu.
When the English verb is transitive and in the simple infinitive (no purpose implied) use the preposition dy or the softened form y:nbsp;My father told me to buy a horse. Dooyrt m’ayr rhym cabbyl y
chionnagh.
You should cut the grass.
He told me not to shut the door.
Would you like to read this book?
Lhisagh shiu yn faiyr y ghiarey. Dooyrt eh rhym dyn y dorrys ynbsp;yeigh.
B’laik Ihiu yn lioar shoh y lhaih?
When the English infinitive is transitive, and also expresses purpose, dy is used before the verbal noun:
He shall come to judge the quick and the dead.
Hig eh dy vriwnys ny bio as ny merriu.
Haink eh dy chionnagh yn cabbyl.
Hie eh dy woalley yn dooinney. Daink shiu dy woalley Juan?nbsp;Haink ad dy yannoo caggey.
He came to buy the horse.
He went to strike the man. Did you come to strike John?nbsp;They came to make war.
In colloquial Manx the preposition dy is often used in the place of chum and ry, as:
I have a road to walk. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta raad aym dy hooyl.
He has a horse to ride. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta cabbyl echey dy varkiaght.
-ocr page 156-140 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;SYNTAX
When the English infinitive is passive and also expresses purpose, use ry:
He is to be hanged. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;T’eh ry chroghey.
The house is to be sold. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta’n thie ry chreck.
There is no one to be seen. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Cha nel pagh erbee ry akin.
When a personal pronoun is the object of the English infinitive and the latter does not express purpose, we translate as follows:
You ought not [to] strike me.
I wished to strike him.
You must not strike them.
I wish to praise her.
\Cha Ihisagh shiu m’y woalley. ƒ By vian Ihiam bwoalley eh.
L ,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,, y woalley eh.
ƒ Cha nhegin diu bwoalley ad.
1 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,, ad y woalley.
SaiUym moylley (yvoylley) ee.
When the English infinitive governing a personal pronoun expresses purpose, we translate as foUows:
ƒ Cha Ihisagh shiu bwoalley mee.
f Haink eh dy woalley mee.
1 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,, dy my woalley.
ƒ Hie mee dy woalley ad.
1 „ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„ d’yn‘ mwoalley ad.
jT’ad 9heet dy Ihottey shin.
1 „ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„ d’ynquot; Ihottey shin.
He came to strike me.
I went to strike them.
They are coming to wound us.
The verbal noun in Manx performs the function of the English present participle:
They are coming. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;T’ad gheet.
We are going. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta shin goll.
The children are playing. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta ny pait^hyn cloie.
The ship is sailing. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta’n Ihong shiaulley.
In this case the verbal noun was formerly preceded by the preposition ec or eg (at), as:
I am writing. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta mee ec screen.
The tree is growing. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta’n billey ec aase.
Before a verbal noun initialed by a consonant this has now disappeared, but is still retained before a vowel, and is always abbreviated to g’, as:
They are complaining. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;T’ad g’accan.
If a verbal noun is initialed by ƒ, the ƒ is occasionally replaced by g’, as:
folmaghey, opening.
I am opening. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta mee g’olmaghey.
' A contraction of dy nyn.
-ocr page 157-THE VERB nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;141
Fonnerly, when the English pres, partic. governed an objective case, the object, if a noun, followed the verbal noun in Manx andnbsp;was in the genitive case.
Son IMaghty cleeau ta goaill ny geayee (Old Manx Song)h For the seat of the breast is taking the wind.
If the object of the English pres, partic. be a personal pronoun, we translate as follows:
jT’eh bwoalley mee. iT’e
He is striking me.
Are you breaking it?
Are you breaking them? He is praising us.
They are not striking her.
’eh dy my woalley. jVel shiu brishey eh?
1 „ „ dy vrishey eh? fVel shiu brishey ad?
IVel shiu dy’n mrishey ad? iT’eh moylley shin.
IT’eh d’yn moylley shin. rCha nel ad bwoalley ee.
1 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„ dy woalley ee.
Note carefully the effects of the possessive adjectives on the initials of verbal nouns after them. The second construction given is thenbsp;more literary.
Preceded by er, the verbal noun has the force of a pres, participle passive, denoting a continued or habitual state, as:
She is travailing. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;T’ee er troailt.
The child was terrified. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Va’n Ihiannoo er creau.
In this idiom er neither aspirates nor eclipses.
If the subject of a pres, partic. passive is a personal pronoun, the verbal noun is preceded by a poss. adjective, which of course eithernbsp;aspirates or eclipses, as:
He is killed. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;T’eh er ny (er-n-e) varroo.
/ am struck. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta mee er my woalley.
They are lost. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;T’ad er nyn goayl.
In colloquial Manx er ny (aspirating) is used with all persons.
With er, after (eclipsing), the verbal noun has the force of the English perfect tense, as:
T’eh er jeet gys Mannin. He has come to Man.
V’ad er n’gholl gys n’Albin. They had gone to Scotland.
Colloquially, the verbal noim is usually aspirated, not eclipsed, by er in this idiom.
* Moore’s Ballads, p. 38.
-ocr page 158-142 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;SYNTAX
With erreish (after) the verbal noun has the force of a perfect tense, but the allocation of the words differs, as:
Until thou hast paid the uttermost farthing.
Derrey vees oo erreish yn farling sodjey magh y eeck.
When Jesus had spoken the parables.
Tra va Yeesey erreish ny coraaghyn-dorraghey y loayrt.
When the high priests had heard his parables.
Tra va ny ardsaggyrtyn . . , erreish ny coraaghyn-dorraghey echey y chlashtyn.
Occasionally erreish directly precedes the verbal noun, as:
Now when he had spoken.
Nish tra v’eh erreish loayrt.
With erreish the verbal noun often has the force of a perf. participle, as;
He having sat on the seat of judgement.
Erreish da soie er stoyl y vriwnys.
And they having spoken.
As erreish daue loayrt.
With this idiom erreish must always be followed by da (to) and its compounds.
Frequently, both erreish and er are used in this idiom, as:
Jesus having spoken these words.
Erreish da Yeesey v’er loayrt ny goan shoh.
1 having risen again.
Erreish dou v’er n’irree reesht.
In this construction the verbal noun is preceded by the verb ‘ to be ’. Lurg (after) is also used in this idiom.
He having gone. Lurg da v’er n’ghoU.
Gyn or dyn (without) is used to express negation with the verbal noun, as gyn or dyn gheet, not to come.
Whether he comes or not.
Lhig da 9heet ny dyn.
Tell William not to plough the field.
Abbyr rish Illiam dyn traaue 5m magher.
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,, 3m magher y hraaue.
Gyn, dyn with the verbal noun has the force of the passive participle in English with un prefixed, as;
My five pounds of wool being unspun.
My wheig puint d’ollan as ad gyn sneeu.
-ocr page 159-THE VERB nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;143
With er (on), and the irregular verb goll, the verbal noun expresses the passive voice. In this idiom er does not mutate the verbal noun.
The last enemy which shall be destroyed is death.
Yn noid s’jerree hed er stroie, she baase eh.
Which was given for thee.
Hie er coyrt er dty hon’s.
Ry-hoi with the verbal noun means ‘for the use or purpose of’:
This is Elias who was to come.
Shoh Elias va ry-hoi 9heet.
For the purpose of casting him headlong.
Ry-hoi tilgey sheese eh gour e vullee.
The English subjunctive is often idiomatically expressed by the verbal noun preceded by dy (aspirating).
That we write unto them, that they abstain from pollutions of idols.
Shin dy screeu hue, ad dy reayll ad hene veih eajeeys jallooyn.
§ 113. THE VERB ‘SHE’
The position of a verb in a Manx sentence is at the very beginning; hence, when a word other than the verb is to be brought intonbsp;prominence, the important word is to be placed in the most prominentnbsp;position—viz., at the beginning of the sentence, under cover of annbsp;unemphatic impersonal verb. There is no stress on the verb so used;nbsp;it merely denotes that prominence is given to some idea in thenbsp;sentence other than that contained in the verb. There is a similarnbsp;expedient adopted in English, ‘ He was speaking of you, ’ and, ‘ It isnbsp;of you he was speaking.’ In Manx there is a special verb for thisnbsp;purpose, and of this verb there are forms to be used in dependentnbsp;clauses, e.g.:
She mish yn dooinney. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;I am the man.
Ta mee gra dy nee Juan yn I say that John is the man. dooinney.
After the conjunction my (if) the absolute is used:
If thou art John’s son. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;My she mac Ean 00.
Colloquially, re is used as the dependent of she:
He says that I am he. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;T’eh gra dy re mish eh.
In old Manx by (past and conditional of she) was mutated to my when preceded by any of the eclipsing particles:
Was he not pleased! nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Nagh my haittin lesh!
A definite noun is one limited by its nature or by some accompanying Word to a definite individual or group.
-ocr page 160-144 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;SYNTAX
The following are definite nouns:
(a) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The name of a person or place (but not a class name likenbsp;Manninagh).
(b) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;A noun preceded by a demonstrative adjective.
(c) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;A noun preceded by gagh or dagh (because it means each takennbsp;individually).
(d) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;A noun followed by any other definite noun in the genitivenbsp;case.
Any noun not included in the above classes is an Indefinite Noun.
When to use the verb SHE.
{a) When the verb ‘to be’ in English is followed by a definite noun, she may be used, as:
She mish Juan.
She yn dooinney eh.
She 00 my vraar.
She Jamys yn dooinney. She ben y thie ee.
Nagh nee oo my charrey. Cha nee shen yn ayr aym.
I am John.
It is the man.
Thou art my brother.
James is the man.
It is the woman of the house. Art thou not my friend?
He is not my father.
All sentences of this class are called ‘ Identification Sentences’.
The allocation of the words may be altered if we wish to emphasize another word, as:
John I am.
My brother thou art.
Is it not my friend thou art? Is it a Manxman thou art?nbsp;It is an Englishman I am.
She Juan mish.
She my vraar oo.
Nagh nee my charrey oo? Nee Manninagh oo?
She Sostnaghmee.
She is often omitted in an absolute sentence:
I am the Lord thy God. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Mish yn Qhiam dty Yee.
Thou art my beloved son. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Uss my vac ennoil.
I am the Christ. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Mish yn Creest.
(i) When the verb ‘to be’ in English is followed by an indefinite noun, she or ta may be used, but with different meanings. Whenevernbsp;we use the word she in such a sentence we convey the ‘ idea of Classification’ or species, as she baagh booa, a cow is an animal, amp;c.;nbsp;or we lay stress on what the person or thing is at the time being, withoutnbsp;any thought that he (or it) has become what he (or it) is. For instance, a father, enumerating to a friend the various positions in lifenbsp;of his children, may say. She greasee Jamys, she thailleyr Juan, as shenbsp;gaaue Mian: James is a shoemaker, John is a tailor, and Matthew
-ocr page 161-THE VERB nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;145
is a smith. When ta is used we convey the idea that the person or thing has become what he (or it) is, and that he (or it) was not alwaysnbsp;so. Supposing a father is telling what professions his sons havenbsp;adopted, he should say, Ta Jamys ny ghreasee, amp;c.
(c) The difference between ta and she is weU exemplified in the two sentences she dooinney eh and t’eh ny ghooinney, both meaning ‘ Henbsp;is a man ’. If we see a figure approach us in the dark, and after looking closely at it we discover it to be a man, we would say, she dooinneynbsp;eh (or, she dooinney t’ayn). But when we say t’eh ny ghooinney wenbsp;convey a different idea. We mean that the person of whom we arenbsp;speaking is no longer a boy, he has now reached manhood. If any onenbsp;were speaking to you of a person as if he were a mere boy, and younbsp;wished to correct him, you should use the phrase t’eh ny ghooinney.nbsp;Again, if a young man on a fishing-boat were offered a boy’s share,nbsp;he would rightly say ta mee my ghooinney, i.e. I have now becomenbsp;a man and am therefore entitled to a man’s wages.
{d) When the indefinite noun after the verb ‘to be’ in English is qualified by an adjective, the verb she or ta may be used accordingnbsp;to the idea we wish to convey. If we wish to convey a Conditionnbsp;Sentence (i.e. one which has reference to the state or condition ofnbsp;the subject at the time in question), we use ta, otherwise we maynbsp;employ she, e.g.:
He is a small man. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;T’eh ny ghooinney beg.
She was a good woman. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;V’ee ny ben vie.
(e) When the verb she is employed in such sentences there is a choice of two constructions. In the second construction (as given innbsp;the examples below) we emphasize the adjective, making it thenbsp;prominent idea of the sentence. The definite article is used in thenbsp;second construction. When she directly precedes the adjective, thenbsp;contraction sh’ or s’ is used.
She laa braew eh. i . nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;-nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,
r,,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;, \lt IS a fine day.
S braew yn laa eh.)
She oie feayr ee. j nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,
c.,r nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;. \lt IS a cold mght.
S feayr yn oie ee. /
She booa vraew ee shen. l . nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;-
,1 That ts a fine cow.
S braew yn wooa ee shen. 1 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;•'
Nagh nee ellan aalin eh shen? I^ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;. .. • 7 j
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;7 ,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;] Is not that a pretty island?
Nagh aahn yn ellan eh shen? )
Nagh nee yn dorraghys mooar eh? 1 , j nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,
, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;j t. 7.-7nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;\Is not the darkness great?
Nagh mooar yn dorraghys eh? 1 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;°
-ocr page 162-146 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;SYNTAX
(ƒ) When a simple adjective follows the verb ‘to be’ in English, either she or ta may be employed in translating, as;
Honey is sweet. S’millish mill or Ta mill millish.
He is strong. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;S’lajer ehnbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;T’eh lajer.
It is good. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;S’mie ehnbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;T’eh mie.
The beginning of a sentence is naturally the place of greatest prominence, and is usually occupied in Manx by the verb. When,nbsp;however, any idea other than that contained in the verb is to benbsp;emphasized, it is placed immediately after the verb she, and the restnbsp;of the sentence is thrown into the relative form.
For example, ‘ We went to Douglas yesterday, ’ would be generally translated; Hie shin dy Ghoolish jea, but it must also take thenbsp;following forms according as it is emphasized:
We went to Douglas yesterday. She shinyn hie dy Ghoolish jea.
We went to Douglas yesterday. She dy Ghoolish hie shin jea.
We went to Douglas yesterday. She jea hie shin dy Ghoolish.
The Verb she is then used:
(1) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;To express identity e.g. She Gorree yn ree.
(2) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;classificationnbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;She ree Gorree.
(3) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;emphasisnbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;She jea hie shinnbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;dy Ghoolish.
Position of words with SHE.
The predicate of the sentence always follows she, as:
William is a man.
They are children.
John is a butcher.
Coal is black.
A horse is an animal. Turf is not coal.
Is it a man?
I am a worm and no man.
She dooinney Illiam.
She pait5h3m ad.
She buit^hoor Juan.
S’doo geayl.
She baagh cabbyl.
Cha nee geayl moain.
Nee dooinney eh?
She beishteig mee as cha nee dooinney.
Sentences of identification, e.g. Orry is the king, form an apparent exception. The fact is that in this sentence either the word ‘Orry’nbsp;or ‘the king’ may be the logical predicate. In English ‘king’ is thenbsp;grammatical predicate, but in Manx it is the grammatical subject, andnbsp;‘Orry’ is the grammatical predicate. Hence the sentence will be.nbsp;She Gorree yn ree.
In such sentences, when two nouns or a pronoun and noun are connected by the verb she, as a general rule, the more particular andnbsp;individual of the two is made grammatical predicate in Manx. Thenbsp;converse usually holds good in English. For instance, we say in
-ocr page 163-THE VERB nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;147
English, ‘I am the messenger’, but in Manx she mish yn fhaghter (ht. ‘the messenger am’ I).
Thou art the man. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;She 00 5m dooinney.
He is the master. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;She (eh) shen yn mainstyr.
We are the boys. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;She shinyn ny guillyn.
Sentences like ‘It is Thomas’, ‘It is the messenger’, amp;c., are translated she Thomase eh, she yn ghaghter eh. Here Thomase and yn ghaghter are the grammatical predicates, and eh in each case is thenbsp;subject.
It is the master. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;She yn mainstyr eh.
He is the master. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;She eh shen 5m mainst}^:.
We often find such sentences as ‘She eh yn mainstyr’, ‘She eh yn dooiney ’, amp;c., for ‘ It is the master ’, ‘ It is the man ’, in which the lastnbsp;eh, the subject of the sentence, is omitted.
By, the past tense of she, is not much used in modem Manx, and never directly precedes a noun or a pronoun.
Before an adjective, she is used simply to emphasize it, the tense being formed with ta.
S’feayr va’n oie!
S’foddey ta’n slieau shen ! S’atghimagh vees y laa shen !nbsp;S’mooar veagh yn corree echey !
Cold was the night!
Far is yonder mountain! Terrible will that day be!nbsp;Great would his anger be!
The subjunctive of she is often understood, as {Gura) shee {in) dty veal Welcome! (Lit.:‘May God be in thy life’, where s/tee is usednbsp;iorjee. Words in brackets understood.) PI. Shee nyn mea.
Examples with by:
(From the old Manx ballad Mannanan beg Mac y Lir.)
Er Ihiam pene dy by veg nyn geesh.
I imagine myself that their taxes were small.
Yn ynnyd by vian lesh baghey ayn.
The place where he desired to dwell.
She ad by vessey da’n ellan sheaynt.'
’Tis they who were worse to the holy isle.
Er Ihiam pene dy by vooar lesh foalsaght.
’Tis my own opinion that it was greatly by deceit.
(From Shibber y Qhiarn.)
Nagh b’lhiass edyr daue hene, ny da veg jeh nyn sheeloghe . . . That neither they nor any of their posterity should . . .
' The Isle of Man.
-ocr page 164-148 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;SYNTAX
(From the Scriptures.)
Ny ayraghyn oc cha by feeu Ihiam dy hoie marish moddee my hioltane.
Whose fathers I would have disdained to have set with the dogs of my flock.
Hilg eh ad ayns y phryssoon b’odjey stiagh.
He cast them into the innermost prison.
The English Present Perfect Tense is translated by means of the present tense of the verb ta, followed by er (or erreish) and thenbsp;verbal noun.
He wrote.
He has written.
He broke the window.
He has broken the window.
Screen eh.
T’eh er screeu.
Vrish eh yn uinnag.
He has died.
T’eh er vrishey 5m uinnag. ƒ T’eh er ghedd5m baase.
\ T’eh erreish baase y gheddyn.
When the English verb is transitive there is another very neat method of translating the secondary tenses. As already stated,nbsp;there is no verb to have in Manx: its place is supplied by the verbnbsp;ta and the preposition ec. Thus, ‘I have a book’ is Ta Hoar aym.nbsp;A similar construction may be used in translating the secondarynbsp;tenses of an English transitive verb. The following sentences willnbsp;illustrate the construction:
7 have written the letter. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta’n screeuyn scruit aym.
7 have struck him. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;T’eh bwoailt aym.
Have you done it yet? nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Vel eh jeant eu foast?
7 have broken the stick. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta’n maidjey brisht aym.
The English Pluperfect and Future Perfect are translated in the same manner as the Present Perfect, except that the past andnbsp;future tenses respectively of ta must be used instead of the present,nbsp;as above. The following examples will illustrate the construction:
He died. He had died. He had broken the chair. The window had just been broken by a stone. |
Hooar eh baase. V’eh er gheddyn baase. {V’eh er vrishey yn stoyl-drommey. Va’n stoyl-drommey brisht echey. Va’n uinnag er ve brisht lesh clagh. |
THE VERB nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;149
r 1 j nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;fVa mee er screeu yn lettyr.
I had written the letter. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ur . i
I Va n lettyr scruit aym.
I shall have finished my work he- Bee jerrey currit aym er m’obbyr fore thou wilt he ready.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;roish vees 00 aarloo.
Here are given a few verbs which require a preposition after them in Manx, although they require none in English:
cur risk, practice. eeck da, pay.nbsp;feayshil er, relieve.nbsp;freggyr da, answer.nbsp;giall da, promise.nbsp;greim er, seize.nbsp;guee er, beseech.nbsp;insh da, relate.nbsp;jeeagh da, show.nbsp;leih da, forgive.
Ihig da, permit. oltee da, welcome.nbsp;shir er, ask (beseech).nbsp;trog er, rise.
yeearree er, ask (request). ynsee da, teach.
ahhyr risk, tell. hannee da, salute.nbsp;henn da, touch.nbsp;herr er, overtake.nbsp;brie jeh, ask (inquire).nbsp;caggee risk, fight.nbsp;ghionn er, oblige or make one donbsp;anything.nbsp;cooin er, remember.nbsp;cooin lesh, help.nbsp;coyrlee da, advise.nbsp;coyrlee noi, dissuade.nbsp;craid mysh, mock.nbsp;cur da, give.nbsp;cur huggey, send.nbsp;cur lesh, bring.
goaill aggie roish, fear. guee er, pray for.nbsp;immee roish, depart.nbsp;jeeagh er, look at.nbsp;loayr risk, speak to.nbsp;scarr risk, separate from.nbsp;yllee er, call for.
Many verbs require prepositions different from those required by their English equivalents;nbsp;ahhyr risk, say to.nbsp;henn da, belong to.nbsp;craid mysk, make fun of.nbsp;cur fys er, send for.nbsp;eaisht risk, listen to.nbsp;er lesk, it seems to.nbsp;fuirree risk, wait for.
Imperative [a)
Clasht, 0 inneen, as smooinee ort, croym dty chleaysh: jarrood myrgeddin dty phobble hene, as thie dty ayrey.
Hear, 0 daughter, and remember, incline thine ear: forget also thy own people and the house of thy father.
-ocr page 166-150 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;SYNTAX
Shooill-jee mysh Sion, as immee-jee mygeayrt-y-moee: as gow-jee coontey ny tooryn eck.
Walk ye about Sion, and go ye about her: and count her towers.
Lhig da’n cronk Sion goaill boggey, as inneen Yudah ve gennal. Let the hill of Sion rejoice, and the daughter of Judah be glad.
Lhig dooin brishey ny kianglagh}^! oc veih-my-cheilley.
Let us break their bonds asunder.
O ny treig mee.
Oh, do not forsake me.
The imperative is often made more emphatic by adding an emphatic personal pronoun:
Tar uss gys y farrane. Soie-jee shiuish ayns shoh.
Come thou to the fountain. Sit ye there.
Compound Impekative (6)
Jean cummal ayns y 9heer, as bee oo dy-firrinagh er dty yannoo magh.
Dwell in the land and thou shalt be truly satisfied.
Jean m’y choadey, O Yee.
Protect me, 0 God.
O jean uss farkiaght er caa yn Qhiam.
0 wait thou for the Lord's time.
Future Imperative (c)
The Future Imperative, though not generally recognized in grammars, occurs quite commonly. Perhaps no better example cannbsp;be found in Manx literature than the Ten Commandments.
The future imperative in Manx does not differ materially from the future indicative, although the difference in meaning is obvious:
Cha jean oo geid. Cha jean oo dunverys.
Thou shalt not steal. Thou shalt do no murder.
Simple Aorist Past {d)
{Past action, time indefinite.)
Deïe mee er lesh my veeal, as hug mee moylley da lesh my hengey. I called upon him with my mouth, and I gave praise to him with mynbsp;tongue.
Compound Aorist Past (e)
Ren reeaghyn lesh nyn sheshaghtyn-caggee roie er ghea.
Kings with their hosts fled.
Progressive Past (ƒ)
{Expresses what was taking place when something else took place.)
Va mee lhaih tra haink shiu stiagh.
I was reading when you came in.
-ocr page 167-THE VERB nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;151
{Also expresses what used to take place.)
Nurree va mee fakin eh dy-chooilley laa.
Last year I was seeing him every day.
(The Aorist Past in Manx is used like the English pluperfect to express an action, which, having been begun at a past time, was stillnbsp;going on at a time now also past.)
Ren y caggey farraghtyn rish daa vlein.
The war lasted for two years.
Past Perfect (g)
Va mee er chur jerrey er yn obbyr aym tra hie eh ersooyl.
I had finished the work when he went away.
Cha row my hrostey brisht aym son kiare ooryn jeig.
/ had not broken my fast for fourteen hours.
Aorist Present and Future {h)
‘ Hee 00 ads5m cloie ’S5m aer, y vagher, as ’syn ushtey roie;
Shione dhyt nyn ghooghys, toiggee 00 nyn ghlare,
(Lheid as ta oc) myr t’ou er chur my ner.’
From Pargys Caillit.
‘ Thou seest them playing In the air, in the field, and in the running water;
Thou knowest their nature, thou understandest their speech {Such as they have) as thou hast beholden.’
Aorist Future (»)
{Predictive: Simple and Compound.)
Loayiym rish tra vaikym eh.
I shall speak to him when I see him.
Nee eh screen hooin my vees naight erbee echey.
He will write to us if he has any news.
Freillee yn ^hiam dty gholl magh as dty heet stiagh, veih’n traa shoh magh er son dy bragh.
The Lord will preserve thy going out and thy coming in from this time forth for evermore.
Nee yn ^hiam uss y choadey veih dy-chooilley oik, dy-jarroo eshyn eh nee dt’annym y reayll.
The Lord shall preserve thee from all evil, yea, it is he that shall keep thy soul.
{Promissive Future: ‘ shall ’ and ‘ will ’ as notional verbs.) Shegin dou loayrt.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Shegin diu goll.
I must speak. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;You must go.
-ocr page 168-152 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;SYNTAX
Progressive Present (j)
(i. Expresses an action which is taking place at the moment of speaking.) Ta mee fakin dy vel eh ceau.
I see that it is raining.
(2. Expresses an action that habitually takes place.)
Ta mee fakin eh dy-chooilley laa.
I see him every day.
This periphrastic or compound form of the present tense is much more common than the aorist. Thus ta mee lhaih may mean, ‘I read’,nbsp;'I do read', or T am reading’.
My t’eh goll mairagh verym fys hiu.
If he goes to-morrow I shall send for you.
T’eh cummey ooiiley ny creeaghyn oc, as toiggal ooilley nyn obbraghyn.
He fashions all their hearts, and understands all their works. Perfect Present {k)
{Expresses an action begun at a past time, and continuing up to the present.)
Ta shin er ve ajms shoh son tree dy hiaghtinyn.
We have been here for three weeks.
T’eh er vosley as er chleiy ooig, as t’eh hene er duittym ayns y ribbey v’eh kiarail da fer elley.
He has opened and dug a pit, and he himself has fallen into the snare which he prepared for another.
Progressive Future [1)
(i. Expresses an action which will be carried on at some future time.) Bee eh goll dys Purt ny hinshey Jylhein.
He will be going to Peel on Monday.
(2. Expresses an action which will habitually take place at some future time.)
Bee eh ^heet dys shoh dy-chooiUey laa y ^hiaghtin shoh 9heet.
He will he coming here every day next week.
(The relative form of the prog. fut. is used in hypothetical clauses to express both the pres, and the fut.)
My vees shiu fuirraght ayns Doolish.
If you will be waiting in Douglas.
Future Perfect (m)
(Expresses an action which will be completed at some future time.)
My vees eh bio Laa Nollick, bee eh er vaghey tree feed blein as jeih.
If he will be alive on Christmas day, he will have lived seventy years.
-ocr page 169-THE VERB nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;153
Incomplete Past, Present, and Future (w)
{Expresses actions which are about to take place.)
Va mee mysh screeu tra haink shiu stiagh.
I was about to write when you came in.
Ta mee mysh geddyn jinnair. Bee’m mysh goU.
I am about to get dinner. I shall be about to go.
Va Edard er ghee goU dys Rhumsaa.
Edward was about to go to Ramsey.
SUBJUNCTIVE Conditional (0)
Veign er ve ma5mrey dy beign er ve maree.
I should have been happy if I had been with her.
Veagh eh er varroo mee mannagh beign er choadey mee hene.
He would have killed me if I had not protected myself.
Raghins dy Ghoolish dy ragh shiuish.
/ would go to Douglas if you would go.
Hiaullagh y baatey shen dy-tappee dy beagh y ghenn dooinney stiurey ee.
The boat would sail swiftly if the old man were steering it.
Compound Conditional with jannoo.
Yinnin goll marish. Yinnagh eh shooyl choud as Bailey Chashtal.
I would go with him. He would walk as far as Castletown.
Compound Conditional with fod.
Foddym fakin eh noght. Dooyrt eh dy voddagh eh ve thie mairagh.
I may see him to-night. He said that he might be home to-morrow. Foddee ve dy vel ad ersooyl dys Purt fhiam. Oddin ve er screeunbsp;Perhaps they have gone to Port Erin.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;I might have written
huggey dy beagh fys er ve aym dy row eh shassoo ayns feme jeh to him if I had known that he needed {he stood in need of) help.
Cooney.
Optative {p)
O dy row mee er ve ayns shen, cha beagh y lhag-haghyrt shid er
0, that I had been there, that accident would not have happened to jeet er! Dy row eh er ve baiht! Dy bannee Jee shiu! Dy vaikymnbsp;him! That he had been drowned! God bless you!nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;May I see
ee keayrt reesht my voym baase! Nar jig yn obbyr eu Ihiu! her once again before I die!nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;May your work not come with you!
{i.e. prosper).
X
-ocr page 170-154
SYNTAX
Compound Optative.
Dy jean y fhiam oo y vannaghey! Dy vod eh ve maynrey!
May the Lord bless thee! nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;May he be happy!
Dy vod palghey ve eu!
May you have plenty!
Conditional and Imperative sentences used Optatively.
O dy jinnagh deiney er-y-fa-shen yn ^hiam y voylley son e vieys!
0 that men might therefore praise the Lord for his goodness!
O Ihig da ny arraneyn eu ve jehsyn! 0 ny Ihig da my chree ve 0 let your songs he of him!nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;0 let not my heart be
er ny Ihoobey gys drogh obbyr erbee! inclined to any evil work!
Habitual {q)
Raghin dy Lunnin dy-chooilley vlein. Veagh shin screeu gys y
I used to go to London every year. We used to write to cheilley. Yinnagh eh 9heet keayrt ’sy 9hiaghtin. B’oaUin venbsp;each other. He used to come once a week.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;I was wont to
goll. B’oallagh oo ve goll. go. Thou wert wont to go.
Relative Clauses (r)
Quoi erbee varrys Cain. Cre erbee eeys eh. Raad erbee hooylys ad.
Whoever slayeth Cain. Whatever he eats. Wherever they walk. Tra erbee Ihaihys shiu. My eeys dooinney erbee. Ny slooidnbsp;Whenever you read.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;If any man eats.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Unless he
loayrys eh rhym. Cha nee 5m wooa smoo eieys smoo vheaunys. speaks to me.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Itis not the cow which lows the most that milks most.
Tra scuirrys y laue dy choyrt scuirrys y veeal dy voylley.
When the hand ceases to give, the mouth ceases to praise.
Gerundial (s)
Son gyn jannoo shoh bee shiu kerrit. Dyn fakin pagh erbee
For not doing this you will be punished. Not seeing any one within, fheu-sthie d’aag mee 5m 9hamyr. Cha nod shen y ve. Cha yargnbsp;I left the room.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;That cannot be. They could
ad eh y Iheihys. Myr nagh by liooar dooin ammys eeck da not heal him.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;As though it were not enough for us to pay respect
Jee. Ard valley aalin niartal ren eh ’chroo. Faillee my ghlare, to God. A beautiful strong city he created.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;My language fails,
cha vodd3mi coontey choyrt. Te dy-baghtal ry-akin. Ayns y I cannot give an account.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;It is plainly to be seen. In the
-ocr page 171-THE VERB nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;155
theihll ry-heet. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Brasnagyn ry-hoi lostey.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Tra ta my a5rr as my
world to come. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Faggots for burning.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;When my father and my
voir dy my hreigeil, ta’n Qhiam dy my ghoaill seose. T’ou er mother forsake me, the Lord will take me up.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Thou hast
my hoiaghey seose. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;T’ou er my livrey.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Cha nel 00 er my
set me up. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Thou hast delivered me.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Thou hast not shut me
yeigh seose. Ta my niart dy m’ailleil. Ta mish er dty hirrey. Veihsyn up.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;My strength fails me. I have sought thee. From him
ta dy spooilley eh. Ta’n fhiam dy chummal eh. Tra haink ad dy who despoileth him. The Lord holds him.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;When they came
my stroie. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Jean siyr dy my livrey. T’ou uss ynnyd dy m’ollaghey
to destroy me. Makehasteto deliver me. Thou art a place to hide me ayn. Lhig da ve dty aigney dy my livrey. As ainle y fhiam dy’nnbsp;in. Let it he thy will to deliver me. And an angel of the Lordnbsp;skeayley ad. My t’eh gheet dy my yeeaghyn.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta n3Ui ayr
scattering them. If he comes to see me. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Their heavenly
flaunyssagh dy’n meaghey ad. father feeds them.
Defective (t)
Ren ny moddee goun-The dogs barked.
Ren mee bibbemee. Nee shiu gullyrnee.
I shivered. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ye shall howl.
stymee. Yinnagh ny cabbil shuttemee. Ren eh sooree urree. Ren The horses would neigh.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;He courted her. The
y soilshey londymee. Va ny kiyt peeagheree. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta ny kiarkyn
light dazzled. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The cats were caterwauling. The hens are
scoylgemee. Ta’n dorrys jeestemee. cackling. The door is creaking.
Va mee er my ghoostey.' T’ou er dty voylley. Bee eh er ny hirrey.
I was awakened. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Thounbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;art praised. He shall be sought.
Bee ee er ny toiggal. Veagh shin er nyn eeck. Beemayd er nyn She shall be understood. We would be paid.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;We shall be mar-
boosey. Veagh shiu er nyn enmys. T’ee er ny hobbal. ried. You would he named (or called). She is denied.
Hie Messina er stroie liorish craa-hallooin. Cha jagh yn Raue er
Messina was destroyed by an earthquake. Rome was not built troggal ayns laa. Hieeher oanluckeymarisheayraghyn. Raghin ernbsp;in a day.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;He was buried with his fathers.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;I would be
treigeil. Cha ragh eh er coayl. Hed 00 er bannaghey. Eisht hed forsaken. He would not he lost. Thou shalt be blessed. Then shall
• Colloquially, er ny {aspirating) is used for all persons.
-ocr page 172-156 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;SYNTAX
er lhaih. Cha. jed ad er fakin. Hie er dea3rrtey er dty hon’s. Ren be read. They shall not be seen. Which was spilt for thee.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;They
ad m’ y haghney. Ren uss olkys my pheccah. y leih dou. shunned me.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Thou didst the wickedness of my sin forgive me.
Ren eh m'y livxey veih ooilley my aggie. Ren ad dy-follit soiaghey He delivered me from all my fear.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;They secretly set a snare
nyn ribbey dy my stroie. Lhig da dty irriney mish y choadey. to destroy me.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Let thy truth protect me.
Baillish laghyn mie y akin. Shen nee’m y yeearree. Nee eh m’y I wish to see good days. That I shall desire. He will hidenbsp;ollaghey as m’y hoiaghey seose. Nee’m oural y hebbal ayns enbsp;me and set me up.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;I shall offer a sacrifice in his
3mnyd casherick. Nee’m arrane y ghoaill. Dt’eddin, Hiam, neem’s holy place.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;I shall sing.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Thy face, Lord, I will
y hirrey. Chamoo jean dty harvaant y hyndaa ersooyl. Nee eh ad seek. Neither shall thy servant turn away.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;He shall
y Ihieggal sheese, as cha jean eh ad y hroggal. Nee’m boggey y fell them down and shall not raise them.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;I shall rejoice in
ghoaill a5ms dty vyghin. Nee oo ad y choadey. Nee uss m’y thy mercy.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Thou shall protect them. Thou wilt protect
choadey veih seaghyn. Ny faag mee chamoo jean m’y hreigeil. me from sorrow.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Leave me not, neither forsake me.
Ny jean beg y hoiaghey jeem. Jean mish y vriwnys. Ny jean oo Do not despise me.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Judge me.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Sorrow not
hene y heaghney. Dy jean y ^hiam eshyn y choadey! thyself.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;May the Lord protect him I
-ocr page 173-CHAPTER V
§ 117. PLACE OF THE ADVERB
In absolute sentences the adverb usually follows the verb:
The hoy learns well. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta’n scoUag g’ynsaghey dy-mie.
He reads correctly. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;T’eh lhaih dy-kiart.
You have spoken truly. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta shiu er loayrt dy-firrinagh.
She was walking quickly. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;V’ee shooyl dy-tappee.
In relative clauses the adverb usually precedes the verb:
He who negligently forgets to do Esh}^! ta dy-meerioosagh jar-this. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;rood dy yannoo shoh.
They who speak most understand Adsjm smoo loayrys sloo hoiggys. least.
When a qualitative adverb is preceded by another adverb, the particle dy is omitted:
He reads very correctly. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;T’eh lhaih feer chiart.
She walked too quickly. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Hooyl ee ro happee.
He spoke as loudly as he could. Loayr eh cha ard as d’od eh. When a qualitative adverb is placed at the beginning of a sentencenbsp;to emphasize it, dy is omitted, and s’ prefixed:
Truly hast thou spoken. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;S’firrinagh ta shiu er loayrt.
§ 118. DEGREES OF COMPARISON
Adverbs are compared exactly hke adjectives: Superlative. Share. Quoi jeu share oddys g’ynsagh. The particle dy may be prefixed to a participle:nbsp;foshlit, open, opened.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;dy-foshlit, openly, publicly. follit, hidden. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;dy-follit, secretly. ynsit, learned. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;dy-ynsit, learnedly. Positive. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Equal. Dy-mie {well). Cha mie as. John did well hut William did better. The hound ran quickly hut the deer ran more quickly. Who came oftenest to the house? Which can run the faster? He rose sooner than I expected. He who goes oftenest gets most.nbsp;Which can teach the better? |
Comparative. Ny share na. Ren Juan dy-mie, agh ren Illiam ny-share. Roie yn coo dy-tappee, agh roie yn feeaih ny-s’tappee. Quoi s’menkey haink gys y thie? Quoi jeu s’tappee oddys roie?nbsp;D’irree eh ny s'leaie na yerk mee.nbsp;Eshyn s’menkey hed smoo 5dow. |
158
SYNTAX
The adverbs of place may be placed either at the beginning or end of a sentence.
(1) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;When a mere fact is stated they are placed last:
The man is here. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta’n dooinney ayns shoh.
The woman is there. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta’n ven ayns shen.
The town is yonder. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta’n valley ayns shid.
(2) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;When it is desired actually to point an object out, and drawnbsp;one’s attention to it, these adverbs are placed at the beginning of anbsp;sentence:
Here are some flowers. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ayns shoh ta paart dy vlaaghyn.
There is the hook. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ayns shen ta’n lioar.
Yonder is the mountain. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ayns shid ta’n slieau.
Colloquially, er (aspirating) may take the place of ayns.
Er hoh eh.
Er hoh screeu5m dhyt. Er hen y thie.
Er hoh shiu.
Er hid y 9heer ayms.
Here he is.
Here is a letter for you.
There is the house.
Here you are {meeting one).
Yonder is my country {pointing out the direction).
In the above idiom the verb ‘to be’ is omitted.
Carefully distinguish between ‘There is a man’, indefinite; and ‘There is a man’, demonstrative. The former is translated Tanbsp;dooinney ayn, oxTa dooinney dy row; the latter Ayns shen ta dooinney,nbsp;or Er hen dooinney.
In such a phrase as ‘ There is a cow in the field ’, ‘ there ’ is not translated in Manx, as Ta booa ayns y vagher.
nar.
dyn.
cha.
nagh.
‘Not’, with the Imperative Mood, is translated by ny. ,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Subjunctive Mood,
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Verbal Noun,
Indicative Mood
I statement.
\ question, ,
‘ If . . . not ’ is translated by mannagh.
Cha eclipses, as fel, cha vel. Cha becomes chan before a vowel. Occasionally cha aspirates, which gives the form cha n{f)el.
How to answer a question. Yes—No.
{a) In Manx there are no fixed words for ‘Yes’ or ‘No’. As a general rule in replying to questions, ‘Yes’ or ‘No’ is translated bynbsp;using the same verb and tense as has been employed in the question.nbsp;The subject of the verb used in reply need not be expressed, except
-ocr page 175-THE ADVERB nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;159 when it is contained in the verb-ending. In English we frequently use a double reply, as' Yes, I will', ‘ No, I was not ’, amp;c.; and althoughnbsp;this construction is often found in colloquial Manx, it is not advisablenbsp;to imitate it. In Manx only one reply is needed. Are you sick? (Am not). Yes (Am). No Yes (Was). No Vel shiu gMng? Ta. Cha nel. Rowehaynsshen? Va. Charow. Naikshiu Juan? Honnick. Cha naik. Ren eh fakin eh? Ren. Cha ren. Jig ee? Hig. Cha jig. Nee 00 yn dooinney? Cha nee. Nagh nee shen yn ven? She. She mish yn ghaghter. Nee? Cha nee shen yn saggyrt ain. Nagh nee? She yn dooinney eh. Cha nee. Nagh feayr yn laa eh? She.nbsp;Nagh mie eh? She. Nee echey ta’n argid? She. Nee Manninagh eh? Cha nee. Ta mee goll mairagh. Vel? |
Was he there? (Was not). Saw you John? Yes (Saw). No (Saw not). Did he see him? Yes (Did). No (Did not). Will she come? Yes (Will come). No (Will not come). Art thou the man? No. Is not she the woman? Yes. I am the messenger. Yes? He is not our priest. No? It is the man. It is not. Isn’t it a cold day? Yes. Is it not good? Yes. Is it he who has the money ? Yes. Is he a Manxman? No. I am going to-morrow. Yes? |
(Ö) When the question is asked with ‘who’ or ‘what’, the subject alone is used in the answer, and if the subject be a personal pronounnbsp;the emphatic form is used, as:
Quoi ren shen? Mish. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Who did that? I did.
§ 121. UP AND DOWN
The following examples will fully illustrate the use of the words for ‘up’ and ‘down’.
A
Ceauym sheese eh. Vel eh heese foast?nbsp;Ceau neese eh.
T’eh wass nish. Ceauym seose eh.nbsp;Vel eh heose foast?nbsp;Ceau neose eh.
T’eh wass nish.
A says to B, I’ll throw it down.
Is it down yet?
Throw it up.
It is now.
B says to A, I’ll throw it up.
Is it up yet?
Throw it down.
It is down now.
B
T’eh er e chosh.
Ta shin er nyn gosh.
N.B. He is up (i.e. he is not in bed).
We are up.
-ocr page 176-i6o
SYNTAX
§ 122. OVER
The following sentences will exemplify the translation of the word ‘over’:
_B
Ceauym noon^ hiu eh.
Vel eh hoaP foast?
Ceau noaP hym eh.
T’eh wass^ nish.
Hie eh harrish y voalley.
Hie eh noon dys n'Albin. Haink eh noal voish n'Albin.
A _
A says to B, I'll throw it over to you.
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Is it over yet?
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Throw it overnbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;to
me.
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;It is over now.
He went over the wall.
He went over to Scotland.
He came over from Scotland.
§ 123.
He fell head foremost.
I fell head foremost.
She fell head foremost. They fell head foremost.
HEAD FOREMOST
Huitt eh gour e ching.* Huitt mee gour my ching.nbsp;Huitt ee gom e king.nbsp;Huitt ad gour nyn ging.
§ 124. HOWEVER
‘However’ followed in English by an adjective or an adverb is translated into Manx by hied echey, as ‘However dark the night’,nbsp;Kied echey dorraghey yn oie] ‘However quickly he walked’, Kiednbsp;echey tappee hooill eh.
§ 125
The sooner the better.
The less the company the bigger the share.
The nearer the night the more rogues.
THE ADVERB ‘THE’
Myr s’leaie share.
Myr sloo yn 9heshaght smoo yn aym.
Myr sniessey da’n oie slhee mit-ghoor.
§ 126. EXAMPLES WITH ADVERBS
{a) Of Quality. Cre cha millish ta’n rose! Cha gial as sniaghtey.
How sweet is the rose! .ds white as snow. Myr s’doo yn feeagh yiow eh sheshey.
.ds black as the raven is he'll find a mate.
* Harrish is used colloquially.
^ Gour, towards, is usually followed by genitive; in colloquial Manx followed by nom., gour e chione.
-ocr page 177-THE ADVERB nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;i6i
(b) Of Quantity. Ta shen feer vie. Te to happee. Te con ghor-Thai is very good. It is too fast. It is rathernbsp;raghey. T’eh bunnys marroo. V’ee agglit dy-liooar. T’eelanenbsp;dark. He is nearly dead. She was frightened enough. She isnbsp;s’berfhee. Cha nel eh monney s’ber^hee. Cha nel ee agh ynricannbsp;much richer. He is not much richer.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;She is only ten years
jeih bleeaney d’eash foast. Cha nel Juan veg share. T’eh ^heet of age yet.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;John is little better.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;He comes
once a year. goU feer vennick.nbsp;go very often.
keayrt ’sy vlein. Ta shin mennick goll dys y thie oc. Cha nel ad We often go to their house.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;They don’t
T’ee dy kinjagh kiauUeeagh.
She is always singing.
(c) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Of Relation. T’eh ersooyl nish. Eisht loa}^: eh rh}nn. Cha
He is away now. Then he spoke to me. I naik mee rieau Iheid roie. Bee ad leah a5ms shoh nish. Cha naik meenbsp;never saw the like before. They will soon be here now. I have notnbsp;eh er dy henney. Mysh daa vlein er dy henney. Vel shin goll gysnbsp;seen him since.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;About two years ago.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Are you going to
y Qhruinnaght mleeaney? A5ms shoh wass er y thalloo. Ayns shid the CruinnagJit this year? Here below on the earth. Over yondernbsp;hoal ’sy Rank.nbsp;in France.
(d) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;General. Cur er-ash dooin bannaghtyn ny marrey. T’eh yn
Restore to us the blessings of the sea. He is our Jee ain er dy rieau. T’ee shooyl ergooyl. Chanaikmeeeherygherrit,nbsp;God for ever.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;She walks backward. I haven’t seen him lately.
Cha row veg er-maym. Craad ta shiu er ve? Vrie eh jeem c’raad va Nothing remained. Wherehaveyoubeen? He asked me where Inbsp;mee. Adam! ere vel oo? Raad ta graih ta shee.nbsp;was. Adam! where art thou? Where there is love there is peace.nbsp;Cuin hig shiu?nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Tra erbee s’laik Ihiu. Raad erbee cheauys
When will you come? nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Whenever you like. Wherever thou throwest
00 eh, hassys eh. (Lat.: quocunqueiecerisstabit). Ren 5m eayn it, it stands.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The lamb fol-
g’eiyrt er Moirrey raad erbee v’ee goll. Kys ta shiu? nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Cre’n aght
lowed Mary wherever she went. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;How are you?nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;How are
(ash) ta shiu? Shegin da ^heet ansh-erbee. Ta’n ree hannah ayns you?nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;He must come anyway.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The king is already
shoh. Choud as v’ee foast bio (choud, contraction of cha (f)od, as here. While she was still alive.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;[iong).
Y
-ocr page 178-162 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;SYNTAX
Row shiu rieau ayns y Spaainey ? Wereyou ever in, Spain?
Vel shiu goU foddey ?
Are you going far?
Cha row mee rieau ayns shen. I was never there.
Ta shiu g’obbragh roujn:. Cha loayr You are working too much. He spokenbsp;eh arragh. Foddee dy vel eh. T’ad 9heet cooidjagh. Lhig eh jehnbsp;no more. Perhaps he is. They are coming together. He fired anbsp;gunn. V'eh ayns-shen vaidjyn. T’ad ^heet ny lurg (ny yeï). Chanbsp;gun. He was there a while ago. They are coming after him. Younbsp;nhegin diu goll ny lurg shoh.nbsp;must not go after this.
-ocr page 179-CHAPTER VI
§ 127. As a general rule the simple prepositions precede the words they govern, as;
Haink eh veih Doolish. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;He came from Douglas.
Hug eh yn ooyl da’n ven. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;He gave the apple to the woman.
In old Manx simple prepositions governed the dative (or accusative) case. Few examples of this usage are found in modem Manx. Hainknbsp;eh rishy (or ry) chosh, he came on foot; dy churfo chosh, to put undernbsp;foot, subdue; er e chosh, on his foot, i.e. out of bed.
Some modem prepositions being formerly nouns are followed by the gen. case: fud ny hoie, through the night, all night; feiy nynbsp;cruinney, throughout the globe; gour e ching, towards his head,nbsp;headlong.
Some simple prepositions cause aspiration when the article is not used with them, as sniaghtey, snow; fo niaghtey, Doolish, Douglas;nbsp;dy Ghoolish; cass, foot, ry chosh; fys, knowledge, gyn ys.
The tendency in modem Manx is not to aspirate, as fo slieau for an older fo lieau.
The simple prepositions, when followed by the article and a noun in the sing, num., usually cause aspiration, whether the noun benbsp;masculine or feminine:
yn moddey, the dog. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;da’n voddey, to or for the dog.
yn mullagh, the top. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;er y vullagh, on the top.
yn cabbyl, the horse. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;lesh y chabbyl, with the horse.
yn saggyrt, the priest. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;son y taggyrt, for the priest.
t, d, gh,j, are not usually aspirated, as leshy dooinney, with the man.
In colloquial Manx aspiration is not used.
§ 128. In Manx certain nouns preceded by prepositions have often the force of English prepositions. These are often callednbsp;Compound Prepositions. A list of such phrases or compoundnbsp;prepositions is here given;
ayns oaie, before (place). er son, son, for. er graih, for the sake. ec kione, at the end. er oi, er oaie, opposite. n’oi, against. er feiy, feiy, throughout. er fud, ny vud, ,, (space). |
erskyn, above, over. ry hoi, for, for the use of.nbsp;kion-enish, in the presence of.nbsp;er-boayrd, aboard.nbsp;ny-yeï, after (place).nbsp;erreish {er eish), after (time).nbsp;er dy{n), since. |
104 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;SYNTAX
Some prepositions formerly compound, are now simple: son, for, (heu, concerning; mastey, among; noi, against; feay, throughout;nbsp;gour, towards; cooyl, behind; rere, according to; mygeayrt, about;nbsp;mychione, concerning; erskyn, above.
Some are followed by prepositions: kiongoyrt risk, in the presence of; dyn wooise da, in spite of; er gerrey da, near; er Ihimmey jeh,nbsp;except; gheu sthiejeh, within; gheu mooie jeh, without; kion{j)enish,nbsp;in the presence of.
In a relative clause, the emphatic preposition is generally used, except in colloquial Manx:
Yn dooinney rishyn loayr mee. The man to whom I spoke.
Loayr mee risk yn dooinney. I spoke to the man.
In an interrogative clause, the preposition immediately follows the pronoun:
Quoi da hug shiu yn Hoar? nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;To whom did you give the book?
Quoi gys ren shiu screen? nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;To whom did you write?
The preposition may be placed at the end of a sentence, but is not so good:
Quoi ren shiu goll mdrish? nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Whom did you go with?
An interrogative adjective may be either preceded or followed by the preposition:
Dys ere’n gheer t'eh ersooyl? Liorish cre’n baatey hiaull eh?nbsp;Ayns quoi’n thie t’eh cummal?nbsp;Quoi’n gheer t’eh cummal ayn? |
To what country is he gone? By what boat did he sail? In which house does he live? Which country does he live in? |
§ 129. Examples; (i) NOUNS
Hug eh eh erskyn yn dorrys. Honnick mee ad er-gerrey da’n ghihhyr. Roie yn coo ny-yei yn ghynnagh. Hug eh dou yn cabhyl shoh ry-hoi yn fer-lhee. Cha net Iheihys erbee noi baase. Feiy yn laa. Fud ny hoie. Car y voghrey. Rere yn Hoar shoh. Hug eh yn Ihoob mygeayrt yn chione aym. |
He put it over the door. I saw them near the well. The hound ran after the fox. He gave me this horse for the doctor. There is no remedy against death. Throughout the day, all day. „ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;night, all night. „ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;morning, aU morn ing. According to this book. He put the noose around my my head. |
165
THE PREPOSITION
Haink eh my yet.
Ny immee nyn yet oc shoh. Nee’m shen er nyn son eu.nbsp;Chionnee shiu eh shoh ry-hoi aym ?nbsp;Va mee er nyn oaie oc.
Ta'n ushag er-nyn-skyn ain. Row shiu er-gerrey daue?
V’eh er-gerrey dou.
Haink ad m’oi.
He came after me.
Do not go after these.
I shall do that for your sake. Did you buy this for me ?
I was opposite them.
The bird is above us.
Were you near them?
He was near me.
They came against me.
{a) When ‘ for ’ means ‘ to bring or fetch use cur lesh or shirrey, as:
Immee as cur lesh yn cabbyl. Go for the horse.
Hie eh shirrey son Juan. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;He went for John.
(6) When ‘for’ means ‘to oblige, please, work for’, use da, as:
Jean shen da. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Do that for him.
Shoh dhyt yn Hoar ayd. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Here is thy book for thee.
T’eh gobbragh da Peddyr. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;He is working for Peter.
Use da to translate ‘for’ in the phrases ‘good for’, ‘bad for’, ‘better for’, amp;c., as:
Ta shoh oik diu. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;This is bad for you.
(c) When ‘for’ means ‘for the use of’, use ‘ry-hoi’, as:
Chionnee mee shoh ry-hoi yn I bought this for the smith. ghaaue.
{d) When ‘for’ means ‘duration of time’ use ry, rish, if the time be past, but car or feiy, if the time be future. In either case past andnbsp;future are to be understood, not with regard to present time, but tonbsp;the time of the action described.
(1) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;V’eh ayns shen rish blein tra He had been there for a year
haink mee. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;when I came.
(2) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;D'uirree eh ayns shen car He stayed there for a year.
bleeaney.
In the first sentence the year is supposed to be completed at the time we are speaking about, and is, therefore, past with regard tonbsp;the time we are describing. In the second instance the time at whichnbsp;the action of staying (if it is allowable to use the word ‘action’) tooknbsp;place at the very beginning of the year that he spent there. Thenbsp;year itself came after the time we are describing, therefore it isnbsp;future with regard to that time. It will be a great assistance to the
-ocr page 182-166 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;SYNTAX
student to remember that car or feiy are used when in the English sentence the fact is merely stated, as in sentence (2); and that ry,nbsp;risk is used when a secondary tense ought to be used in the Enghshnbsp;sentence, as in sentence (i).
(e) When ‘for’ means ‘for the sake of’, use er son, son:
Hooill eh son kuse veg d’airh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;He toiled for a little gold.
Hig eh er my hon. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;He will come for me.
(ƒ) When ‘ for ’ is used in connexion with ‘ buying ’ or ‘ selling ’, use er: Chionnee eh eh er phunt.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;He bought it for a pound.
Chreck mee eh er skillin. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;I sold it for a shilling.
Jees er phing. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Two for a penny.
(g) ‘For’ after the English verb ‘ask’ is not translated in Manx: Hir eh Hoar orrym.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;He asked me for a book.
Shir er y dooinney shen eh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ask that man for it.
{h) The English ‘only for’ very often means ‘were it not for’, ‘had it not been for’, and is translated by dy bee son, as;
Dy bee son Juan va’n cabbyl ve marroo nish.
Only for John the horse would be dead now.
Er be has the same meaning as dy bee.
§ 131. NOTE THE FOLLOWING EXAMPLES
Cour laa fliaghee.
Ta feysht aym ort.
Cur fys er.
Lheihys noi {er) ghingys. Fuirraght rish.
Er d’annym, ny insh.
Hug eh e oaie lesh yn awin. Chagg ad mysh yn reeriaght.
Ny cur yn foill er.
Ta aigney mie aym diu.
Ta’n cooat shoh ro vooar dou. Cre’d vees ain son jinnair?
Te Mart cha mie diu dy yannoo yn chooid share.
For a rainy day.
I have a question for you.
Send for.
A cure for sickness.
Wait for.
For thy life, don’t tell.
He faced the river.
They fought about the kingdom. Don’t blame him for it.
I have great respect for you. This coat is too big for me.nbsp;What shall we have for dinner?nbsp;It is as well for you to do yournbsp;best.
Colloquial Manx often differs considerably from literary, as: Hug eh argid dou dy chur diu. He gave me money for you.nbsp;Chionnee mee shoh dy chur da I bought this for John.nbsp;Juan.
Chreck mee eh son skillin. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;I sold it for a shilling.
-ocr page 183-167
THE PREPOSITION
§ 132. TRANSLATION OF THE PREPOSITION ‘OF’
(?) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Whenever ‘ of ’ is equivalent to the English possessive case, itnbsp;may be translated by the gen. case in Manx:
Mac yn dooinney. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The son of the man.
Thie yn taggyrt. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The house of the priest.
There are cases in which the English ‘ofalthough not equivalent to the poss. case, is translated by the gen. in Manx:
Fer yn thie. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The man of the house.
Clagh meinney.'‘ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;A stone of meal.
(?) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Whenever ‘of’ describes the material of which a thing is composed, use the gen. case:
Fainney yiarn. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;A ring of iron.
Screeuyn airh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Writing of gold.
(c) When ‘of ’ describes the contents of a body, dy (of) is used;
Cappan dy vainney. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;A cup of milk.
Kurn dy ushtey. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;A can of water.
{d) yn dooinney and yn taggyrt meem respectively ‘ of the man ’ and ‘of the priest ’. If we wish to say ‘of a’ we use jeh (of);
Mac jeh dooinney. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;A son of a man.
Thie jeh saggyrt. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;A house of a priest.
{e} When ‘ of ’ comes after a numeral, or a noun expressing a part of a whole, use jeh] if the word after ‘of’ in English be a personalnbsp;pronoun, use jeh or ec.
The first day of the week. One of our hounds.
Many of the nobles.
One of us was there.
Some of them.
One of these.
Yn chied laajeh’n ghiaghtin.
Fer jeh ny coy in ain.
Mooarane jeh'n sleih-ooasle.
Va fer ain {jin) ayns shen.
Paart {jeu) oc.
Fer jeu shoh.
(ƒ) When ‘of’ follows ‘which’, use jeh or ec.
Quoi jeh ny deiney? nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Which of the men?
Quoi {jin) ain? nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Which of us?
(g) When ‘of ’ means ‘about’ use mysh (about, concerning).
V’ad taggloo mysh y chooish. They were talking of the matter. Ginsh mysh boggey.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Telling of joy.
{h) ‘Of’ after the English verb ‘ask’, ‘inquire’, is translated by Brie shen jeh Juan.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ask that of John.
’ Colloquially, dy veinn.
-ocr page 184-168 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;SYNTAX
(i) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;When ‘of’ expresses ‘the means’ or ‘instrument’, use lesh. (Innbsp;old Manx risk was here used.)
He died of old age.
He died of hunger.
He died of a seven days’ sickness.
Both of us.
Hooar eh haase lesh shenn eash.
Hooar eh baase leshyn accyrys.
Hooar eh baase lesh ghingys shiaght laa.
(j) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Shin ny-neesht or Ynjees ain.
you.
them.
Shiu nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;eu.
Ad nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;,,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;oc.
Examples
He is ignorant of Manx. The like of him.
Don’t be afraid of me. A friend of mine.
A friend of yours.
A horse of mine.
A horse of Edward’s.
I have no doubt of it.
I think much of it.
Further
Cha vél eh heose rish Gailck.
E Iheid or Y Iheid echey.
Ny bee aggie ort roytn.
Carrey dooys.
Carrey diuish.
Cabby I Ihiams.
Cabby I lesh Edard.
Cha vel dooyt erbee aym jeh.
Ta mee coontey lane jeh.
-ocr page 185-CHAPTER VII
(a) To denote possession with ta.
I have a knife.
I know him.
He kept the knife for himself. He left it to them.
Ta skynn aym.
Ta enney aym er.
(amp;) With other verbs.
Chum eh yn skynn echey hene.
D’aag eh eh oc.
(c) Used in a partitive sense, of them, amp;c.
Nane erhee oc. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Any one of them.
Dagh unnane oc. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Each one of them.
§ 134. ER, on, upon
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Literal use: er y voayrd, on the table.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;In adverbial phrases.
er feiy, during. er dy{n), since.nbsp;er dy henney, ago.nbsp;er dy rieau, for ever.
(?) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Time
er-y-gherrit, lately. er-giyn, next, after.nbsp;er-jerrey, finally, lastly.nbsp;er-y-qhooyl, immediately.
(?) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Place
er foddey, afar. er chooyl, behind.nbsp;er fud, throughout.nbsp;er boayrd, aboard.nbsp;er y thcdloo, on earth.
er bee, in existence, at all.
er yn aarkey \ .
, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;/nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;S63..
er y cheayn I
er laare, on the floor, ground. er ghee, on the point of.nbsp;ery dorrys, by (through) the door, er hoshiaght, foremost.nbsp;er gerrey, near.
'er Ihiurid, three feet long.
Tree trieyn
er Iheead, eryrjid,nbsp;xr diunid.
er yn oyr \,
r 1 because. er y fa I
er yn oyr shen, therefore. er son, for the sake of.
,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;wide.
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;high.
„ nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;deep.
(c) Cause
er aggie dy, for fear that. er égin, compulsory.nbsp;er oyr erhee, by no means.nbsp;er y hon shen, for that reason,nbsp;z
170 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;SYNTAX
{d) Manner and Condition er chor erbee, by all means. er ash, back.nbsp;er oaie |nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;gooyl, backwards.
er hoshiaght / nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;shaghryn, astray.
beggan er beggan, little by little, er meshtey, dnmk.
er eeasaght, on locin.
3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;(a) Before the verbal noun, which it aspirates or eclipses, to formnbsp;the perfect tense.
T’ad er yeigh yn dorrys. They have shut the door.
(6) With the poss. adjectives my, dty, e, nyn and verb, noun to form perfect participle passive.
Er ny (n’e) chur magh ec yn Qheshaght Ghailckagh.
Published by the Manx Language Society.
4. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Emotions felt by a person:
Ta imnea, trimshey orrym. Tapaays, accyrys,feme, fhingysnbsp;orrym.
Ta aggie orrym.
Ta boggey, graih orrym.
. In phrases;
fys, enn, enney er, knowledge of, acquaintance with.nbsp;ta ourys aym er, I suspect him.nbsp;barriaght er, victory over.nbsp;graih er, affection for.nbsp;cooinaght er, remembrance of.
Ccire, sorrow, amp;c.
Thirst, hunger, need, sickness.
Fear.
Joy, love, affection.
lt;0
cassid er, complaint against. feoh er, hatred of.nbsp;feeagh er, debt due from.nbsp;cha s’aym (for cha e ys aym, Inbsp;have not its knowledge), Inbsp;know not.
In the above phrases the agent is expressed by ec wherever possible, ta graih, amp;c., aym ort.
6. ER is used after various classes of verbs.
{a) After the verb cur.
cur er.
cur ete er, cur briwnys er,nbsp;cur er creau,nbsp;cur er shaghryn,nbsp;cur feysht er,nbsp;cur fys er,nbsp;cur Iheihys er.
call (name), induce, persuade, cause, make, or compel one tonbsp;do something,nbsp;meddle with.
judge, pass judgement on. make one afraid, or tremble,nbsp;put or set astray,nbsp;question,nbsp;send for.
apply a remedy to.
-ocr page 187-CLASSIFICATION OF THE USES OF THE PREPOSITIONS 171
put on one’s guard, put aside,nbsp;arrange.
set about (doing something), recognize,nbsp;give back, restore,nbsp;promote, encourage, forward,nbsp;neglect, omit.
{b) After the verb goaill.
lament, assume, undertake.
pity-
take by force, revenge.
(c) After the verb jannoo.
ail, be the matter with, threaten, trouble, complain,nbsp;wrong, restrain, judge, conclude, distrust,nbsp;do violence to.
cur er twoaie, cur er gooyl,nbsp;cur cummey er,nbsp;cur laue er,nbsp;cur enn {enney) er,nbsp;cur er ash,nbsp;cur er e hoshiaght,nbsp;cur slheh er.
goaill er, goaill accan er,nbsp;goaill er êgin,nbsp;goaill cooilleen er.
jannoo er,
jannoo baggyrtys, boirey, cassid, aggair, smagkt, briwnys, jer-rey, meehreishteil er.nbsp;jannoo niart er,
(d) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;After the verb fheet.
fheet er-ash. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;come back, reappear,
(e) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;After the verb goll.
goll er e hoshiaght. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;proceed.
(ƒ) With various other verbs. yeearree er,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ask, entreat (one).
guee er, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;pray, beseech.
shirrey er, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ask, seek.
loayrt er, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;speak of.
cooinaghtyn er, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;remember.
smooinaghtyn er, screen er,nbsp;jeeaghyn er,nbsp;baggyrt er,nbsp;eiyrt er.
think of.
write of or about, look at, regard,nbsp;threaten,nbsp;follow.
§ 135. ASS, out of, from
X. Literal use: out of, from, amp;c.
He went out of the house.
arouse from sleep, discourage.
Hie eh magh ass yn thie.
2. With various other verbs: doostey ass cadley,nbsp;cur ass cree.
-ocr page 188-
172 cur ass, scryssey ass,nbsp;tuittym ass y cheilley,nbsp;tayrn ass y cheilley,nbsp;ve moyrnagh ass, 3. In phfcises, as; ass laue, immediately. ass lieh, on behalf of. |
SYNTAX utter (a shriek, amp;c.). erase. fall asunder, pull asunder,nbsp;be proud of. ass shilley, out of sight. ass hene, out of one’s mind. |
§ 136. HUG, CHUM, towards
I. Hug is used after verbs of motion.
He went towards the house. Put to sea.
Hie eh hug yn thie.
Cur hug y cheayn.
2. Before verbal nouns to express purpose.
A spit to roast meat.
take for oneself, pray to.nbsp;send, add.nbsp;to and fro.nbsp;affix.
Bher chum rostey feill.
3. In phrases, as:
goaill huggey, guee huggey [gys),nbsp;cur huggey,nbsp;huggey as veih,nbsp;sniemmey huggey.
4. Idiomatic, as:
The pronominal preposition hooin, towards us, is used to express the phrase 'let us go’. Hooin roin, let us depart.
§ 137. JEH, of, off, from, out of
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Literal use; T’eh jeant jeh fuygh. Honnick mee eh foddey jeh. 2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Partitive use: Paart jeh’n phobble. Per jeh ny deiney. Per jeh mooinjer Whiggin. 3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;In the following phrases:nbsp;jeh yioin, willingly. jeh chash, wild, unruly. |
It is made of wood. I saw him afar off. Some of the people. One of the men. One of the Quiggins. jeh hene, voluntarily, spontaneously. jeh raie, ungovernable. |
CLASSIFICATION OF THE USES OF THE PREPOSITIONS 173
4. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;After following verbs, amp;c.:
briaghtjeh, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ask (inquire) of.
jannoo ymmyd jeh, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;make use of.
lane jeh, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;full of.
jannoo . . . jeh, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;make . . . out of (from).
Ihiggey jeh, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;fire (a gun, amp;c.).
soiaghey jeh, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;accept.
goaill soylley jeh, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;enjoy.
5. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The form dy is also used, especially partitively, when the articlenbsp;is not employed:
paart dy vraane, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;some women.
paart jeh ny mraane, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;some of the women.
lane dy hollan, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;full of salt.
lane jeh’n tollan, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;full of the salt.
§ 138. DA, to, for
I. Literal use:
(a) After adjectives (generally with she).
’tis right for one.
'tis necessary for.
’tis good for.
’tis better for.
’tis worth (while) for.
(is) his father, how does he know?
s’cair da, sh’egin da,nbsp;s’mie da,
sh’fare (or sharé) da, sfeeu (or sheeu) da,
(b) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;After nouns:
(ta) ayr da, ere fys da?
insh da, tell, relate. jeeaghyn da, show.nbsp;bentyn da, belong to.nbsp;cur da, give to.nbsp;cur er-ash da, restore to.nbsp;cur oghsan da, reproach.
(c) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;After verbs;nbsp;freggyrt da, answer.nbsp;cur arrym da, obey.nbsp;oardaghey da, order.nbsp;coyrlaghey da, advise.nbsp;gialdyn da, promise.
Ihiggey da, allow, let.
2. To express the agent:
(a) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;After erreish or lurg to form the perfect participle.
Erreish daue er jeet dys shoh. On their arrival (having arrived)
here.
Lurg da er n’gholl. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;He having gone.
(b) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;After erreish, lurg to form the passive participle.
Lurg da ve coyrlit. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;He having been advised.
-ocr page 190-174 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;SYNTAX
§ 139. FO, FY, under, about, concerning
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Literal use, as:
It is under the table. I intend.
T’eh fo’n voayrd.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Idiomatic, as:
Te foym.
3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;In adverbial phrases:
fo atghim, afraid. fo meeourys, suspected.nbsp;fo lieau, at the foot of a mountain.
fy yerrey, at last. fy yerrey hoal, at long last.nbsp;fo halloo, subterranean.
4. After verbs:
cleiy fo, supplant.
Goll fo, sink. cur y lane fo, defy.
§ 140. GYN, DYN, without
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Literal use:
Dyn ping ayns my phoagey. Without a penny in my pocket.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;To express ‘not’ before the verbal noun:
Abbyr rish dyn gheet. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Tell him not to come.
Vel eh gheet ny dyn. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Whether he comes or not.
3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;In phrases (generally to express the English suffix -less):
gyn dooyt, doubtless. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;gyn grunt, bottomless.
gyn grayse, graceless. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;gynloght,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;guiltless.
gyn Iheihys, incurable. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;gyn oayl,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;foreign.
gyw tort, inconsiderate. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;gyn oyr, without cause.
§141. GY, DY, with
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;This preposition is used only in a few phrases: generally before lieh,nbsp;a half.
meeiley dy lieh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;a mile and a half.
stundayrt dy lieh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;a yard and a half.
keead dy lieh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;150.
thousane dy lieh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;1,500.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;In forming adverbs:
dy-mie, well. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;dy-mooar, greatly.
§ 142. GY, GYS, DY, DYS, to, towards I. Literal use: motion, as:nbsp;dy (gy) Ghoolish, to or towards Douglas.nbsp;dys (gys) yn ellan, to or towards the island.
-ocr page 191-CLASSIFICATION OF THE USES OF THE PREPOSITIONS 175
2. In phrases:
veih oor dy oor, from hour to hour.
veih’n astyr dys yn astyr, from evening to evening.
veih’n voghrey dys yn oie, from morning till night.
§ 143. AYN, AYNS, in, into
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Of time:
Ayns yn tourey, in summer.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Of motion to a place:
Erreish da Maughold er jeet stiagh ayns Mannin.
Maughold having come into Man.
3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Of rest at a place:
He is in Ballasalla.
ayns cah, liable, in case. ayns fakin, visible.nbsp;ayns shen, there.nbsp;dty {in dty), in thy.nbsp;nyn {in nyn), in our, amp;c.nbsp;n’oi, against.nbsp;ny mast’ oc, among them.nbsp;ny vud, amidst.
I am a strong man now. They are robbers.
T’eh ayns Bailey Hallagh.
4. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;In following phrases:nbsp;ayns sheshaght risk, accompanying.
ayns wheesh, inasmuch. ny {in e), in his, her.nbsp;my [in my), in my.nbsp;ny yeï {in e), after.
{in) gour, in front of. ny {in e) chour, for (him).
5. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Used predicatively after ta\
Ta mee my ghooinney lajer nish.
T’ad nyn maarlee.
6. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;In existence, extant:
Equivalent to ‘there’ in ‘there is’, ‘there are’.
Ta laa hraew ayn jiu. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;There is a fine day to-day.
Cha Ihisagh shiu goll magh as yn earish oik t'ayn, You ought not to go out considering the bad weather there is.
7. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;After cur, amp;c., in phrases like:
cur ayns cooinaght jeh, remind of. cur dwoaie ayns, make (one) hate.nbsp;goaill ayns laue, imdertake.
§ 144. EDDYR, between, among
I. Literal use:
Cliaghtey eddyr ny Romance. A custom among the Romans. T’eh ny haghter eddyr Jee as He is a messenger between God
and man.
dooinney.
-ocr page 192-SYNTAX 176 2. Idiomatic: Cha jeanym shen eddyr. Eddyr shoh ny shen. |
I shall not do that at all. Either this or that. |
§ 145. LESH, with
With the woman.
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Literal use:
Lesh y ven.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;With she to denote possession:
Who owns them?
Quoi s’lesh ad?
Also with ta.
Ta’n cabbyl Ihiams. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The horse is mine.
3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;With she and adjectives to denote ‘in the opinion of’.
S’feeu (sheeu) Ihiam. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;I think it worth my while.
B'oddey lesh. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;He thought it long.
4. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;To denote instrument or means.’
Va’n uinnag brisht lesh clagh. The window was broken by a
stone.
Hooar eh baase lesh (yn) accyrys. He died of hunger.
5. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;With verbs:
cur lesh, bring, carry. fheet lesh, succeed, prosper.
6. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;In phrases:
lesh-y-cheilley, together. lesh hene, his own.nbsp;lesh-y-choonid, rather narrow.
lesh as noi, pro and con. lesh shoh, herewith.nbsp;lesh traa, deliberately.
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Literal use:
rish y dooinney, to the man.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;With verbs:
eaisht rhym, listen to me. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ny fuirree rhym, do not wait for
bentyn rish, touch. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;me.
cur rish, practice, commit.
-ocr page 193-CLASSIFICATION OF THE USES OF THE PREPOSITIONS 177 loayrt risk, accost.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;gheet risk, appear, come into
Ihiantyn risk, adhere. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;view.
goaill risk, confess, acknowledge.
3. In phrases:
ry koi, for (use of). nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ry keet, future.
§ 147. MYR, like, as
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Literal use:
myr uskag, like a bird.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Idiomatic:
Myr s’niessey da’n ckraue s’miljey yn eill.
The nearer to the bone the sweeter is the flesh.
3. In phrases: myr shen, thus.
myr geddin, likewise, the same.
§ 148. VEIH, VOlSajrom
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Literal use:
veik Doonedin dy Lunnin, from Edinburgh to London. voisk y laue gys y veeal, from the hand to the mouth.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Idiomatic:
te voym, I have lost it.
§ 149. RO, ROISH, before
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Of time:
ro laue, beforehand.
roish shen, formerly. roisk skok, previously.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Idiomatic:
cur roisk, propose. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;ny bee aggie ort roym, don’t be
goll roish, depart. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;afraid of me.
roie roisk, run from. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;failt royd! welcome!
te roym, I intend.
§ 150. HARRISH, beyond, over, past
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Of motion:
Lheim ek karrish y voalley. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;He leaped over the wall.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Figuratively: ‘in preference to’, ‘beyond’.
Harrish myr ve jeih bleeaney as Compared with what it was 30 feed er-dy-kenney.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;years ago.
Harrish myr va lowal da. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Beyond what was lawful for him.
A a
-ocr page 194-178 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;SYNTAX
3. In phrases:
harrish tushtey, incomprehen- goll harrish, repeat.
sible. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;harrish as tarrish, over and over.
§151. TROOID, through, by means of
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Physically:
trooid e laueyn, through his hands.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Figuratively:
trooid shen, owing to that.
§ 152. MY, MYSH, about, around
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Time: mysh yn astyr, in the evening.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Place: mysh yn thie (generally mygeayrt), aroimd the house.
3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;About: Hug ad {nyn eaddagh) moo. They donned their clothes.
Cre t’ou mysh? What art thou about?
4. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;In phrases:
mychione, concerning. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mygeayrt, aroimd.
§ 153. MY, MYR, MARISH, with, accompanying
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Literal use:
Mdrish y dooinney, with the man.
Mdrish y cheilley, in each other’s company.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;In phrases:
mdrish shen, therewith. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;mdrish shen as ooilley, there
withal.
my cheilley, together. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;my-hwoaie, northward,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;amp;c.
my-choau, in chaff. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;my-vlaa, in flower.
my-rass (or resh), in seed. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;my-yeish, in ear (com,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;grain),
my-ner, in front. (In idiom cur my ner, behold.)
§ 154. LIORISH, by, beside
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Literal: Scruit liorish Juan. Written by John.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;lAiomaXic: Liorish yn awin. Beside the river.
3. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;In phrases: Liorish shen. Thereby.
§ 155. DERREY, to, towards
1. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Literal: Lhig dooin goll nish derrey Bethlehem. Let us now go to
Bethlehem.
2. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Idiomatic: Derrey higyn oie. Until the night come.
-ocr page 195-CLASSIFICATION OF THE USES OF THE PREPOSITIONS 179
§ 156. PREPOSITIONAL PHRASES
Erskyn, above—er my skyn, er dty skyn, er e sk}m, er nyn skyn.
Fegooish, without—m’egooish, dt’egooish, ny gooish, ny fegooish, n5m vegooish.
Son, for—er my hon, er dty hon, er e hon, er e son, er nyn son.
Cour, for—^my chour, dty chour, ny chour, ny cour, nyn gour.
Cooyl, behind—my chooyl, dty chooyl, ny chooyl, ny cooyl, n5mgooyl.
Lurg, after—my lurg, dty lurg, ny lurg, nyn lurg.
Oi, against—m’oi, dt’oi, n’oi, ny hoi, n5m oi.
Trooid, through—my-hrooid, dty-hrooid, ny-hrooid, ny-trooid, nyn-drooid.
Fud, among—ny-vud, nyn-vud.
Jeï, after—my-yei, dty-yei, ny-yeï, ny-jeï, nyn-yei.
Coair, near—my-choair, dty-choair, ny-choair, ny-coair, nyn-goair.
Mychione, concerning—my-my-chione, my-dty-chione, my-e-chione, my-e-kione, my-nyn-gione.
Beealloo, in front of—er-my-veealloo (gheu-my-veealloo), er-dty-veealloo (^heu-dty-veealloo), er-ny-veealloo (fheu-ny-veealloo), er-ny-beealloo (9heu-ny-beealloo), er-n5m-meealloo (9heu-nyn-mee-alloo).
Cooylloo, behind—er-my-chooylloo (9heu-my-chooylloo, amp;c.), er-dty-chooylloo, er-ny-chooylloo, er-ny-cooylloo, er-nyn-gooylloo.
Many of these phrases are obsolescent, the different persons being
formed with the aid of ec and its compounds;
er-skyn-aym, above me. fegooish-ayd, without thee.nbsp;son-echey, for him.nbsp;cour-eck, for her.nbsp;cooyl-ain, behind us.nbsp;lurg-eu, after you.
noi-oc, against them. trooid-aym, through me.nbsp;fud-ayd, among thee.nbsp;jet-echey, after him.nbsp;mychione-eck, about her.nbsp;coair-aym, near me.
ny (a contraction of ayn or in e (in his), now used in all persons) is often prefixed, as:
ny-chour-eck, ny-chooyl-ain, ny-lurg-eu, ny-hrooid-a5mi, ny-vud-ayd, ny-yei-echey.
Mastey, among, amidst—mast’aym, mast’ayd, mast’echey, mast’-eck, mast’ain, mast’eu, mast’oc.
-ocr page 196-CHAPTER Vin
§ 157. CO-ORDINATIVE CONJUNCTIONS
Ta ny shuyraghyn as braaraghyn aym ayns shoh, my sisters and brothers are here.
If we analyse this we find that there are two sentences of equal rank contained in it, as:
Ta ny shuyragh3ai aym ayns shoh.
,, braaraghyn ,, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;„
§ 158. SUBORDINATIVE CONJUNCTIONS
Ta fys aym dy vel eh ajms shen, ga nagh vaik mee eh, I know he is here, though I have not seen him.
Here, the second clause depends on the first, or is subordinate to it, therefore the conjimction uniting them is subordinative.
§ 159. SUBORDINATIVE SENTENCES {a) Conditional.
My vees eh mie, bee eh maynrey, if he be good, he will be happy. Dy beagh eh mie, veagh eh maynrey, if he were good, he would benbsp;happy.
Ta keeayll ommijys ny slooid ny fee ec dooinney creeney dy reayll, wit is foolishness unless a wise man has it to keep.
(b) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Concessive.
Ga dy vel dy chooilley red eu dy vod y theihll fordrail, ta shiu feer anvaynrey ny-yei, though you have everything that the worldnbsp;can afford, yet you are very unhappy.
(c) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Temporal.
Lurg diu ve ersooyl, after you were gone.
My daink eh, before he came.
Derrey hig eh, until he come.
Neayr as hooar eh baase, since he died.
Choud as v’eh bio, while he was alive.
Myr hie eh magh, as he went out.
{d} Consecutive.
Ve cha feayr dy ren yn ushtey riojey, it was so cold that the water froze.
-ocr page 197-THE CONJUNCTION nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;i8r
{e) Causal;
Er-yn-oyr dy vel oo er n’yannoo shoh, because thou hast done this. Myr ta shiu ayns shoh, as you are here.
Son dy vel shin er jeet, for that we have come.
(ƒ) Comparative;
Ta shoh ny smoo na shen, this is larger than that.
Na eshyn, cha row rieau Manninagh ny-share, than him, there was never a better Manxman.
§ i6o. General Examples ;
Shegin da’n derrey yeh ny’n jeh elley ve oik, one or the other must be wrong.
Myr ta’n tarrooghys eu, myr shen vees yn leagh eu, as is your industry, so will be your reward.
Va lUiam cha jeadagh, dy daink eh leah dy ve kione e vrastyl, William was so diligent, that he soon became the head of his class.
T’eh cha mie as t’eh mooar, as cha ma5mrey as saillish, he is as good as he is great, and as happy as he desires.
Lhig da fhalse fheet ny djm, nee’m goll, whether Charles comes or not, I shall go.
Te firrinys dy-mie er-fys, nagh vel ennaghtyn, ny irreeyn erbee dy-bragh girree ayns yn aigney gjm oj^, it is a well-known fact,nbsp;that no emotion, nor passion, ever arises in the mind without anbsp;cause.
-ocr page 198-CHAPTER IX
§ i6i. Parse each word in the following sentence: Ta Jamys gra dy nee lesh hene yn cabbyl t’ecliey.
Ta. An irreg. intrans. verb, indie, mood, pres, tense (verbal noun, ve), auxiliary to gra.
Jamys. A prop, noun, 3rd pers. sing., masc. gen., nom. case, being subject oita . . . gra.
gra. A verbal noun (compounded of ec ra), 3rd pers. sing, dy. A conjunction.
nee. An irreg. intrans. verb, indie, mood, depend, form of she, pres, tense.
lesh. A prep, pronoun (or pron. prep.), 3rd pers. sing., masc. gender, hene. An indeclinable noun, added to lesh for the sake of emphasis,nbsp;yn. A demons, adjective (or def. art.), nom. sing, masc., qualifyingnbsp;the noun cabbyl.
cabbyl. A com. noun, ist declens., 3rd pers. sing., masc. gend.,acc. case.
ta. An irreg. intrans. verb, indie, mood, rel. form, pres, tense (rel. pron. ny understood).
echey. A prep, pron., 3rd pers. sing., masc. gend.
§ 162. Parse the following sentence: Hug ee foaid moaney jiarg-loshtee er mullagh yn thie-schoill moghrey laa-Boaldyn.
Hug. An irreg. trans, verb, indie, mood, past tense (verbal noun, cur). ee. A pers. pron., 3rd pers. sing., fern, gend., nom. case, being subjectnbsp;of the verb hug.
foaid. A com. noun, ist declens., 3rd pers. sing., masc. gend., acc. case, object of the verb hug.
moaney. A com. noun, 3rd declens., nom. moain, 3rd pers. sing., fem.
gend., gen. case, governed by noun foaid. jiarg-loshtee. A comp, verbal noun, nom. jiarg-lostey, 3rd pers. sing.,nbsp;gen. case.
er. A preposition, governing dat. case.
mullagh. A com. noun, ist declens., gen. mullee, 3rd pers. sing., masc.
gend., dat. case, governed by prep. er. yn. Demons, adj., gen. sing., masc., qualif5nng thie-schoill.nbsp;thie-schoill. A com. comp, noun, 4th declens., 3rd pers. sing., masc.nbsp;gend., gen. case.
moghrey. A com. noun, ist declens., 3rd per sing., masc. gend., dat.
case, governed by the prep, er (understood). laa-Boaldyn. A comp. prop, noun, nom. same (old gen. laa Boal-dyney), 3rd pers. sing., masc. gend,, gen. case, governed by nounnbsp;moghrey.
-ocr page 199-PARSING nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;183
§ 163. Parse: Ta mee goll gys y vargey.
Ta. An irreg. intrans. verb, indie, mood, pres, tense (verbal noun ve).
mee. A pers. pron., ist pers. sing., nom. case.
goll. A verbal noun, 3rd pers. sing., dat. case, governed by the prep.
ec (comp, of ec doll). gys. A preposition.
y. Demons, adj., nom. sing, masc., qualifying the noun margey. margey. A com. noun, ist declens., 3rd pers. sing., masc. gend., dat.nbsp;case governed by gys.
§ 164. Parse: Cha nhegin dhyt eh y woailley.
Chan. A neg. adverb, causing eclipsis (sometimes aspiration), modifying the suppressed verb she.
[she]. The assertive verb, pres, tense, absolute form.
egin. A com. adj., pos. degree, qualifying the phrase ehy woalley.
dhyt. A prep, pronoun, 2nd pers. sing.
eh. A pers. pron., 3rd pers. sing., nom. case, subject of the suppressed verb she.
dy. A preposition, causing aspiration, and governing the dat. case (contracted to y).
bwoalley. A verbal noun, 3rd pers. sing., dat. case, governed by the prep. dy.
N.B. Eh dy woalley is the subject of the sentence.
§ 165. Parse; Haink eh dy chionnagh cabbyl.
Haink. An irreg. intrans. verb, indie, mood, past tense, 3rd pers.
sing, of the verb hig^ (verbal noun, gheet). eh. A pers. pron., 3rd pers. sing., masc. gend., nom. case, subject ofnbsp;haink.
dy. Prep, governing the dat. case.
kionnagh. Verbal noun, gen. kionnee, 3rd pers. sing., dat. case, governed by the prep. dy.
cabbyl. A com. noun,Tst declen., gen. cabbil, 3rd per. sing., masc. gend., acc. case.
* Old radical form chig.
-ocr page 200-CHAPTER X
§ i66. TA
As already stated there is no verb ‘ to have ’ in Manx. Its place is supplied by the verb ta followed by the preposition ec. The directnbsp;object of the verb ‘to have’ in English becomes the subject of thenbsp;verb ta in Manx; as, I have a book, Ta Hoar aym. The literal translation of the Manx phrase is ‘a book is at me
A few sentences are here given He has the book.
I have not it.
Have you my pen?
The woman had the cow.
The man had not the horse.
Will you have a knife to-morrow? He would not have the dog.
We used to have ten horses.
to examplify the idiom:
Ta’n lioar echey.
Cha nel ee ajnn.
Vel my phenn eu?
Va’n vooa ec y ven.
Cha row yn cabbyl ec y dooinney. Bee skynn eu mairagh?
Cha beagh yn moddey echey. Veagh jeih cabbil ain.
§ 167. ta
LHIAM, I own
As the verb ‘ have ’ is translated by ta and the preposition «c, so in a similar manner the verb ‘ own ’ is translated by the verb ta and thenbsp;preposition lesh. Not only is the verb ‘to own’, but also all expressions conveying the idea of ownership, such as. The book belongs tonbsp;me. The book is mine, amp;c., are translated by the same idiom.
1 own the book. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;\
The book is mine. | Ta’n lioar Ihiam.
The book belongs to me.;
The horse was John’s. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;1
The horse belonged to John. 1 Va’n cabbyl lesh Juan.
John owned the horse. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;)
The verb she may be used with this idiom also, but it is not very common in modem Manx, as;
S’lhiam yn lioar. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;By lesh Juan yn cabbyl.
I own the book. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;John owned the horse.
’ This translation appears peculiar at first sight, but it is a mode of expression to be found in other languages. Most students are familiar with the Latinnbsp;phrase Est mihi pater, I have a father (lit., a father is to me); and the Frenchnbsp;phrase Ce livre est d, moi, I own this book (lit., this book is to me).
-ocr page 201-IDIOMS nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;185
Notice the position of the words:
I have the book. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta’n lioar aym.
I own the book.
(Ta’n lioar Ihiam.
I S’lhiam yn lioar.
In translating such a phrase as ‘ I have only two cows the noun generally comes after the preposition ec, as Cha net aym agh daa wooa.nbsp;But colloquially the noun may precede:
Cha nel agh ynrican daa wooa aym.
§ 168. I KNOW
There is no verb or phrase in Manx which can cover the various shades of meaning of the Enghsh verb ‘to know’. We have fournbsp;phrases in Manx, shione dou, ta enn (or enney) aym, ta oayll aym, andnbsp;tafys aym, all meaning ‘ I know’; but these expressions have differentnbsp;meanings which must be carefully distinguished.
Whenever the English verb ‘know’ means ‘to know by heart’, or ‘ to know the character of a person ’, ‘ to know by study or experience',nbsp;amp;c., use the phrases ta oayll aym or shione^ dou (’tis known to me).
Whenever ‘ know ’ means ‘ to recognize ’, ‘ to know by appearance ’, ‘ to know by sight ’, amp;c., use the phrase ta enney aym er. This phrasenbsp;is usually restricted to persons.
When ‘know’ means ‘to know by mere information’, ‘to happen to know ’, as in such a sentence as ‘ Do you know whether John hasnbsp;come in yet?’ use the phrase ta fys aym, e.g. Vel fys eu daink Juannbsp;stiagh foast?
After the negative particle cha, fys becomes’s, as cha ’s aym, cha ‘s ayd, amp;c.^
Ta enn aym er agh cha nhione dou (cha vel oayll aym) eh.^ I know him by sight but I do not know his character. ‘ Do you knownbsp;that man coming down the road? ’ Here the verb ‘ know ’ simply meansnbsp;‘recognize’, therefore the Manx is Vel enn eu ery dooinney shen tanbsp;gheet sheesey road? If you say to a fellow-student, ‘Do you knownbsp;your lessons to-day?’ you mean, ‘Do you know them by rote?’ or,nbsp;‘Have you studied them?’ Hence the Manx would be 'Nhione diunbsp;ny lessoonyn eu jiu?’ or, ‘ Vel oayll eu er ny lessoonyn eujiu?’
S’mie shione dou. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;’Tis weU I am acquainted with.
Te er fys dou. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;’Tis known to me.
‘ Contracted from ’s oayll (Ir. is eol domh).
^ For those who know French (there are also two different verbs in German, wissen and kennen), it may be nsefnl to state that as a general rule shione dounbsp;or ta oayll aym corresponds to je sais, and ta enn aym to je connais.
^ Je le connais mais je ne le sais pas.
B b
-ocr page 202-186
SYNTAX
§ 169. I LIKE, I PREFER, I WISH
‘I like’, ‘I prefer’, and ‘I wish’ are translated by the expressions;
S’mie Uiiam.
S'laik Ihiam.
S’ail lhiam.‘
Sh’are Uiiam.’
S’laik Uiiam baiimey.
Share lesh bainney na feeyn. Laik lesh yn dooinney feiU?nbsp;B’laik Ihiu shen?
B’laik Uiiam eh.
Cha b’laik Ihien 3m ushtey. Bare Ihiam baiimey.
SaiUym dy darragh shiu.
’Tis good with me.
’Tis a liking with me. ’Tis a desire with me.nbsp;’Tis better with me.
I like milk.
He prefers milk to wine. Does the man like meat?nbsp;Did you like that?
I liked it.
We did not like the water. I would rather have milk.nbsp;I wish you would come.
If we change the preposition lesh in the above sentences for the preposition da, we get another idiom. ‘ It is really good for’, ‘ It is ofnbsp;benefit to’. S’mie dou eh. ‘It is good for me’ (whether I hke it ornbsp;not).
He does not like milk but it is good for him.
Cha mie lesh bainney agh s’mie da eh.
N.B. In these and like idiomatic expressions the preposition lesh conveys the person’s own ideas and feelings, whether they are innbsp;accordance with fact or not. S’feeu (or sheeu) Ihiam goll gys n’Albin.nbsp;I think it is worth my while to go to Scotland {whether it is really thenbsp;case or not). S’mooar Ihiam yn leagh shen. I think that a great pricenbsp;(I begrudge paying that). S’beg Ihiam eh. I think that little (I despisenbsp;that, another person may not).
The word ‘ think ’ in such phrases is not translated into Manx.
§ 170. I MUST
The verb ‘must’ when it means necessity or duty is usuaUy translated by the phrase shegin [sh’egin) dou, it is necessary for me.
Shegin dhyt, thou must.
Shegin da, he must, amp;c.
The English phrase ‘have to’ usuaUy means ‘must’ and is translated like the above, as ‘ I have to go home now’, Shegin dou goll dy valley nish.
The English verb ‘ must ’, expressing duty or necessity, has no past
Usually contracted to SaiUym, Share Ihiam.
-ocr page 203-IDIOMS nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;187
tense of its own. The English past tense of it would be ‘ had to as ‘ I had to go away then The Manx translation is as follows.
Beign (b’egin) dou, I had to; Beign diu, you had to, amp;c.
The English verb ‘must’ may also express a supposition, as in the phrase ‘you must be tired’. The simplest translation of this isnbsp;hee shiu skee, ‘you will be tired’. ‘It is probable that’, may also benbsp;used, as gyn-dooyt (doubtless) hee shiu skee.
The English phrase ‘ must have ’ always expresses supposition, and is best translated by the above phrase followed by a verb in the pastnbsp;tense, as, ‘You must have been hungry ’, Gyn-dooyt va shiu accryssagh.
The expressions ‘have to’ and ‘had to’ may also be translated by the preposition ‘ on ’ and the verb ‘ to be ’, as ‘ I have to go ’, Je orrymnbsp;dy gholl. ‘ He had to wait two hours ’, Ve er dy uirraght daa oor.
§ 171. I DIE
There is no verb ‘to die’ in Manx. The phrase Ta mee geddyn baase, I find or get death, is usually employed. The following examplesnbsp;will illustrate the construction:
The old man died yesterday.
We all die (or, shall all die). I shall die.
They have died.
You must die.
Hooar yn ^henn dooinney baase jea.
Yiowmayd ooilley baase. Yiowym baase.
T’ad er gheddyn baase.
Shegin diu geddyn baase.
The verb paartail, to depart, is occasionally used, as phaart ee, she died or departed.
§ 172. I OWE
The verb ‘to owe’ is generally translated into Manx by the phrase ‘ I am in (or under) debt ’.
Ta mee a3ms (fo) Ihiastynys.
Whenever the amount of the debt is expressed the phrase ‘There is ... on one’, is used, as;
He owes a pound. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta punt er.
You owe a shilling. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta skillin erriu.
Yn mayll d’eeck dagh unnane ass e heer Va bart leagher ghlass dagh blein:
As va shen orroo d’eeck m}^: keesh,
Trooid magh ny ^heerey dagh Oiel-Eoin.
(Moore’s Ballads, p. 6.)
-ocr page 204-i88 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;SYNTAX
The rent each one paid out of his land Was a bundle of green rushes each year.
And that was on them to pay as tax.
Throughout the country each St. John’s Eve.
When the person to whom the money is due is mentioned, the construction is a little more difficult, as ‘I owe you a poimd’, Tanbsp;punt ayd orrym, i.e. You have (the claim of) a pound on me—thenbsp;words in brackets being always omitted.
He owes me a crown. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Ta crooin aym er.
Here’s the man to whom you owe Er hoh yn dooinney ta’n argid the money.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;echey ort.
The verb ‘meet’ is usually translated by the phrases fheet ny whaiyl,^ coming in one’s meeting; and goll ny whaiyl, going in one’snbsp;meeting.
I met a man.
She met me.
I shall meet you.
He meets her.
I met them.
I meet her every morning and she meets me.
Haink mee ny whaiyl dooinney. Haink ee my whaiyl.
Higym dty whaiyl.
T’eh gheet ny quaiyl.
Haink mee nyn guaiyl.
Ta mee goll ny quaiyl dagh moghrey as fee 9heet mynbsp;whaiyl.
The verb meeiteil derived from the English ‘meet’ is also much
used:
I met the man.
I shall meet you to-morrow. I met her in the market.
Veeit mee rish y kooinney. Nee’m meeiteil riu mairagh.nbsp;Veeit mee ree er {or ayns) ynbsp;vargey.
All physical sensations, such as hunger, thirst, pain, amp;c., may be translated into Manx by saying that hunger, Sc., is on a person, as ‘Inbsp;am hungry’, Ta accyrys orrym. Lit.: Hunger is on me.
Vel accyrys ort? Cha nel accyrys orrym nish. Va paays Art thou hungry? I am not hungry now. We were very thirsty
’ Radical, quaiyl, i.e. co-ghail (dail, meeting, obs.).
-ocr page 205-IDIOMS nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;189
vooar orrin jea. Velnearey (s^awe) orroo? Va nearey vooar urree. yesterday.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Are they ashamed.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;She was very much ashamed.
Bee moym {pride) vooar er. Ny bee aggie {fear) ort. Chanelveg He will he very proud.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Fear not.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;He is not
dy chadley {sleep) er. Ta feayraght’ orrym. sleepy at all.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;I am cold.
In colloquial Manx, an adjectival phrase is more common than a substantive one, as fa mee accryssagh (or g’accyrys), paagh, nearit {ec),nbsp;moyrnagh (ass), agglit, cadlagh, feayr, ghing, skee (tired).
In imitation of the English such phrases as the following are common: ta mee gennaght feayr, I feel cold; ta mee gennaght skee, Inbsp;feel tired.
§ 175. I CANNOT HELP
The English phrase ‘ I cannot help that ’ is translated by saying I have no strength on that. Cha vel niart aym er shen. It can also benbsp;translated by Cha noddym jannoo risk or Cha jargym jannoo rish,nbsp;I cannot do to it.
(Cha row niart aym er.
Cha d'od mee jannoo rish.
Cha yarg
j Cha nodd5un ve er yannoo rish.
I couldn’t have helped it.
1 „ largym
When ‘cannot help’ is followed by a present participle in English, \xsQ jannoo fegooish, ‘do without’; with verbal noim, as:
I cannot help laughing.
Cha noddym jannoo fegooish gearey.
I could not help laughing.
Cha row mee jargal dy yannoo fegooish gearey {or garaghtee).
§ 176. I AM ALONE
There are two expressions which translate the English word ‘ alone ’ in such sentences as ‘I am alone’, ‘he is alone’, amp;c., i.e. Ta mee mynbsp;lomarcan. I am in my loneliness. Ta mee Ihiam pene. I am withnbsp;myseh.
He is alone. T’eh ny lomarcan. T’eh lesh hene.
She was alone. V’ee ny lomarcan. V’ee Ihee hene.
Thou art alone. T’ou dty lomarcan. T’ou Ihiat hene.
We shall be alone. Beemayd nyn lomarcan. Beemayd Ihien hene.
' I have a cold, i.e. a disease, ia feayraght aym.
-ocr page 206-190
SYNTAX
§ 177. I ask The English word ‘ask’ has two distinct meanings according as it In Manx there are several words means ‘beseech’ or ‘inquire’ equivalent to ‘ ask ’, viz.: Ta mee g’eearree (er). 1 Ta mee shirrey (er). / Ta mee fênagt (jeh). Ta mee briaght (jeh). Ta mee feyshtey. God gives whatever we ask. Ask your friend for money. Ask God for those graces. He asked him why he had not done this. Ask him what time it is. They asked me a question. He inquired of them diligently what time the star appeared. |
ƒ ask, desire, or seek a favour. I ask, demand to know. I ask for information. I ask questions of. Ta Jee coyrt cre-erbee ta shin geearree. Shir argid er yn charrey eu. Shir er Jee ny grayseyn shen y choyrt dhyt. D'ênee eh jeh cre’n oyr nagh row shoh jeant echey. Brie jeh cre’n traa te. Vrie ad feysht jeem. D’eysht eh ad dy imneagh my chione y traa haink yn rollagenbsp;rish. |
§ 178- I do not care. It is no affair of mine. |
I DO NOT CARES’cummey Ihiam.' S’cummey dou. |
‘I ought’ or ‘7 should’ is translated by the phrase s’cair dou (’tis right for me); or the defective verb Ihisin.
You ought to go home.
I ought to [should) be happy.
We ought to have gone home.
Lhisagh shiu (s’cair diu) goU thie. ƒ Lhisin ve ma5mrey.
I S’cair dou ve maynrey.
/Lhisagh shin er gholl thie. I By chair dooin goU thie.
The phrase ‘I love her’ may be variously translated as follows: Ta graih aym urree.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Love is at me on her.
Ta mee graihagh urree. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;I am loving on her.
Ta mee cur graih jee. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;I am giving love to her.
Shynney Ihiam ee. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;She is dear with me.
* Lit., It is indifferent or equal with me.
-ocr page 207-igi
Cha gooin lesh. Nagh He does not remember. Doesnbsp;Cha by chooinee Ihiu. Naghnbsp;You remembered not. Did
IDIOMS
§ i8i. I REMEMBER
Gooin Ihiat?
Dost thou remember?
S’cooin Ihiam.
I remember. gooin Ihee?nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;By chooinee Ihien.
she not remember? We remembered. by chooinee Ihieu?nbsp;they not remember?
Instead of the usual construction, consisting of a verb in a finite tense followed by its subj ect (a noun or a pronoun), we very frequentlynbsp;meet in Manx with the following construction. The English finitenbsp;verb is translated by the Manx verbal noun, and the English subjectnbsp;is placed before the verbal noun. The following examples willnbsp;exemplify the idiom:
I’d prefer that he should be there rather than myself. Is it not better for us that these should not be in the boat? I saw John when he was coming home. I knew him when I was a boy. The clock struck just as he came |
B’are Ihiam eh dy ve a5ms shen na mish. Nagh nhare dooin gyn ad shoh dy ve ayns y vaatey ? Honnick mee Juan as eh fheet dy-valley. B’ione dou eh as mish my ghuilley. Woaill yn clag as eh qheet stiagh. |
tn.
IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS
192
SYNTAX | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
IDIOMS Cre eriee t’eh jannoo te ^heet lesh. ^heei magh. Qheet neose. Haink ny sleityn risk ’sy yoin. Qheet stiagh. Dy heet lessen. Ta mee gheet my laue. |
193 In whatever he doeth he prospers. Derived from. A descent. The mountains appeared in the distance. An income, revenue. To thwart, cross. I am getting better, improving in health. |
Cha mooar Ihiam da eh. S’mooar Ihiam eh.
S’beg Ihiam eh.
S’beg yn ymmyd 00.
S’beg ta fys echey.
S’beg y leigh.
Va’n vooinjer-veggey goaill y ghlion doo.
T’eh er dty hee.
Ta hied eu goll.
Te beg feayr.
Huitt ee er keayney.
Quoi da mac 00?
I don’t begrudge it to him.
I begrudge it.
I consider it too small.
Thou art not of much use.
’Tis little he knows.
’Tis little respect.
ayns The fairies were haunting the dark valley.
He intends to harm thee.
You may go.
It is a little cold.
She bmrst into tears.
Whose son art thou? c c
-ocr page 210-APPENDIX I
NOUNS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION
Many nouns in this declension ending in -agh or -ey attenuate to -ee. A few examples are here given:
mullagh, summit; gen. sing, mullee', nom. plur. mulleeyn.
eaddagh, cloth; moddey, dog; eaddee; moddee; eaddeeyn. moddee. | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
NOUNS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION 195 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
ig6 NOUNS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
APPENDIX II
A LIST OF NOUNS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION, MOSTLY FEMININE
Nom. |
Gen. |
Nom. Plur. |
Meaning. |
aile, m. |
ailey |
aileyn |
fire |
awin |
awin-ey |
awinyn |
river |
bailey, m. |
baljey |
baljyn |
town, amp;c. |
bannish |
banshey |
bannishyn |
wedding |
barragh |
barree |
barree |
tow |
bass |
bassey |
bassyn |
palm (of hand) |
beaynee, m.f. |
beayney |
beayneeyn |
reaper |
beinn |
beinney |
binn |
peak |
bing |
bingey |
bingyn |
jury |
binnid |
binjey |
binnidyn |
rennet |
Boaldyn |
Boald}Ti-ey |
Boaldynyn |
May |
braag |
braagey |
braag5ni |
shoe |
breag |
breagey |
breagyn |
lie |
breearr-ey |
breearrey |
breeairaghyn |
vow |
caillagh |
caillee |
cailleeyn |
old woman |
cainle |
cainley |
cainleyn |
candle |
carrick |
carrickey |
carrickyn |
rock |
cass |
coshey |
cassyn |
foot |
clagh |
cloaie |
claghyn |
stone |
cleaysh |
cleayshey |
cleayshyn |
ear |
cloan |
cleinney |
descendants | |
colbagh |
colbee |
colbeeyn |
heifer |
cooyrt |
coo3n'tey |
cooyrtyn |
court |
corp, m. |
kirpey |
kirp |
body |
creg |
creggey |
creggyn |
rock |
crash |
croshey |
croshyn |
cross |
eem |
eemey |
butter | |
faasaag |
faasaagey |
faasaagyn |
beard |
gaelg |
gaelgey |
Manx (language) | |
geay |
geayee |
geayghyn |
wind |
gloyr |
gloyr-ey |
gloyraghyn |
glory |
goayr |
goayrey |
goair |
goat |
grian |
greiney |
grian5ni |
sun |
ingin |
ingney |
ingnyn |
nail, claw |
jyst, m. |
jystey |
jystyn |
dish |
keeayll |
keiUey |
wit, sense | |
keeill |
killey |
kialteenyn |
church |
keird |
keirdey |
keird}^! |
trade, craft |
kennip |
kennipey |
kennipyn |
hemp |
198 |
NOUNS OF THE |
SECOND DECLENSION | |
keyll |
keyljey |
keylljyn |
wood, forest |
kiark |
kirkey |
kiarkyn |
hen |
laagh |
laaghey |
laagh};!! |
mire, mud |
laare |
laarey |
laareyn |
floor |
laue |
laue-y |
laueyn |
hand |
Ihesh |
Iheshey |
Iheshyn |
hip |
Ihing |
Ihingey |
Ihingaghyn |
pool |
Ihong |
Ihuingey |
Ihongyn |
ship |
meayn |
meainey |
ore | |
meinn |
meinney |
meinnyn |
meal |
muc |
muigey |
mucyn |
pig |
mwyllin, m. |
mwyljey |
mwyljyn |
mill |
noid, m. |
noidey |
noidyn |
foe |
ooir |
ooirey |
ooiraghyn |
earth, dust |
ruUick |
ruillickey |
rullickyn |
churchyard |
scoamagh |
scoamee |
scoameeyn |
throat |
shesheragh |
shesheree |
sheshereeyn |
plough-team |
sooill |
sooilley |
sooillyn |
eye |
soost |
sooisht-ey |
SOOSt}^! |
flail |
straid |
straiddey |
straiddyn |
street |
uhllin |
uhlley |
uhUinyn |
stack-yard |
APPENDIX III
The following list contains practically all the nouns belonging to this declension which remain in Manx. | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
APPENDIX IV
Most of the nouns which formerly belonged to this declension now belong to other declensions. A list of those occasionally met with innbsp;literature is here given.
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
The following are old dative (or genitive) forms now used nomina-tively and belonging to other declensions: |
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
' Also second declension. |
APPENDIX V | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
IRREGULAR VERBAL NOUNS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Dd2 |
INDEX TO ACCIDENCE fawning, io6 fear, 103nbsp;feed, 117 fib,III fibre, 115 fighting, 55nbsp;filch, 108nbsp;file, n., 114 find, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;87 fine, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;118nbsp;finger, 107nbsp;fire, 60, 116nbsp;first, 62nbsp;fish, 52nbsp;fish-hook, 114nbsp;fist, 113nbsp;five, 62 flail, 56 flame, 114nbsp;flattering, 106nbsp;flea, 114nbsp;flesh, 58nbsp;flexible, 104nbsp;float (fishing),nbsp;114 flower, 104, III, 116 foe, 60 fold, 52nbsp;follower, 114nbsp;folly, 109nbsp;food, 56nbsp;foot, 104nbsp;ford, 79, 114nbsp;forefather, 109nbsp;forefinger, 107nbsp;foremost, 104nbsp;fork, nonbsp;forlorn, 108nbsp;form, V., 103nbsp;forsake, 79nbsp;forward!, 102nbsp;foundation, 104nbsp;fountain, 115nbsp;free, 79nbsp;freeze, 93nbsp;Frenchman, 50nbsp;frequent, 109nbsp;Friday, 98nbsp;friend, 103, 116nbsp;from, 100nbsp;furrow, 115nbsp;future, 105 |
gander, 105 garter, 114nbsp;gasp, 108nbsp;generous, 117nbsp;get, 87nbsp;giant, 54nbsp;gift. IIInbsp;girl, 60nbsp;give, 85nbsp;glen, 52nbsp;globe, 106nbsp;globule, 113nbsp;glory, 49nbsp;go, 91nbsp;goad, 115nbsp;goat, 51nbsp;god, 103nbsp;gold, 117nbsp;golden. IIInbsp;good, 103nbsp;good-bye!, 102nbsp;goodness, 113nbsp;goods, 108nbsp;goose, 51nbsp;gospel, 109nbsp;gossamer, 115nbsp;governor, 104nbsp;grain, 57nbsp;granary, 106nbsp;grandfather, 51nbsp;grandmamma, 51 grandmother, 51 grandpapa, 51nbsp;grass, 116nbsp;green, 114nbsp;grey, 106nbsp;grey-eyed, 107nbsp;grove, 52nbsp;grow, 90nbsp;guilt, 103nbsp;guilty, 104nbsp;gurgle. IIInbsp;gurnard, 52 hail!, 102 hand, 104nbsp;handicraft, 105, |
108 handle, 113, 114 handy, 108nbsp;happen, 93nbsp;harbour, 57nbsp;hard-hearted, 107 hash, 108 hate, 49nbsp;hateful, 113nbsp;haughty, 105nbsp;haunt, 109nbsp;head, 114nbsp;headstrong, 105nbsp;heal, 118nbsp;health!, 102nbsp;heap, 115nbsp;hear, 89nbsp;heart, 107, 116nbsp;heat, 103nbsp;heath, -er, 115nbsp;heavy, 65nbsp;heavy-hearted, 109 hedge, 52 heed, 104nbsp;heifer, 51nbsp;height, 105nbsp;heir, 103nbsp;help, 79nbsp;helping, 50nbsp;hemisphere, 108nbsp;hen, 50nbsp;her, 62nbsp;herb, 56, innbsp;here, 96nbsp;hereafter, 99nbsp;heresy, 107nbsp;heterodoxy, 109nbsp;high, 104nbsp;hill, 52 hill (rocky), 114 hillock, 50nbsp;hilt, 113nbsp;his, 62nbsp;hockey, 115nbsp;hold!, 102nbsp;Hollantide, 59nbsp;hoUow, 114nbsp;homely, 117 |
205 honey, 59 hook, 114nbsp;horizon, 106nbsp;horn, 114nbsp;horrible, 117nbsp;horse, 51, 116nbsp;horseman, 54nbsp;hostile, 116nbsp;hot, 65nbsp;hotel, 106nbsp;hound, 52nbsp;house, 49nbsp;household, 105nbsp;how, 95nbsp;human, 117nbsp;hump, 115nbsp;humpbacked, 107 hunchback, 113 hurrah!, 102nbsp;hurt, 117nbsp;hypocrisy, 109 idiot, 115 idiotic, 108nbsp;if, 100 ignorant, 108 illustrious, 104nbsp;image, 50nbsp;immeasurable,nbsp;104 immediately, 96 impenitence, 104nbsp;impious, 104nbsp;important, 109nbsp;importunity, 109nbsp;in, 95 incognito, 103 incompetent, 104 incomplete, 104 incomprehensible, 104nbsp;inconsistent, 104nbsp;indeed, 99nbsp;indisposition,nbsp;103, 108nbsp;inflexible, 104nbsp;information, 104nbsp;inn, 106nbsp;innocent, 104 |
206 INDEX TO ACCIDENCE | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
music, 105 musician, 105nbsp;mutter, 108
my, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;62
name, 59 narrow, 118nbsp;national, 104nbsp;near, 65nbsp;nearly, 95nbsp;neck, 107nbsp;necromancy, 106nbsp;needle, 58nbsp;neigh, innbsp;neighbour, 52nbsp;nice, 104nbsp;nickname, 107nbsp;night before last,
96
night-fall, v., 93 nimble, 117nbsp;noble, ninbsp;nonsense, 109nbsp;nook,I15nbsp;nor, or, loinbsp;north, 98nbsp;nose, 52nbsp;not, 95nbsp;notice, 116nbsp;now, 95nbsp;number, 104nbsp;nurse, 79nbsp;nut, 52
observant, 116 ocean, 59
of, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;off, 100nbsp;office, 105nbsp;officer, 105nbsp;often, 95nbsp;oh!, 102nbsp;old, 64nbsp;omnipresent,
108
on, 100 once, 96nbsp;one, 49
one-legged, 108 only, 62nbsp;open, 79
-ocr page 223-
INDEX TO |
ACCIDENCE |
207 | |
open-hearted, |
play-house, 106 |
reap, in |
Scotland, 60 |
io8 |
playmate, 106 |
receipt, 104 |
sea, 56, in |
openly, 99 |
pledge, 52 |
reciter, no |
seal (animal), 52 |
opportunity, 116 |
poet, 49 |
reconcile, 103 |
seat, 107, 115 |
order, 117 |
pool, 114 |
rectify, 118 |
secretly, 104 |
orphan, 114 |
porch, 104 |
red, 114 |
see, 79 |
orthodoxy, 106 |
porpoise, 113 |
reflection, 114 |
seed, 56 |
orthography. |
powder, 117 |
reform, 103 |
seeing, 50 |
106 |
power, 49 |
relapse, 103 |
seem, 93 |
other, 62 |
praise, 104 |
religious, 104 |
seldom, 95 |
ought, 93 |
preach, in |
remember, 79 |
senility, 109 |
our, 62 |
precocious, 108 |
renowned, 117 |
sense, 58, 109 |
out, 95 |
preface, 105 |
rent, 54 |
servant, 50 |
outside, 97 |
preparing, 55 |
repentance, 104 |
several, 49 |
own, adj., 62 |
presence, 103 |
report, 50 |
shadow, 114 |
president, 114 |
reservoir, 106 |
shallow, 105 | |
pain, 103 |
prettiness, 49 |
respect, 104 |
shame!, 102 |
pale, 106 |
price, 50 |
resplendent, 108 |
sharp-eyed, 107 |
pale-com |
prince, 49, 113 |
revive, 103 |
shatter, 108 |
plexioned, 107 |
privilege, 106 |
ride, 117 |
sheaf, 52 |
palm (of hand). |
profession, legal. |
right, 103 |
sheep, 50 |
no |
105 |
ring, V., in |
ship, 52 |
palmistry, 105 |
profession, medi |
ripe, 108 |
shirt, 60 |
pamphlet, 114 |
cal, 105 |
river, 57 |
shivering, 80 |
pane, 113 |
proficient, 107 |
robbing, 80 |
short, 64 |
papa, 51 |
prolong, 118 |
rock, 57 |
short-Uved, 107 |
paper, 107 |
prosperous, 109 |
rod, 114 |
shortly, 99 |
particle, 115 |
province, 108 |
room, 107 |
short-sighted. |
path, 114 |
pshaw! 102 |
root, 115 |
107 |
patience, 116 |
publicly, 99 |
round, no |
short-winded. |
patience!, 102 |
pupil, in |
royal, 117 |
107 |
patron, 106 |
purify, 103 |
rule, 105 |
should, 93 |
peace, 117 |
put, 85 |
ruler, 51 |
shoulder, 52 |
pebble, 108 |
ruling, 55 |
sick, no | |
pedlary, 108 |
quadruped, 105 |
run, 90 |
sigh, 117 |
peel, 108 |
quantity, 109 |
runner, 55 |
sight, 107 |
pen, 58 |
queen, 51 |
running, 55 |
signal, 117 |
penmanship, n i |
quoth, 93 |
silence!, 102 | |
penny, 52 |
sail, 54 |
simper, 108 | |
people, 49 |
rain, v., 93 |
salad, 114 |
simple, 108 |
perfect, 108 |
raise, 79 |
same, 62 |
simpleton, 113 |
pig. 58 |
ram, 51 |
sand, 58 |
since, 100 |
pigeon, 115 |
rampart, 115 |
Saturday, 98 |
sinful, 63 |
pigmy, 113 |
rasp, 114 |
sausage, 115 |
singe, 79 |
pin, 50 |
rather, 95 |
say, 86 |
single-handed. |
pinch, 115 |
ravine, 114 |
sceptre, 106 |
109 |
pinnacle, 107 |
raving, 80 |
school, 106 |
sister, 51 |
pious, 104 |
reading, 49 |
schoolmaster. |
sit, 114 |
pity!, 102 |
reading-lesson. |
106 |
sixth, 62 |
place, 50 |
55 |
score, 49 |
skewer, 113 |
play, 10 |
ready, 104 |
Scot, 52 |
skin, 52 |
2o8 |
INDEX TO |
ACCIDENCE | |
skip, 107 |
strong, 105 |
this year, 96 |
under, 100 |
slacken, 118 |
stubble, 107 |
thorn, 115 |
under-secretary. |
slander, 103 |
student, in |
threaten, 79 |
104 |
sleep, 108 |
stuff, V., 115 |
three, 49 |
understanding. |
sleeper, 115 |
subdivide, 103 |
throat, 58 |
104 |
slow, 64 |
subdued, 104 |
through, 100 |
unfriendly, 103 |
slumber, 107 |
subterranean. |
throw, 90 |
unicorn, 109 |
smile, 108 |
104 |
thunder, 58 |
universal, 103 |
smith, 60 |
subtle, 107 |
thunder, nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;93 |
unready, 104 |
snail, 52 |
suburb, 104 |
Thursday, 98 |
until, 100 |
sneeze, in |
such, 62 |
thus, 100 |
unwilling, 104 |
snow, V., 93 |
sudden, 107 |
thy, 62 |
up, 97 |
social, 117 |
sulky, 63 |
tight, 103 |
upright, 116 |
soft, 64 |
summit, 54 |
time, 108 |
uprightness, 59 |
soldier, 49 |
sun, 57 |
timid, 116 |
use, 107 |
solitary, 108 |
Sunday, 98 |
title, 105 | |
some, 62 |
surface, 114 |
to, 100 |
valley, 59 |
sometimes, 99 |
surname, 60 |
to-day, 95 |
valuable, in |
son, 51 |
swallow, V., 114 |
together, 99 |
vein, 60 |
soon, 96 |
sweet, 113 |
to-morrow, 95 |
very, 95 |
sorcerer, 51 |
swim, 90 |
to-night, 95 |
vice, 107 |
sorrow, 103 |
too, 95 |
vice-president. | |
soul, 59 |
table, 56 |
top, 107 |
104 |
south, 98 |
tail, 103 |
topsy-turvy, 99 |
view, 104 |
speak, no |
take, 91 |
torment, 79 |
vowel, 107 |
speckled, 106 |
talk, 108 |
tortuous, 107 | |
sphere, 108 |
talking, 55 |
touch, 79 |
wait, 79 |
spin, 115 |
taste, 103 |
tower, 114 |
wake (of a ship). |
spirit, 107 |
tax, 106 |
town, 104 |
106 |
splendour, 108 |
teacher, 105 |
train, 103 |
walking, 50 |
spoil, 78 |
tear, 56 |
tree, 49 |
walking-stick. |
spot, 103 |
tent, 114 |
trick, 115 |
55 |
sprig, 114 |
than, 100 |
trio, 49 |
wall, 104 |
spring, 107 |
thanks, 102 |
truth, no |
wan, 106 |
square, 113 |
thanksgiving. |
Tuesday, 98 |
war, 56 |
squint, 107 |
106 |
turf, 59 |
warden, 50 |
stab, 115 |
that, 100 |
turkey, 105 |
watch, 116 |
stand, 79 |
the, 62 |
turnip, 113 |
water, 106 |
star, 116 |
theatre, 106 |
twelfth, 62 |
weaver, 50 |
stepmother, 104 |
their, 62 |
twenty, 49 |
web (of cloth), |
stiff-necked, 107 |
then, 95 |
twilight, 103 |
50 |
stone, 108 |
there, 96 |
twist, 115 |
wedding, 57 |
story, 109 |
therefore, 100 |
two, 49 |
Wednesday, 98 |
straight, 63 |
thick, 62 |
week, 113 | |
strange, 63 |
thicket, 115 |
ugly, 62 |
weight, no |
straw, 107 |
thief, 108 |
umpire, 104 |
welcome!, 102 |
stream, 52 |
thimble, 115 |
unbelief, 104 |
weU-bred, 108 |
street, 58 |
thin, 65 |
uncle, 51 |
well-learned, 108 |
strength, in |
think, 79 |
uncomfortable. |
well-mannered. |
strike, 75 |
thinking, 105 |
109 |
108 |
stripped, 114 |
this, 62 |
uncover, 103 |
west, 98 |
INDEX TO ACCIDENCE 209 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
THE PLACE NAMES OF THE ISLE OF MAN
By J. J. KNEEN, M.A.
Dealing with the 17 parishes and containing over 6,000 place-names. A Treen map, showing the ancient territorial divisions, isnbsp;annexed to each parish. In six parts.nbsp;Demy 8vo, xxiv, 645 pp. Price 30s. net.nbsp;Publishers: the manx society. Douglas,nbsp;ISLE OF MAN.
-ocr page 228-PRINTED IN GREAT BRITAIN AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS, OXFORD BY JOHN JOHNSON, PRINTER TO THE UNIVERSITY
-ocr page 229- -ocr page 230-' -w iquot;' 'V